Basic Aviation Risk Standard

Implementation Guidelines

 Version 5, May 2014

 The International Council on Mining and Metals (ICMM)
supports the use of the Basic Aviation Risk Standard
(BARS) to improve aviation safety. BARS is specifically
aimed at contributing to improved aviation safety in the
resource sector and was developed by the Flight Safety
Foundation in conjunction with a number of extractive
industry companies, including several ICMM member
companies.

The standard is developed from a risk-based model

framed against the actual threats posed to aviation
operations which are then directly linked to associated
controls and recovery and mitigation measures. BARS is
a useful resource for any organization wanting to develop
new flight safety requirements or review existing ones.

Putting South Africa First

“We direct so much of our time and treasure towards the control of risk
not because we are timid, but because it allows us to use aviation to
do extraordinary things.”

Bill Voss, Flight Safety Foundation CEO and President, 2006–2012

 BARS IMPLEMENTATION GUIDELINES
Contents
A. Introduction................................................................................................................. xi
A.1 Purpose.......................................................................................................... xi
A.2 Document Structure......................................................................................... xi
A.3 Variances........................................................................................................ xii

B. BARS Audit and Company Operational Review........................................................... xiii

B.1 Two-dimensional Approach to Aviation Assurance.............................................. xiii
B.2 BARS Accredited Audit..................................................................................... xiv
B.3 Company Specific Operational Review............................................................... xiv

1.0: All Threats: Common Controls..................................................................................... 1

1.1: Approved Aircraft Operator.............................................................................. 1
1.2: Flight Crew Qualifications, Experience and Recency............................................ 2
1.3: Flight Crew Check and Training......................................................................... 3
1.4: Maintenance Personnel Qualification ................................................................ 7
1.5: Maintenance Training....................................................................................... 8
1.6: Basic Aircraft Equipment Fit.............................................................................. 8
1.7: Drug and Alcohol Policy.................................................................................... 9
1.8: Flight Time Limits............................................................................................. 9
1.9: Flight Crew Duty Time...................................................................................... 10
1.10: Maintenance Duty Time ................................................................................... 11
1.11: Aircraft Operator Safety Management System ................................................... 12
1.12: Accident and Incident Notification.................................................................... 13
1.13: Operational Risk Assessment............................................................................ 13
1.14: Sub-chartering Aircraft..................................................................................... 14

2.0: Runway Excursions...................................................................................................... 15

2.1: Airfield and Helipad Design.............................................................................. 16
2.2: Airfield Inspections.......................................................................................... 17
2.3: Landing Site Assessments................................................................................. 17
2.4: Balanced Field Length...................................................................................... 18
2.5: Balanced Field Length – No Performance Charts................................................. 19
2.6: Destination Weather Reporting......................................................................... 20
2.7: Slope guidance................................................................................................ 20
Page iii
 3.0: Fuel Exhaustion............................................................................................................ 21
3.1: Fuel Check...................................................................................................... 22
3.2: Flight Plan Weather Data.................................................................................. 23
3.3: Flight Plan....................................................................................................... 23
3.4: Instrument Flight Rules (IFR) Fuel Plan .............................................................. 24
3.5: Visual Flight Rules (VFR) Fuel Plan..................................................................... 25
3.6: Hot Refueling.................................................................................................. 25

4.0: Fuel Contamination...................................................................................................... 28

4.1: Fuel Testing..................................................................................................... 28
4.2: Fuel Filtration.................................................................................................. 29
4.3: Fuel Sampling.................................................................................................. 29
4.4: Fuel Storage.................................................................................................... 30
4.5: Drummed Fuel................................................................................................. 31

5.0: Controlled Flight Into Terrain (CFIT)............................................................................ 32

5.1: Night or Instrument Flight Rules (IFR) – Two Crew Operations............................. 33
5.2: Special VFR Procedures.................................................................................... 34
5.3: Night or IFR – Aircraft...................................................................................... 34
5.4: Night or IFR – Flight Planning........................................................................... 34
5.5: Night or IFR – Simulator Training....................................................................... 35
5.6: Night or IFR – Approach/Landing Recency.......................................................... 35
5.7: Night or IFR – Autopilot................................................................................... 36
5.8: Stabilized Approaches...................................................................................... 37
5.9: Mandatory Go-around Procedures..................................................................... 38
5.10: Flight Data Monitoring..................................................................................... 39
5.11: Multi-crew Operations..................................................................................... 40
5.12: CRM/ADM Training........................................................................................... 40
5.13: Terrain Awareness Warning System (TAWS)........................................................ 41

6.0: Incorrect Loading......................................................................................................... 42

6.1: Passenger Weight ........................................................................................... 43
6.2: Cargo Weight and Loading............................................................................... 44
6.3: Load and Trim Calculations............................................................................... 44
6.4: Manifest......................................................................................................... 45
6.5: Dangerous Goods Cargo (Hazardous Materials) ................................................ 46
6.6: Passenger Briefing........................................................................................... 47
6.7: Multi-language Briefing ................................................................................... 48

Page iv
7.0: Collision on Ground..................................................................................................... 49
7.1: Passenger Terminal Area .................................................................................. 49
7.2: Designated Freight Areas................................................................................. 50
7.3: Passenger Control............................................................................................ 50
7.4: Ground Procedures.......................................................................................... 51
7.5: Rotors Running Load/Unload ........................................................................... 51
7.6: Parking Apron.................................................................................................. 52
7.7: Perimeter Fence............................................................................................... 53
7.8: Airfield Control................................................................................................ 54

8.0: Collision in Air.............................................................................................................. 55

8.1: Cruising Altitudes............................................................................................ 55
8.2: Radar Controlled Airspace................................................................................ 56
8.3: Airfield Bird Control......................................................................................... 56
8.4: Traffic Collision Avoidance System (TCAS) ......................................................... 57
8.5: High Intensity Strobe Lights.............................................................................. 57

9.0: Structural or Mechanical Failure.................................................................................. 58

9.1: Single-engine Aircraft ...................................................................................... 58
9.2: Multi-engine Aircraft........................................................................................ 59
9.3: Supply of Spares.............................................................................................. 60
9.4: Hangar Facilities.............................................................................................. 61
9.5: Helicopter Vibration Monitoring ....................................................................... 62
9.6: Engine Trend Monitoring ................................................................................. 62
9.7: Minimum Equipment List (MEL)......................................................................... 63
9.8: Aural Cabin Pressure Warning System................................................................ 64

10.0: Weather....................................................................................................................... 65
10.1: Adverse Weather Policy.................................................................................... 65
10.2: Thunderstorm Avoidance.................................................................................. 66
10.3: Weather Radar................................................................................................ 67
10.4: Wind Shear Training......................................................................................... 68
10.5: VFR Minimum Requirements............................................................................. 69
10.6: Cold Weather Training ..................................................................................... 69

11.0: Medical Evacuation....................................................................................................... 71

11.1: Securing of Medical Equipment......................................................................... 71
11.2: Weight and Balance......................................................................................... 72
11.3: Medical Transfers............................................................................................. 72
11.4: Communications.............................................................................................. 72
11.5: Risk Assessment.............................................................................................. 73
11.6: Equipment Documentation............................................................................... 73
11.7: Equipment Inspection Schedule........................................................................ 74
11.8: Provision of Oxygen......................................................................................... 74
Page v
11.9: Flight Crew Qualifications, Experience and Recency............................................ 75
 12.0: Aircraft Accident........................................................................................................... 76
12.1: Aircraft Certification Standards......................................................................... 76
12.2: Emergency Response Plan................................................................................ 76
12.3: Emergency Locator Transmitter......................................................................... 78
12.4: Satellite Flight Following ................................................................................. 78
12.5: Flight Following............................................................................................... 79
12.6: Survival Kit...................................................................................................... 80
12.7: Flight Crew PLB............................................................................................... 80
12.8: First-Aid Kit .................................................................................................... 81
12.9: Passenger Dress Requirements.......................................................................... 82
12.10: Cockpit Voice Recorder (CVR)/Flight Data Recorder (FDR) .................................. 82
12.11: Upper Torso Restraint ...................................................................................... 83
12.12: Limitations in Sideways Seating........................................................................ 84
12.13: Crash Boxes..................................................................................................... 85
12.14: Rescue Firefighting ......................................................................................... 85
12.15: Insurance ....................................................................................................... 87

1 HELICOPTER EXTERNAL LOAD OPERATIONS................................................................. 88

13.0: Fuel Exhaustion – External Load Operations............................................................... 89

13.1: Fuel Reserve.................................................................................................... 89
13.2: Low Level Light................................................................................................ 90

14.0: Failure of Lifting Equipment – External Load Operations............................................ 91

14.1: Lifting Equipment............................................................................................ 91
14.2: Servicing Schedule........................................................................................... 92
14.3: Visual Inspections............................................................................................ 93
14.4: Shackles.......................................................................................................... 93

15.0: Inadvertent Load Release – External Load Operations................................................ 94

15.1: Manual and Electrical Release Mechanisms....................................................... 94
15.2: Standardized Controls...................................................................................... 95
15.3: Guarded Release Switch................................................................................... 95
15.4: Load Construction............................................................................................ 96

16.0: In-flight Loss of Control – External Load Operations................................................... 97

16.1: Pilot Experience............................................................................................... 97
16.2: Pilot Daily Flight Times..................................................................................... 98
16.3: Instrument Remote Indicators........................................................................... 98
16.4: Standard Operating Procedures......................................................................... 99
16.5: External Mirrors............................................................................................... 100
16.6: Load Weight.................................................................................................... 100
16.7: No Carriage of Passengers................................................................................ 101

Page vi
17.0: Line Fouling In Transit – External Load Operations..................................................... 102
17.1: Weighted Lines................................................................................................ 102
17.2: Never Exceed Speeds (VNE)................................................................................ 103
17.3: Maneuver Boundary Envelope.......................................................................... 103
17.4: Short-Line (<50 feet)........................................................................................ 104

18.0: Ground Loss of Control – External Load Operations.................................................... 105

18.1: Ground Briefing............................................................................................... 105
18.2: Aircraft Ground Control.................................................................................... 106
18.3: Ground Personnel............................................................................................ 106

19.0: Aircraft Accident – External Load Operations............................................................. 107

19.1: Flight Crew Helmets......................................................................................... 107
19.2: Flight Following............................................................................................... 107

2 HELICOPTER OFFSHORE OPERATIONS.......................................................................... 109

20.0: Helicopter to Vessel Interface – Offshore Operations................................................. 110

20.1: Helicopter/Ship Operations............................................................................... 110
20.2: Vessel Operations............................................................................................ 110
20.3: Pitch, Roll and Heave (PRH) Limits for Landing .................................................. 112

21.0: Night Controlled Flight Into Terrain/Water (CFIT/W) – Offshore Operations............... 113
21.1: Night Recency................................................................................................. 113
21.2: Night Offshore Time......................................................................................... 114
21.3: Night Offshore Procedures................................................................................ 114
21.4: Night Validation Flight..................................................................................... 115
21.5: Night Medical Evacuation (Medevac) Policy....................................................... 116
21.6: Serviceable Radio Altimeters............................................................................ 116
21.7: Weather Radar................................................................................................ 117

22.0: Helideck Collision – Offshore Operations.................................................................... 118

22.1: Helideck Control – Helicopter Landing Officer (HLO) and Assistants..................... 118
22.2: Helideck Inspection.......................................................................................... 119
22.3: Helideck Design............................................................................................... 120
22.4: Helicopter Performance.................................................................................... 120
22.5: Multiple Helicopters on Helideck Operations...................................................... 121

23.0: Rescue Hoist Operations.............................................................................................. 123

23.1: Crew Hoist Experience..................................................................................... 123
23.2: Training Program.............................................................................................. 123
23.3: Hoist Equipment.............................................................................................. 124
23.4: Night Hoist Offshore Operations....................................................................... 125

Page vii
 24.0: Aircraft Fuel Complication – Offshore Operations....................................................... 126
24.1: Refueling System Inspection............................................................................. 126
24.2: Offshore Alternates.......................................................................................... 126
24.3: Fuel Testing .................................................................................................... 127

25.0: Helicopter Accident – Offshore Operations................................................................. 128

25.1: Aircraft Flotation System.................................................................................. 128
25.2: Pop-out Windows............................................................................................ 129
25.3: Emergency Exit Lighting System........................................................................ 129
25.4: Liferafts.......................................................................................................... 130
25.5: Externally Deployed Liferafts............................................................................ 131
25.6: Life Jackets...................................................................................................... 131
25.7: Survival Suits................................................................................................... 132
25.8: Helicopter Underwater Escape Training (HUET)................................................... 133
25.9: Public Address (PA) System............................................................................... 133
25.10: Passenger to Crew Communication................................................................... 134
25.11: Additional Offshore Safety Briefing................................................................... 135
25.12: Cabin Baggage................................................................................................ 135
25.13: Flight Following............................................................................................... 136
25.14: Survival Kits.................................................................................................... 136
25.15: Emergency Response Plan (ERP)........................................................................ 137
25.16: Emergency Response Drills............................................................................... 137
25.17: Last Light Limitations....................................................................................... 138
25.18: Night Time Offshore Passenger Flights............................................................... 138
25.19: Linked Liferaft................................................................................................. 139
25.20: Acoustic Beacon.............................................................................................. 140
25.21: Re-breathers................................................................................................... 140

3 AIRBORNE GEOPHYSICAL SURVEY OPERATIONS.......................................................... 141

32.0: Personnel..................................................................................................................... 142

32.1: Aircrew Experience and Recency....................................................................... 142
32.2: Flight Crew Remuneration................................................................................ 142
32.3: Crew Complement........................................................................................... 142
32.4: Two-pilot operations........................................................................................ 143

33.0: Aircraft Equipment....................................................................................................... 144

33.1: Aircraft Canopy............................................................................................... 144
33.2: Upper Torso Restraints..................................................................................... 144
33.3: Oxygen Supply................................................................................................. 144
33.4: Supplemental Type Certificate (STC).................................................................. 144
33.5: Radar Altimeter .............................................................................................. 145
33.6: Securing Cockpit Equipment............................................................................. 145
33.7: Aircraft Heater................................................................................................. 145
Page viii
34.0: Survey Towed Device................................................................................................... 146
34.1: Helicopter External Load Requirements............................................................. 146
34.2: Weak Links...................................................................................................... 146
34.3: Inspection Program.......................................................................................... 146
34.4: Sling Equipment.............................................................................................. 147
34.5: Synthetic Cables.............................................................................................. 147

35.0: Survey Flight Operations............................................................................................. 148

35.1: Minimum Survey Heights.................................................................................. 148
35.2: Transit Altitude................................................................................................ 148
35.3: Survey Speed – Fixed Wing............................................................................... 148
35.4: Survey Speed – Rotary Wing............................................................................. 149
35.5: Turning Radius................................................................................................. 149
35.6: Night Instrument Flight Rules (IFR).................................................................... 149
35.7: Minimum Temperature..................................................................................... 150
35.8: Monitoring Radios........................................................................................... 150
35.9: Offshore Surveys.............................................................................................. 150
35.10: Performance Monitoring................................................................................... 151

36.0: Fatigue......................................................................................................................... 152

36.1: Single-pilot Flight Time..................................................................................... 152
36.2: Single-pilot Duties........................................................................................... 152
36.3: Two-pilot Flight Time........................................................................................ 153
36.4: Fatigue Management Considerations................................................................ 153
36.5: Accommodation.............................................................................................. 154

37.0: Defences...................................................................................................................... 155

37.1 Satellite Flight Following.................................................................................. 155
37.2: Local Flight Following....................................................................................... 155
37.3: Emergency Response Procedures....................................................................... 156
37.4: Flight Crew Clothing........................................................................................ 157
37.5: Crew Helmets.................................................................................................. 157
37.6: Survival Pack................................................................................................... 158
37.7: Life Jackets...................................................................................................... 158
37.8: Liferafts.......................................................................................................... 159
37.9: Underwater Escape Training............................................................................. 159
37.10: Flight Crew PLB............................................................................................... 160

4 SHORT-TERM OR EMERGENCY-USE AIRSTRIP OPERATIONS.......................................... 161

4.1: Design of the Short-term Airstrip...................................................................... 162
4.2: Obstacle Clearance.......................................................................................... 163
4.3: Airstrip Siting.................................................................................................. 165
4.4: Airstrip Construction........................................................................................ 166
4.5: Airstrip Operations.......................................................................................... 170
Page ix
4.6: Maintenance................................................................................................... 173
 5 HELIPAD GUIDANCE..................................................................................................... 174
1. Take-Off and Landing Area Size:........................................................................ 176
2. Buffer Area...................................................................................................... 177
3. Approach and Departure Paths......................................................................... 178
4. Rejected Take-Off Area (or ’Flyway’).................................................................. 180
5. Taxiways......................................................................................................... 180
6. Parking Area.................................................................................................... 181
7. Obstacle Marking............................................................................................ 182

6 BARS MEMBER Organization (BMO) – RELEVANT CONTROLS.................................. 186

6.1: Company Awareness........................................................................................ 186
6.2: Airfield and Helipad Requirements.................................................................... 186
6.3: Definitions...................................................................................................... 188

Page x
A. Introduction

A.1 Purpose
The Flight Safety Foundation (FSF) Basic Aviation Risk Standard (BARS) is a safety
standard aimed at resource sector aviation operations.

The BARS Implementation Guidelines complement the Standard by providing additional

context to the controls and defences presented against each threat. It assists resource
companies (‘company’), aircraft operators and BARS Registered Audit companies to
understand what evidence is required to validate the control and defence design and
operating effectiveness. These guidelines will assist both the Operator and the company
to implement the BAR Standard.

All national and international regulations pertaining to aviation operations must always
be followed. The information contained in the BAR Standard and this document is
intended to supplement those requirements.

A.2 Document Structure

This document covers threats and controls applicable to all aircraft operations and
addresses the role specific requirements applicable to certain aviation activities
conducted in the resource sector, such as external load and offshore operations.

These guidelines use the same risk-based format and same sections and control
numbering as the BARS for ease of cross-referencing. The information provided
for every BARS Control is presented in this document in the following format:

0.0 Basic Aviation Risk Standard (BARS) Control Title

Details the control as written in the BAR Standard. BARS Audit
Information to provide further context and background to the control, threat or defence Checklist
that is being addressed by the subsection. reference

ev idence The expected manner in which the issue has been addressed by the
aircraft operator (through drafting of procedures, etc.) that permits the
BARS auditor to make an assessment of whether the control or defence
requirements have been adequately addressed and/or implemented.

References presented as a ‘quotation’ are intended to highlight those aspects of

particular relevance to resource companies (‘company’).

Page xi
 A.3 Variances
Any variance to the use of the BAR Standard is at the discretion of the company in
consultation with the aircraft operator. It is recommended that any variance raised
be risk-assessed to demonstrate that the risks are tolerable and warrant the safe
continuation of operations. A schematic of the process is outlined in Figure 1.

Figure 1: BARS Process.

Page xii
B. BARS Audit and Company Operational Review

B.1 Two-dimensional Approach to Aviation Assurance

To reinforce the difference between a BARS Audit and an Operational Review, an example
of a two-dimensional approach to aviation risk management and assurance is presented
in Figure 2.

Verify Design Effectiveness Validate Operating Effectiveness

Are Controls in Place? Are Controls Effective?

Aircraft Operator/BARS Audit Protocol Field Location/Risk-based

FSF BARS AUDIT Operational Review

• Safety Management systems • Flight observations/procedures/crew-handling
• Flight and Duty time (fatigue) management • Passenger control/manifesting/weighing
• Flight Procedures • Weather reporting/flight planning
• Pilot and engineering training/recency • Field-based refueling systems/flight tracking
• System of aircraft maintenance • Helipad, helideck and airfield inspections
• Spare parts control • Search and rescue, emergency response plan

FSF Accredited Auditor Competent Aviation Specialist

Accredited Auditor and Registered Audit Company Company designated
Previous auditor qualifications Resource sector aviation operations experience
Objective, repeatable audits Documented, auditable operational reviews

INDUSTRY SUPPORTED COMPANY SPECIFIC

Figure 2: Two-dimensional approach to aviation risk management

The FSF BARS Audit ascertains aviation risk control ‘design effectiveness’. It is an
objective and transparent audit of an aircraft operator using FSF trained and accredited
auditors and a defined audit protocol mapped to the BAR Standard. This audit covers
common elements of an aircraft operator audit relevant to all parties with the aim of
providing one deep-dive audit to one standard for all interested parties to base their
approval on.

A second and equally important aspect is the Operational Review which assesses
aviation risk control effectiveness. More specifically, that the aircraft operator is
conducting their business in the manner that the BARS Audit identified them as being
capable of performing. It is a risk-based review focusing on company specific activities
and is based on a minimum of five critical controls:
1. Personnel – Pilots meet all licence and experience requirements and are fit for work.
2. Aircraft – appropriate for the activity and are suitably equipped.
3. Fuel – acceptable quality and quantity for the activity.
4. Weather monitoring – appropriate for the activity and environment.
5. Infrastructure – acceptable design and operating conditions for take-off and landing.

More critical controls can be added depending on the risks that are identified for control
during the pre-start operational risk assessment.

The Operational Review would not normally repeat the management/Head Office portion
that is covered by a BARS Audit, as it has a risk-based focus on relevant threats and their
associated controls for a particular aviation activity.
Page xiii
 The following guidance provides further assistance for a BMO to determine when an
Operational Review should be considered:

Consider Operational Review in addition to a BARS Audit

Activity Detail Frequency

Long-term helicopter or All contracts greater than six months in areas Start-up, annual
aeroplane activity in hostile that are assessed as not a mature and stable thereafter.
and/or poor regulatory regulatory environment and/or operating into
environment. areas assessed as benign or non-hostile.

Company owned and operated Company aerodromes, helidecks, production Start-up, annual
infrastructure supporting helipads and all long-term operational bases. thereafter.
aviation.

High risk helicopter role- Exploration, seismic, heli-rig, external load Start-up, annual
specific activity > three activities. thereafter.
months.

Offshore drilling and/or Include helideck review and associated Start-up, annual
seismic campaign > three procedures. thereafter.
months.

Geographic dispersion of an Operational sites that maybe permanently co- Annual.

aircraft provider fleet or flight located from Chief Pilot and Chief Engineer.
operations centers.

Current aircraft operator Aircraft accident, ground handling incident, or As required.

experiences a significant any incident that might have direct relevance on
incident related to operations. BMO’s activities.

Current aircraft operator Senior management changes, change in As required.

experiences material change ownership, change in base location, re-fleet or
to organization. other significant management of change process.

For those BMOs who do not have internal aviation specialists, a list of BARS registered
audit companies who offer specialist advice can be obtained from the BARS website.

BMOs are encouraged to share their Operational Reviews with the BPO on a voluntary
basis to ‘close-the-loop’ and provide an opportunity to incorporate review findings back
into the BARS audit process, to strengthen the Program even further.

For activities such as ad-hoc charter, short-term use of aircraft and ongoing aerial work
(no passengers) in a non-hostile environment, an Operational Review in addition to a
BARS audit may not be required based on the output of a risk assessment.

B.2 BARS Accredited Audit

A BARS audit using registered audit companies and accredited auditors provides an audit
of the operations and technical management systems of an aviation operator. It is a
deep-dive audit with the objective of clearly articulating and verifying what procedures,
processes and systems the aircraft operator has in place.

B.3 Company Specific Operational Review

An Operational Review is company specific, and entirely at the discretion of the company
using in-house or contracted specialists and is not always required. The Operational
Review does not repeat the management systems portion of the BARS audit, but is
a risk-based assessment of the relevant threats to a particular aviation activity. The
Operational Review is conducted as a field-based activity to ensure that standards and
practices reviewed during the BARS audit are also embedded into actual operations
supporting the resource sector.
Page xiv
1.0: All Threats: Common Controls

Common controls that apply to all threats outlined in the BAR Standard.
Threats to aviation must be managed to provide the necessary assurance for continued
safe operations at all times.

A risk-based standard allows the identification of critical controls that are intended to
prevent an incident from occurring. Those controls are outlined in the BAR Standard.

Some controls are specific to a single threat. However, there are a number of controls
required to be effective against all threats encountered in resource sector aviation
operations. These common controls are discussed further in this section.

1.1: Approved Aircraft Operator

Use only licensed aircraft operators who have been approved for use by a
Competent Aviation Specialist.

An aircraft operator must be in possession of a valid Air Operator Certificate (AOC) or

equivalent document issued by the responsible regulatory authority of the state of the
aircraft operator.

The issue of an AOC will require the aircraft operator to demonstrate an adequate
management organization structure, method of control and supervision of flight
operations, training programs, ground handling and maintenance arrangements
appropriate for the operations specified.

The operator must have clearly defined roles and responsibilities for the following
positions, or their equivalent:
• Head of Flight Operations; and
• Head of Check and Training.

Where required by the State of the aircraft operator, the persons appointed to these key
positions must be approved by the responsible regulatory authority.

ev idence The aircraft operator must have documented job descriptions for the key
positions including roles and responsibilities, reporting lines and interfaces.
Where applicable, the responsible regulatory authority should provide the
aircraft operator with a copy of any document approving a person to a
key position.
The aircraft operator has a person appointed and approved in all key
positions, and the organizational structure reflects the accountabilities and
level of responsibility assigned to the positions.

Page 1
 1.2: Flight Crew Qualifications, Experience and Recency

FLT 1.05.01 Flight crew must meet the requirements listed in Appendix 1 of the BAR Standard.
FLT 1.05.03
FLT 2.01.01 Minimum Qualifications

The aircraft operator must have a system that ensures all flight crew assigned to
participating BARS Member Organization flights have a current licence that meets both
the minimum requirements defined by the responsible regulatory authority and those
specified in Appendix 1 of the BAR Standard.

ev idence The aircraft operator must maintain records of Pilot qualifications, complete
with copies of flight crew licences and summaries of experience and type
ratings. A documented control mechanism must be in place to ensure that
Pilots are qualified and experienced to meet the task requirements when
assigned to flights.
Information contained on files maintained by the aircraft operator for each
individual flight crew should provide a record of flight crew qualifications.

Minimum Experience

The aircraft operator must have defined selection criteria and procedures for all flight
crew appointments, including full-time, free-lance/part-time and casual flight crew.
This should include minimum licensing and flying experience criteria.

Key to resource sector operations is the requirement for flight crew to have 12-months
experience in topographical areas similar to where the activity is being conducted.
The duration of 12-months is aimed at ensuring all seasonal variations are experienced
by flight crew enhancing their decision-making process. Examples of specific
topographical areas include PNG, South American Andes, Indonesia, Canadian and
Russian Federation arctic operations, hostile offshore environments and remote African
environments. See Page 3 of the BAR Standard for a definition of hostile and
non-hostile environments.

ev idence The aircraft operator must document minimum experience requirements for
all flight crew positions that reflect both the minimum standard for the roles
as defined in the BAR Standard and the requirements of the responsible
regulatory authority. Where the BAR Standard is not used for all operations,
there should be a statement indicating that crew who do not meet the
BARS requirements are excluded from BARS operations until the minimum
qualification and experience requirements are met.
Information contained on Pilot files and rostering records maintained by the
aircraft operator should show that the stated BARS requirements have been
met or that the individual is excluded from BARS operations until meeting
the minimum qualification and experience requirements.

Minimum Recency

The aircraft operator must not assign a Pilot-in-Command or a co-pilot as operating

flight crew on a flight unless they meet the minimum Pilot recency requirements of
Page 2 either the BARS or the responsible regulatory authority (whichever is the more stringent).
 The aircraft operator must have a records management system for recording and
monitoring all relevant flight crew recency parameters including, but not limited to:
• Day and night take-offs and landings;
• Flight time;
• Instrument flight time;
• Instrument approaches; and
• Requirements of the aircraft operators training and checking program.

The rationale behind minimum recency requirements rests largely on assuring flight
crew manipulative skills continue to be of the required standard. Variances to recency
skills may be considered when simulator training can be demonstrated as an effective
alternative and endorsed by the applicable regulatory authority.

ev idence The aircraft operator must document the method for tracking recency
requirements. Manual, paper-based systems are acceptable however
computer programs that more accurately track the varying limits are the
preferred option. Where BAR Standard is not used for all operations, a
statement must be included indicating that crew who do not meet BARS
recency requirements are excluded from BARS operations until such time as
these requirements are met.
A paper-based or electronic recency tracking system should be in place
with the aircraft operator. Associated records should confirm that Pilots are
maintaining the required recency and that the rostering system has attended
to upcoming check and training requirements prior to expiry. Flight crew files
and rostering records should confirm appropriate implementation.

1.3: Flight Crew Check and Training

Flight crew must receive annual training to the standards of the appropriate civil FLT 1.05.02
aviation authorities and two flight checks annually (or every six months for long- FLT 2.01.03
term contracted operations). The flight checks must include an annual instrument FLT 2.03.01
rating renewal (where applicable)/proficiency or base check (non-revenue) and a FLT 2.03.02
route check (revenue-flight permissible). FLT 2.03.16
FLT 2.03.19
Where distinct climatic seasons such as snow/ice winter conditions are
FLT 2.05.02
experienced, training related to the seasonal change is recommended. Before
commencing flight duties in a new location on long-term contract, all flight crew
must receive a documented line check that includes orientation of local procedures
and environment.

A check and training program must be provided to ensure that flight crew are trained
prior to commencing and while engaged in activities supporting BARS Member
Organizations. The program is to ensure individual competencies and the aircraft
operator’s flight standards are being maintained.

Flight Check and Training – Personnel

Where the applicable regulatory authority has provided the aircraft operator with
delegated authority to conduct check and training, the aircraft operator must ensure
that selection of personnel is merit-based and demonstrate the consistent application
of standards, ethics and objectiveness. Page 3
 ev idence The aircraft operator must document the minimum experience requirements
and selection criteria applicable for positions within the aircraft operator’s
check and training program. Records should confirm that the documented
requirements have been applied.

The aircraft operator’s check and training captains must:

• Receive initial and periodic training evaluations;
• Be approved by the responsible regulatory authority; and
• Follow established check and training criteria.

Where possible the crew providing the training should be independent (different) to
those conducting the checking of the Pilots.

ev idence Details of the aircraft operator’s check and training program should be
published in the Operations Manual and follow established criteria. The
syllabuses and procedures for initial training and approval and the processes
for conducting periodic training, evaluation and ongoing standardization
of check and training Pilots should also be documented. Check and training
captains’ records should confirm that the documented requirements have
been applied.

Flight Crew Check and Training – Program

The aircraft operator must not assign a Pilot-in-Command or a co-pilot as an operating
crew member of a flight unless that person has met all applicable requirements of the
aircraft operator’s training and checking program, and has been certified by a check
Pilot as being competent to act as an operating crew member. Such requirements must
be applied to flight crew likely to be assigned to a BARS Member Organization flight
regardless of their employment basis (e.g. full-time, free-lance, part-time or casual).

Ground Training
The operator’s flight crew ground training program must cover all the aspects of normal
operations and include:
• Altitude and terrain awareness, including items highlighted in the FSF ALAR Briefing
Note 3.2 – Altitude Deviations and Briefing Note 5.2 – Terrain;
• Aircraft performance, including the requirements of the responsible regulatory
authority; Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) and the aircraft operator’s
Standard Operating Procedures (SOPs). Address items such as how the performance
is calculated and the applicable procedural controls that apply (e.g. obstacle
clearance calculations, runway performance, helicopter in-ground/out-of-ground
effect performance, etc.);
• Rejected take-off, including runway performance theory to provide an increased
understanding of V speeds and how Balanced Field Length/Rejected Take-off criteria
are determined;
• All instrument approaches used by the aircraft operator, including instrument
approach aids and procedures that are in use in the aircraft operator’s area
of operation;
Page 4
 • English Language Proficiency for flight crew where it is required by the applicable
regulatory authority and where international operations are being conducted; and
• For helicopter operators an understanding of Performance Class 1, Class 2, Class 2
Enhanced and Class 3 performance with Category A and B certified helicopters.
An understanding of flyway performance for onshore operations and profiles for
offshore operations.

ev idence A training syllabus for these topics should be published in the Operations
Manual and follow established check and training criteria. The syllabus for
initial training and processes for conducting periodic training and ongoing
evaluation should also be documented. Pilot training records should confirm
that these training requirements have been applied in the induction training
of new Pilots and where applicable, in the ongoing evaluation of Pilot
competency.

Flight Training
The aircraft operator’s check and training program must provide initial and recurrent
training and a minimum of one flight check every six months. These flight checks, at
a minimum, should include a combination of a proficiency check (non-revenue) and
a route check (revenue-flight permissible).

ev idence Details of the aircraft operator’s check and training program should be
published in the Operations Manual and follow established check and
training criteria. The program should cover requirements and procedures
for initial training and approval and the processes for conducting recurrent
training and checking. Pilot training records should confirm that the
requirements of the training program have been applied in the induction
training of new Pilots and the ongoing evaluation of Pilot competency.

Courtesy: Karratha Flying Services

Page 5
 Flight Crew Check and Training – Procedures
Documentation of the aircraft operator’s check and training program must cover all
requirements and procedures relating to Pilot training and ongoing evaluation of
Pilot competency.

The aircraft operator’s documentation must provide details of all ground training and
flight training that are relevant to the operations. The documentation must also provide
adequate guidance to check and training staff regarding the acceptable standards for
flight crew performance along with the procedures for dealing with unsatisfactory flight
crew performance.

A system should be established by the aircraft operator to ensure that records are
maintained of all training and checking sequences that flight crew have been subject
to (both ground and flight training) and the associated outcomes.

ev idence Details of the aircraft operator’s check and training program should be
published in the Operations Manual and follow established check and
training criteria. The syllabus and procedures for conducting initial and
recurrent ground and flight training, along with guidance regarding
the acceptable standards for flight crew performance, and policies
and procedures for dealing with unsatisfactory performance should
be documented.
Pilot training records must be available and confirm that the documented
requirements of the aircraft operator’s training and checking program have
been applied consistently in the training and ongoing evaluation of flight
crew performance.

Flight Crew Check and Training – Synthetic Flight Training

If the aircraft operator utilizes flight simulators and training devices in its training and
checking program, it must ensure that they are configured to reflect the applicable
aircraft type(s) which have been approved by the responsible regulatory authority.

ev idence Where the aircraft operator’s check and training program utilizes flight
simulators, the Operations Manual must contain documented procedures for
their use. The documented program should follow established criteria and
address the use of simulators in the conduct of initial and recurrent check
and training.
Pilot training records must confirm that these requirements have
been applied.
The Operator must be able to demonstrate the regulatory approval of the
flight training device.

Page 6
1.4: Maintenance Personnel Qualification
Maintenance personnel must meet the experience requirements listed in MNT 1.01.03
Appendix 1 of the BAR Standard.

The aircraft operator and/or approved maintenance organization must ensure its
Maintenance Controller, Chief Engineer and all other line maintenance personnel meet
the minimum qualification and experience requirements prescribed by the responsible
regulatory authority and the BAR Standard.

Oversight of approved maintenance organizations is critical for ensuring standards and

expectations of the aircraft operator are being met.

ev idence The aircraft operator and/or approved maintenance organization must

document the minimum qualification and experience requirements and
selection criteria for all technical positions within the maintenance
organization.
Records should confirm that these requirements have been applied and
where required, that the responsible regulatory authority has approved the
individual appointed to a position.

Page 7
 1.5: Maintenance Training

MNT 1.04.01 The aircraft operator or approved maintenance organization must develop a
MNT 1.04.02 training program for maintenance personnel. The training must include human
MNT 1.04.04 factors in maintenance and company maintenance documentation and procedures,
MNT 1.04.05 and where appropriate include technical components for aircraft and systems
MNT 1.04.06 being maintained. The training must be delivered at intervals not exceeding
MNT 1.04.07 three years.
MNT 1.04.08 The aircraft operator and/or approved maintenance organization must ensure that initial
MNT 1.04.09 and recurrent maintenance training is provided to all applicable maintenance personnel.
The training program must include:
• Aircraft specific training when new equipment is introduced;
• Human factors in maintenance;
• All relevant maintenance documentation including engineering procedures;
• Technical components for aircraft and systems being maintained; and
• Minimum Equipment List (MEL) training.

ev idence The training syllabus and/or details of training arrangements for these topics
should be published in the relevant maintenance manual.
Records should confirm staff qualifications and experience and dates on
which initial and recurrent training requirements were completed.
Personnel training records must record details of dates on which staff
qualifications, training and/or experience lapse.
Where maintenance is outsourced, the aircraft operator must provide
information on how they ensure that the approved maintenance organization
is completing maintenance activities to the aircraft operator’s required
standard. Audit records and maintenance documentation should at a
minimum provide evidence of the work being performed and the oversight
mechanisms in place.

1.6: Basic Aircraft Equipment Fit

MNT Section 3 Aircraft basic equipment fit must meet the requirements listed in Appendix 2
of the BAR Standard.

When operating for a BARS Member Organization, the aircraft operator must ensure
that aircraft are fitted or equipped in accordance with Appendix 2 of the BAR Standard,
in addition to the minimum equipment requirements set by the responsible regulatory
authority.

ev idence The aircraft operator must provide documentation that acknowledges the
requirements for the fitment of the minimum equipment listed in Appendix 2
of the BAR Standard for all relevant aircraft and operations.

Page 8
1.7: Drug and Alcohol Policy
The aircraft operator must have a Drug and Alcohol Policy which meets all FLT 1.02.13
requirements of the responsible regulatory authority. Where no such regulatory
requirements exist the operator must at a minimum meet the requirements of
the contracting company.

Aircraft operators should have a documented Drug and Alcohol policy that clearly
articulates the minimum acceptable level of compliance. Guidance regarding the
effects of readily available medications and drugs should be provided.

ev idence Details of the aircraft operator’s Drug and Alcohol Policy and the associated
drug and alcohol management plan (where required by the applicable
regulatory authority), should be published in the Operations Manual or other
applicable manual. The policy and plan must cover all persons involved in
safety sensitive aviation activities.
Records should confirm that applicable requirements of the drug and alcohol
monitoring program are being routinely applied for persons involved in safety
sensitive aviation activities.

1.8: Flight Time Limits

Unless local regulatory requirements are more stringent, the flight time limits FLT 1.04.01
detailed in the BAR Standard are to be applied. FLT 1.04.02
FLT 1.04.03
Single-pilot operation Two-pilot operation FLT 1.04.04
8 hours daily flight time 10 hours daily flight time FLT 1.05.04
40 hours in any 7-day 45 hours in any 7-day
consecutive period consecutive period

100 hours in any 28-day 120 hours in any 28-day

consecutive period consecutive period

1000 hours in any 365-day 1200 hours in any 365-day

consecutive period consecutive period

Resource sector aviation operations may result in flight crew conducting tours of
duty rotational in nature and extended in duration. In such circumstances, any flying
undertaken during the break time away from the touring location must be recorded
and the aircraft operator must be notified.

Page 9
 ev idence Details of the aircraft operator’s fatigue management program should be
published in the Operations Manual and be either specifically approved by
the responsible regulatory authority, or be in compliance with that authority’s
fatigue management regulations. The documented program should cover
daily, weekly, monthly and annual flight time limits.
The aircraft operator should include details in their Operations Manual of
the system to be used for recording and tracking flight and duty times as
well as rest periods. While manual, paper based systems are acceptable,
computer programs that comprehensively track the varying limits and predict
exceedances are the preferred option.
Flight and duty time records must confirm compliance with all requirements
of the flight time limits that are applicable the aircraft operator’s flight time
management program. The flight and duty time records that are maintained
should be consistent with information provided in other documents such as
aircraft flight records.

1.9: Flight Crew Duty Time

FLT 1.04.02 A duty day must not exceed 14 hours and where 12 hours has been exceeded, this
FLT 1.04.03 must be followed by a rest period of a minimum of ten hours. Crews on rotational
FLT 1.04.04 assignments that arrive following overnight travel, or travel exceeding four time
zone changes, must not be rostered for flying duties until the minimum ten hour
rest period is met.

Regulatory approved fatigue management programs may be used in lieu of the

above limits when endorsed by a Competent Aviation Specialist.

ev idence The aircraft operator should include details in their Operations Manual
regarding the system to be used for recording and tracking duty times as
well as rest periods. While manual, paper based systems are acceptable,
computer programs that comprehensively track the varying limits and
predict exceedances are readily available and are preferable.

Page 10
1.10: Maintenance Duty Time
The aircraft operator or approved maintenance organization must establish a MNT 1.07.02
fatigue management program to minimize the effects of acute and chronic fatigue MNT 1.07.03
amongst maintenance personnel. This must include maximum working hours, MNT 1.07.04
minimum rest periods and roster schedules. The requirement to conduct overnight
maintenance must be reviewed by a Competent Aviation Specialist.

The safety of any aviation system is dependent upon all participants performing reliably
and efficiently. As aircraft maintenance activities are routinely undertaken by technical
personnel on a shift work system, it is important that these shifts are managed by a
fatigue management program. This program should ensure that fatigue occurring during
a shift or accumulated over a period of time due to the pattern of shifts worked and
other tasks, does not endanger the safety of a flight.

The aircraft operator, or its contracted maintenance organization(s), must have fatigue
management guidance for all maintenance personnel, which, as a minimum, meet the
standards required by the responsible regulatory authority.

ev idence The aircraft operator or contracted maintenance organization(s) should

provide fatigue management guidance for all maintenance personnel.
This documentation should be in compliance with any associated regulatory
guidance.
Records should confirm that aircraft maintenance personnel roster schedules,
hours worked and rest periods are in accordance with any documented
fatigue management guidance.

Engine Maintenance

Page 11
 1.11: Aircraft Operator Safety Management System

ORG 3.01.01 All aircraft operators must have a Safety Management System (SMS) that is fully
integrated throughout and across each part of the organization.
Refer to the following information on SMS development:
ICAO Safety Management System
Flight Safety Digest Volume 24 No 11 – 12, Nov – Dec 2005
International Helicopter Safety Team – SMS Toolkit

The Operator’s SMS should include:

• A Safety Management System Manual;
• A Safety Policy;
• The appointment of a Safety Manager or Officer;
• The various sub-structures where more than one operating base is in use;
• A Just Culture Policy;
• The frequency and conduct of safety meetings;
• Hazard reporting systems;
• Risk assessment processes;
• Incident reporting;
• Occurrence investigation;
• Auditing;
• Safety training;
• Management of change;
• Safety performance; and
• Emergency response.

ev idence The aircraft operator’s Safety Management System should be documented

and include the necessary organizational structures, accountabilities, policies
and procedures that will facilitate a systematic process for the identification
of hazards and minimization of risk.
Records must confirm that these requirements are complied with and that
continuous improvement is being tracked and monitored.

Page 12
1.12: Accident and Incident Notification
As part of their SMS, the aircraft operator must advise the company of any ORG 3.06.03
accident, serious incident, incident or non-standard occurrence related to the
services provided to the company that has, or potentially has, disrupted operations
or jeopardized safety.

International Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO) Annex 13 Aircraft Accident and Incident
Investigation provides the definitions of accident, serious incident and incident.

The aircraft operator must have procedures in place to ensure that details of any
reportable events are provided to the responsible regulatory or safety investigation
authority within specified time limits.

The aircraft operator’s procedure should require that any accident, serious incident,
incident or non-standard occurrence that has the potential to disrupt operations or
jeopardize safety is communicated to company representatives in an agreed timeframe.

The aircraft operator should provide feedback to the company regarding the
investigation and close-out of significant incidents and whether any findings could be
incorporated in risk mitigation strategies such as route or airfield assessments.

ev idence The aircraft operator should have a procedure to ensure that its senior
management, the responsible regulatory or safety investigation authority
(as required) and where applicable the company, are informed of any
incident, accident or non-standard occurrence that has disrupted or has
the potential to significantly disrupt operations or jeopardize safety.
Documented requirements and procedures associated with communication
of non-standard events by the aircraft operator should be made available
on request.

1.13: Operational Risk Assessment

Aircraft operations must conduct a risk assessment, including mitigation controls,
ORG 3.04.03
before commencing operations for any new or existing aviation activity. Contact
ORG 3.04.04
the Flight Safety Foundation for information on how to conduct a risk assessment.
ORG 3.04.05
Risk assessments are an essential element in identifying and mitigating risks to any
operation. The aircraft operator should have a well-developed risk assessment process
as part of their SMS and it should be used to review all activities undertaken on both a
routine and exceptional basis.

ev idence The aircraft operator’s Safety Management System should detail the
requirement for the assessment and management of operational risks
as an integral part of the planning and execution of any change within
the operation.
Documented evidence must be available to demonstrate that the
assessment and management of operational risks is being conducted
before implementing changes within existing activities or commencing
any new operations.

Page 13
 1.14: Sub-chartering Aircraft

ORG 1.02.02 Sub-chartering (cross-hiring) by the aircraft operator must not be undertaken
without approval of the contracting company. Regardless of ownership, contracted
aircraft must be operated and controlled in accordance with the Air Operator’s
Certificate (AOC) they are operated under.

The requirement to sub-charter (cross-hire) generally arises when an aircraft operator

is unable to fulfil a task using their own aircraft and crew due to unscheduled
unserviceability or a last minute request by the company, resulting in the use of an
alternative aircraft from another operator.

To ensure that all standard technical and operational expectations of the service to be
provided are being met (such as BARS requirements), the aircraft operator must have
a process in place to notify the company of potential cross-hire situations as soon
as possible. This will enable a review of the alternative service being proposed, and
agreement by the client that the alternate service provider will be acceptable.

ev idence The aircraft operator should document the process for procuring
sub-chartered (cross-hired) aircraft or aircraft services. Such procedures
should detail the process to be followed to ensure the operation is suitably
authorized under AOC permissions, to advise the company that the
requirement has occurred and to gain their written approval for the activity
to proceed.
Operators should be prepared for the possible need to sub-charter (cross-
hire) aircraft or aircraft services and develop a list of suppliers for cross-hire
operations who have been pre-approved for use by the company. Letters of
authorization from the company should be available where permission has
been sought and granted to utilize cross-hire services.

Page 14
2.0: Runway Excursions

An aircraft departs the runway during take-off or on landing and this

results in an accident
A runway excursion occurs when an aircraft departs the runway during the take-off or
landing run and can be caused by a number of scenarios:
• A departing aircraft fails to become airborne or cannot complete a rejected take-off
before reaching the end of the runway;
• A landing aircraft touches down in the undershoot area of the landing runway;
or touches down too long and is unable to stop before reaching the end of the
runway; or
• An aircraft landing, taking off or conducting a rejected take-off departs the side of
the runway.

ev idence Establishing and adhering to SOPs including conducting appropriate

standard approach and departure briefings will enhance flight crew decision
making and reduce the risk of runway excursions.
A combination of risk factors will contribute to the risk of runway excursions.
These factors include: lack of accurate wind information, lack of awareness
of contaminated runways (mud, rain, ice or snow), absence of procedures
(stabilized approaches), technical issues (improper use of thrust reversers)
or poor aircraft performance planning.
Many of these elements are associated with diligent and appropriate
actions by the flight crew. However the infrastructure required to support
aircraft operations, such as runway preparation, weather reporting, ground-
based communications, windsocks and pavement markings are outside
the control of the aircraft operator. This may need to be considered by the
relevant company.

Engine failure on take-off from mine site. Aircraft over-run

Page 15
 2.1: Airfield and Helipad Design
Where local guidance is unacceptable to the company, use ICAO Annex 14
Aerodromes, Volume I (‘Aerodrome Design and Operation’) and ICAO Annex 14,
Volume II (‘Heliports’) for design considerations when constructing, or performing
major rework, to permanent long-term company owned and operated airfields and
helipads supporting operations.

Consider prevailing winds and the location of mining/facility infrastructure in

relation to the proposed airfield or helipad departure and approach splays.

BARS Implementation Guidelines (BIG) Section 4 provides additional guidance for

short-term or emergency use airfields whilst Section 5 provides additional guidance for
helipad standards.

Company considerations in locating and designing airfield and helipads should always
incorporate specialist aviation advice and must include the following:
• Prevailing wind direction;
• Obstacles – including mine infrastructure, towers and tailing mounds;
• Open cut mining – blasting operations in the vicinity;
• Flyways for helicopters (rejected take-off areas);
•B
 alanced field-length for aeroplanes (allowing for successful abort at
decision speed);
• Two-way approaches to landing area as a minimum design basis;
• F orecasted expansion plans of resource facility and resultant aircraft size increase;
and
• All infrastructure requirements from the BAR Standard.

The following factors may also influence the design and construction phases of
permanent facilities:
•R
 igid company supply system requirements may limit the choice of civil contractors
to a tender panel that lacks aerodrome/helipad construction experience;
• L ack of consideration of operational and environmental impacts on the runway/
helipad design;
• Ineffective risk management of runway repair and works given company operational
demands (lost production time due to runway works must be taken into account in
the runway works risk assessment process);
• T he project managers may lack any aviation expertise and therefore understanding
of the operational imperatives;
•C
 ivil engineers with road experience may be contracted to design runway pavement
repairs without utilizing the expertise of runway civil engineering experts;
•U
 se of material that does not fit the technical specifications and the associated lack
of independent testing the material used in runway seal, pavement construction and
repair of materials; and
• L ack of understanding within project team owners/management of the aviation risk
and operational impacts when optimising the scope (cost) of aerodrome projects.

ev idence ICAO Annex 14 should be included in design considerations for any

permanent airfield and helipad design facility when local guidance is
unacceptable to the BARS Member Organization.
Page 16
2.2: Airfield Inspections
In addition to reviews required by regulators, all company owned and/or operated
airfields must have an annual operational control and safety review conducted by
a company approved Competent Aviation Specialist.

Companies who own and operate airfields should conduct an annual operational review
by a qualified aviation specialist. This will address the entire aviation system on the
airfield over and above regulatory inspections.

The annual review will complement any regulatory required inspection by focusing
on all aspects of an aviation operation. This review would include: passenger control,
freight management, aircraft refueling, wildlife control, daily airfield inspections,
airfield management, rescue firefighting, perimeter fencing, weather reporting,
runway taxi markings, Obstacle Limitation Surfaces, emergency response planning and
preventative maintenance.

Where airfields are not registered and therefore not subject to requirements for
changes in aerodrome information, the aerodrome operator must provide such
information directly to relevant aircraft operators.

2.3: Landing Site Assessments

Aircraft operators must conduct landing site assessments prior to commencing FLT 1.02.11
operations. Incorporate the results into the operational risk assessment
(Control 1.13).

Conducting a landing site assessment prior to commencing operations to a new location

provides a necessary level of assurance for the conduct of safe operations. This can be
a desktop review using available and documented information, or for more routine and
established operations consist of an actual site visit to review facilities, infrastructure
and the surrounding environment.

ev idence The aircraft operator’s procedures drafted in preparation for commencement

of operations to a new destination should prescribe landing site
assessments. Completion of such an assessment will allow the aircraft
operator to determine the presence of any operational risks to be addressed
and facilitate the management of identified risks through the Safety
Management System.

Page 17
 2.4: Balanced Field Length
All multi-engine aeroplanes must meet balanced field requirements where
following an engine failure on take-off, the aircraft can stop on the remaining
runway and stop-way, or, using the remaining runway and clearway, climb and
achieve a net climb gradient greater than the take-off path obstacle gradient.

To optimize the safety benefits of multi-engine aircraft during take-off, a runway length
should be sufficient to ensure that an aeroplane can safely stop (accelerate-stop) or
safely take-off (accelerate-go) if one engine fails. Manufacturers of aircraft in this
category provide detailed performance analysis charts to allow for full performance
analysis by the aircraft operator.

The balanced field length is the minimum runway length required where both accelerate-
stop and accelerate-go distances are achieved. The speed at which the decision whether
to stop or go in the event of an engine failure is known as V1.

The take-off decision speed (V1) is not fixed and will be affected by a number of variables
including temperature, wind, elevation, slope, runway contamination and aircraft weight
and configuration. The easiest variable influenced by companies is the aircraft weight.
To achieve balanced field length may mean the aircraft payload has to be reduced, and
less passengers than seats available will be carried.

The company should always: (1) consider the performance expectations of aircraft
prior to runway construction and (2) contract aircraft of adequate performance to
assure balanced field length is attained in all cases.

Engine Failure at V1

Lift-off
distance 35 ft

Runway Stopway
Stop distance
Takeoff field length

Figure 3: Balanced Field Length

ev idence The aircraft operator should be able to demonstrate flight crew familiarity
with balanced field length calculations and when they are required to
calculate it. Crews should be initially trained in the performance aspects
of their particular aircraft and the procedures for calculating performance
should be clearly detailed in the Operations Manual. Where applicable,
mandatory proficiency checks should examine crew competence in
performance calculations and their application.

Page 18
2.5: Balanced Field Length – No Performance Charts
Multi-engine aeroplanes that do not have the appropriate Flight Manual
performance charts to achieve Control 2.4 must restrict their payload so that in
the event of an engine failure, the net take-off path clears obstacles by 35 feet
up to a height of 1500 feet above the aerodrome, using the following conditions:

The failure occurs:

• When the aeroplane has reached the published best Rate of Climb (Vy) speed;
• With undercarriage up (if retractable);
• When the flaps are fully retracted; and
• With propeller on the inoperative engine feathered.

Aircraft certificated to the requirements of United States Federal Aviation Regulation

(FAR) Part 23 are in the ‘commuter’ category and not subject to the same rigorous
certification standards that are applied to FAR Part 25 aircraft in the ‘transport’ category.

FAR Category Description Examples

Part 23 Commuter Maximum Take-off Weight (MTOW) King Air, Metro,

cannot exceed 19,000 pounds (8,618 kg). Twin Otter

Part 25 Transport Jets with 10 or more seats or a MTOW F-100, Boeing,

greater than 12,500 pounds (5,670 kg); or Airbus, Gulfstream
Propeller-driven aeroplanes with greater DHC-8, ATR-42,
than 19 seats or a MTOW greater than Fokker F-50
19,000 pounds (8,618 kg).

Figure 4: Certification Standards

Unlike aircraft certificated under the requirements of Part 25 (where Control 2.4 applies),
aircraft operating under a Part 23 certification may not be provided with the charts to
enable assessment of aircraft performance in all stages of the take-off sequence. In
these circumstances, Control 2.5 applies. The aircraft operator must have performance
charts available that will allow performance to be predicted and loading adjusted to
achieve compliance with the requirements of this control.

ev idence Each multi-engine aircraft must have the take-off performance charts
available in the Flight Manual or Pilots Operating Handbook that will permit
the flight crew to make an analysis of take-off performance and adjust
loading where necessary.
Procedures for calculating take-off performance should be clearly detailed
in the Operations Manual and the initial training of flight crew should cover
the performance aspects of the particular aircraft type. Crew competence in
performance calculations and their application should be assessed during
proficiency checks.

Page 19
 2.6: Destination Weather Reporting
For company owned and operated airfields and helidecks, communicate the
following data to arriving aircraft by either an Automatic Weather Observation
System (AWOS) and/or trained weather observer:
• Wind direction and speed; • Barometric pressure; and
• Temperature; • Cloud ceiling height and visibility.

Maintain all equipment on a current calibration register.

Reporting of actual weather conditions at an airfield or helideck significantly enhances

the safety of the aviation operation. The prevalence of AWOS equipment provides
greater guarantees to the effectiveness of this control rather than relying on having
trained weather observers on site at all times. However, either option satisfies the
intent of the control.

Considerations for company owned and operated facilities:

The AWOS should have the capability of transmitting on a discrete frequency to

arriving aircraft.

The ability to provide cloud base and visibility is an important aspect to an AWOS
that should not be overlooked when procuring equipment.

Training required for a weather observer should include: the issuance of a radio
operator licence for communication, training on all equipment required to take
measurements and training associated with basic aviation meteorology. Any
training course should be recognized by the national meteorology bureau and
although not prescribed is typically three to five days in duration. Consider
recurrent training for weather observers.

2.7: Slope guidance

Install visual slope guidance on company owned and operated airfields.

An approach path lighting system is an invaluable tool that assists Pilots of aeroplanes to
fly the correct approach angle to the runway. It also has the added benefit of defining the
center of the touchdown zone. Both aspects of the PAPI system assist in mitigating the risk
of either touching down short of the touchdown zone (or undershooting the runway with
the consequent risk of striking objects below the standard flight path) or touching down
past the touchdown zone with the consequent risk of a landing runway excursion.

ev idence The aircraft operator’s documentation should detail how the PAPI system
works, what acceptable approach parameters are and how the PAPI should
be used during the conduct of a stabilized approach.

Papi Approach
On Glide Path

Too High
Slightly Low

Slightly High Too Low

On glide Path
Page 20
Figure 5: PAPI Lights – use of red and white provides glideslope indication
3.0: Fuel Exhaustion

An aircraft conducts a forced landing or ditching as a result of fuel

exhaustion and this results in an accident
Assurance for safe flight depends on many factors, including guaranteed reliable
power being produced when required. Fuel mismanagement leading to fuel starvation
or exhaustion is a direct cause of power loss, and continues to be an issue in resource
sector operations.

Two factors contribute to fuel mismanagement and loss of power:

• Fuel exhaustion – no usable fuel remaining to supply the engine(s); or
• Fuel starvation – fuel supply to engine(s) is interrupted although sufficient fuel
remains on-board (e.g. incorrect tank selection).

Basic fuel management principles required by an aircraft operator include the following:
• Knowing exactly how much fuel is being carried at the commencement of a flight;
• Knowing the fuel required to satisfy the flight plan route plus reserves;
• Knowing how much fuel is being consumed, taking into account all variables such as
power settings, cruise levels and effect of wind and course deviations; and
• Flight crew knowledge of the aircraft fuel supply system and adhering to procedures
when selecting tanks and fuel sources during all critical phases of flight.

Accurate fuel planning requires the resource company to provide clear and
unambiguous flight routing requests to the aircraft operator. This will enable
flight crew to address all basic fuel management principles.

Page 21
 3.1: Fuel Check
The aircraft operator must have procedures in place that require the
FLT 1.03.01
Pilot-in-Command to ensure the required amount of fuel is on board the
FLT 1.03.02
aircraft prior to each flight.

The risk of fuel exhaustion is greatly reduced when flight crew accurately determine
the amount of fuel on-board prior to starting and confirm that quantities are sufficient
for the flight planned. Determination of this quantity should be cross-checked using a
minimum of two sources, such as:
• Fuel Quantity Gauges;
• Dipsticks;
• Flow Meters/Totalizers; and
• Calculations from previous refuels and fuel usages (checked regularly for accuracy).

Accurate knowledge of fuel quantity at the start of a flight is essential for any fuel
critical operation. All subsequent assessments to the safety of the flight are derived from
that initial number. If only one fuel quantity measurement is used, then it is not possible
to determine if the system is working properly because there is no reference point.

The aircraft operator’s procedures should require fuel quantity checks to be conducted
prior to each flight and provide details of the acceptable methods for undertaking
such checks. The aircraft operator’s procedures should provide for the quantity of fuel
on-board to be checked by two separate and independent methods.

In-flight checks
Fuel burn will be constant for a consistent combination of altitude, power setting
and mixture setting (where applicable). Changing winds and deviations due to
weather conditions will vary the groundspeed and therefore the range. Flight crew
should regularly update fuel status, at least every hour, to ensure adequate reserves
are maintained.

The aircraft operator should specify procedures for the flight crew to monitor in-flight
fuel quantity, to detect any anomalies that may appear in planned versus actual fuel
burn. Fuel flows greater than planned, stronger headwinds, in-flight fuel leaks and
course deviations have all contributed to past resource sector accidents. Constant
monitoring of fuel quantity at designated time intervals or waypoints is critical to
the safe progress of any flight.

ev idence The aircraft operator must document SOPs that require the aircraft
Pilot-in-Command to confirm the required amount of fuel is on-board the
aircraft prior to each flight. Such procedures should provide for the quantity
of fuel on-board to be checked by two separate methods and should state
a maximum tolerance to apply to any difference in quantities determined
by the two methods. SOPs should also cover the conduct of in-flight fuel
progress checks that will enable the early detection of a fuel anomaly.
The flight record or similar document should demonstrate that the SOPs
have been complied with and that the required pre-flight and in-flight fuel
checking and monitoring has been conducted.

Page 22
3.2: Flight Plan Weather Data
Provide the flight crew with access to reliable weather information when FLT 1.06.01
determining fuel loads in pre-flight planning. FLT 1.06.02
FLT 1.06.04
Key flight safety considerations include ensuring relevant weather data and forecasts are
made available to flight crew for flight planning purposes. Before commencing a flight,
flight crew must have access to and assess the weather reports and forecasts for the
route to be flown and the airfields to be used, including any airfields that may need to
be considered as alternate destinations.

The aircraft operator should retain operational records associated with any flight for a
period of 90 days.

When aviation operations are conducted in remote areas outside the influence of reliable
national meteorological coverage, effort must be made by the aircraft operator, assisted
by the company if required, to access forecasted weather data from global sources.
Reliance on communication networks (internet, satellite phone, etc.) will be required.

Access to good quality weather data to support an aviation operation should always
form part of a pre-mobilization risk assessment.

ev idence The aircraft operator must document a description of minimum expectations

associated with weather forecast review used in support of pre-flight
planning. Flight crew must ensure that they obtain and assess a weather
forecast that covers the route to be flown, the planned destination and when
required, the airfield that is to be provided for as an alternate destination.
Documentation associated with the flight should be retained for a minimum
period of 90 days and this information should include any relevant
meteorological forecasts.

3.3: Flight Plan

Flights must be conducted on an Instrument Flight Rules (IFR) flight plan lodged FLT 1.06.06
with the relevant air traffic control service provider. If this is not possible, Visual
Flight Rules (VFR) flight plans are permitted but must be lodged with a responsible
party (air traffic control service provider, aircraft operator or company site
representative) and flown under a flight-following regime.

An IFR flight plan requires greater prescription in the routes and altitudes flown and fuel
contingency planning. It will also provide a greater level of air traffic control services
with the flight than would otherwise apply under a VFR flight plan.

Air traffic control provided for IFR traffic will focus on traffic notification and positive
separation services, and will also provide continuous flight following that enables
continuous access to SAR (Search and Rescue) alerting services.

Where it is not possible to conduct a flight under the IFR, an aircraft operator may
conduct the flight under the VFR (where authorized by the applicable regulatory
authority). Where it is intended to operate a flight under the VFR, a flight plan
notification must be lodged with an organization that is responsible for SAR alerting.
A flight notification may be submitted by any acceptable method that allows the
organization responsible for SAR alerting to accurately record the flight details,
including departure and destination, flight times and SAR alerting time. Page 23
 The aircraft operator should retain operational records associated with any flight for a
period of 90 days.

ev idence The aircraft operators must document a policy that requires, where
practical, all flights to be conducted under a flight plan that has been filed
in accordance with the requirements for IFR flights. Where an aviation
operator’s policy allows flights to be conducted under the VFR in defined
circumstances, the requirements for flight notification must be clearly stated.
Associated flight records must confirm that flights conducted at night or
under the IFR for BARS Member Organizations (BMOs) are only conducted in
compliance with IFR flight planning requirements.

3.4: Instrument Flight Rules (IFR) Fuel Plan

FLT 1.07.01 In addition to operational holding fuel requirements, fuel loads must cover
FLT 1.07.02 fuel used during start-up, taxi, en route, approach and transit to the alternate
FLT 1.07.03 destination (if required). Carry additional variable reserves of 10% of the total trip
FLT 1.07.04 fuel and 30 minutes as fixed reserve.
FLT 1.07.05 An aircraft that carries only just enough fuel for the planned flight, but which encounters
unanticipated headwinds and may have to fly at a lower level must rely on the fuel
reserves carried to safely complete the flight. Fuel reserves are designed to only be used
in unforeseen circumstances, and many aircraft arrive safely at their destination having
used a portion of the allocated variable reserve fuel. However an aircraft’s fuel supply
should not reach a state where fixed reserve fuel is being burned and upon arriving at
its destination it cannot accept any further delay in landing.

For those aircraft operators who have a fuel policy with a larger fixed reserve
(>45 minutes) and a variable reserve not smaller than 5% of total trip fuel, this may
conform to this control providing that the fuel policy is in accordance with local
regulatory approvals and the flight time is less than five hours.

ev idence The aircraft operator must document a fuel policy for IFR flights that meets
the minimum requirements legislated by the responsible regulatory authority,
or that is consistent with their guidance. In circumstances where the
regulatory fuel quantity requirements are less than that required by the BAR
Standard, the Standard applies.
Associated records such as aircraft load-sheets, flight logs and fuel
records should confirm that documented procedures and requirements
for determining the amount of fuel to be carried on IFR flights have been
applied appropriately.

Page 24
3.5: Visual Flight Rules (VFR) Fuel Plan
Fuel loads must cover the planned route. Carry an additional variable reserve of FLT 1.07.06
10% of the total trip fuel and 30 minutes as fixed reserve. FLT 1.07.07
The responsible regulatory authority will specify the minimum fuel that must be carried
on a VFR flight either through provision of specific prescriptive regulations or guidance
on determining minimum fuel requirements. In all situations, the minimum quantity of
fuel to be carried must not be less than that required by the BAR Standard.

ev idence The aircraft operator must document a fuel policy for VFR flights that meets
the minimum requirements legislated by the responsible regulatory authority,
or that is consistent with their guidance. In circumstances where the
regulatory fuel quantity requirements are less than that required by the BAR
Standard, the Standard applies.
Associated records such as aircraft load-sheets, Flight Logs and fuel
records should confirm that documented procedures and requirements
for determining the amount of fuel to be carried on VFR flights have been
applied appropriately.

3.6: Hot Refueling

Hot refueling must only be conducted when considered operationally necessary FLT 1.03.01
and must be approved by the company prior to use. Hot refueling with gasoline and
wide cut turbine fuel is prohibited. Aircraft operators must have a procedure on hot
refueling which includes the following requirements:
• No passengers are to be on-board during refueling unless the Pilot-in-Command
assesses that it is safe to do so. In this scenario passengers must receive a safety
brief prior to refueling. No side well-seats are to be used (e.g. Bell 212, 214, 412);
• Firefighting capability must be available and manned;
• The aircraft operator’s Operations Manual must detail all aspects of hot refueling,
including personnel training, sequence of aircraft grounding and duties of personnel
(in addition to the Pilot) required: a minimum of three for helicopter ops – one for
refueling, one for pump shut-off and one for fireguard;
• Radios are not to be used during refueling;
• Anti-collision lights, radio altimeter, radar, transponder and DME equipment must
be switched off;
• Prior to removing the fuel cap and inserting the fuel nozzle or connecting the
pressure hose into the aircraft fuel tank, grounding wires running from the fuel
station and from the fuel hose to the aircraft must be connected;
• When refueling is completed, the Pilot-in-Command must verify that all equipment
is removed, the fuel cap has been securely replaced and the aircraft is properly
configured for flight; and
• Correct fuel loads must be confirmed by the Pilot-in-Command prior to departure.

Page 25
 Refueling aeroplanes with engines operating must not be conducted unless a specific
procedure has been approved by the aircraft manufacturer and regulator and is further
supported with documented training of both flight and ground crew. An APU running
without engines operating does not constitute hot refueling and is acceptable.

Refueling aeroplanes with engines operating must not be conducted in normal

circumstances and only if the APU is inoperative. Personnel manning firefighting
equipment must be present during the activity.

Hot refueling must only be conducted when considered operationally necessary and
must be approved by company prior to use. Aircraft operators must have documented
procedures covering all aspects of hot refueling.

Hot refueling is the practice where the aircraft is refueled with the engine running and
in the case of most helicopters, with rotors rotating. Helicopter hot refueling poses
the greatest risk. Accordingly the BAR Standard requires an aircraft operator to have
regulatory approval for aeroplane hot refueling as per Control 3.6.

In helicopter operations, the noisy and dynamic environment complicated by added

threat of ‘hot’/active engine(s) in close proximity to the open refueling activity
demands additional controls to be in place to ensure safe conduct.

Hot refueling of helicopters should only be performed when agreed to by both the
aircraft operator and the company, and should be on the basis of an operational
requirement and not convenience. Examples of operational requirements include:
• Seismic and External Load operations involving high movement cycles;
• Excessive wind speed make full shutdown impractical or dangerous;
• Medical evacuation requiring quick turn-around;
• Search and Rescue; and
• When the risk of a failed engine-start outweighs the risk of hot refueling.

The documented procedures required by the aircraft operator should be in the

approved Operations Manual and include as a minimum:
• The operational circumstances in which hot refueling may take place;
• The procedures to be followed during hot refueling;
• T hree ground crew for helicopter hot-refueling operation (1) refueler, (2) emergency
pump shut-off guard and (3) fireguard;
•A
 ll persons engaged in hot refueling must be trained in, and familiar with, the
procedures to be followed during hot refueling or any emergency that may occur in
relation to the refueling;
• S uitable and properly maintained firefighting equipment must be readily available
for use if an emergency occurs during the refueling;
•B
 efore carrying out hot refueling on an offshore oil rig, gas rig or platform, a drilling
ship or any other vessel, the approval of the operator or master of that installation
or vessel must be obtained;
• T he quantity of fuel to be loaded must be decided before hot refueling is
commenced;
•A
 properly licenced Pilot must remain at the controls of the aircraft throughout the
hot refueling process and maintain contact with the person on the ground in charge
of the refueling system by means of an electronic intercommunication system or by
Page 26 visual contact and an agreed system of signals;
 • All passengers disembarked from the aircraft (helicopter) prior to commencement of
refueling procedures, except in the case of a passenger who cannot, in the opinion
of the Pilot or on medical advice, be safely disembarked;
• Before the fuel filler cap is removed, the refueling equipment and aircraft must be
earthed and connected so as to ensure they are of the same electrical potential;
• While hot refueling is taking place, radio transmissions must be restricted to the
greatest extent practicable. HF radio and weather radar must not be used;
• On completion of the refueling operation, the Pilot-in-Command confirms that all
equipment has been removed from the vicinity of the helicopter prior to departure
from the refuel point, the fuel cap has been securely replaced, the correct fuel
quantity has been loaded and the aircraft is properly configured for flight; and
• The fuel supplied is managed by a fuel quality audit program and whose regular
audit reports are checked by the aircraft operator.

Image provided by DSE

ev idence Where hot re-fueling is to be utilized for helicopter operations, the aircraft
operator must have approved procedures that are documented. In addition
to addressing applicable regulatory requirements, the procedures should
articulate all minimum items contained in the BAR Standard and details
contained within these guidelines.

Page 27
 4.0: Fuel Contamination

An aircraft is forced to land at unprepared sites with minimal warning

due to contaminated fuel and this causes a loss of engine power and
an accident
Aircraft engines are intolerant to fuel contamination and will readily fail if provided with
out-of-specification fuel. Maintaining the quality and cleanliness of aviation fuels is
fundamental to aviation safety.

Personnel responsible for the transportation, storage or dispensing of aviation fuels are
a key part of the aviation safety equation. The guidelines, procedures and standards
prescribed by the fuel manufacturer must be adhered to at all times.

All parties associated with flight operations (aircraft operator and company) must be
cognisant of the requirement for high quality and tested fuel to ensure any potential
contaminants are eliminated or separated out of fuel before it is pumped into the
aircraft. Fine sediment in fuel may block the aircraft fuel filters and erode critical parts
in the engine and fuel control systems. Free water (water not dissolved in the fuel, but
microscopic droplets held in suspension) may freeze at high altitudes or cold outside air
temperatures and clog the fuel screens/filters, causing the engine(s) to cease operation.

Particular care should be taken to avoid contamination with the wrong types or grades
of fuel as this can cause aircraft fuel system or engine damage and possible failure
in-flight.

4.1: Fuel Testing

When testing the fuel supplied use water detector capsules or an equivalent that
FLT 1.08.01
is able to test for water in suspension. The Pilot-in-Command must verify that the
quality of the fuel being uplifted is acceptable for operation of the aircraft.

Aircraft fuel has the ability to hold water, thereby contaminating the fuel being supplied
to the engine(s). Water can be held in the fuel in a number of states including dissolved,
in suspension and free. There are a number of fuel testing regimes available, but it is the
aircraft operator’s responsibility to document acceptable methods to confirm that the
fuel is free of water contamination.

ev idence The aircraft operator’s SOPs and maintenance documentation should

document the requirements and/or procedures for fueling of aircraft and
performing fuel testing as part of the pre-flight preparation process. Where
an accredited third party agency provides fuel they should have procedures
in place that provide the equivalent level of compliance. In such cases, the
aircraft operator should have a quality assurance process to ensure that the
third party provider is delivering fuel of an acceptable standard.
Records such as audit schedules, checklists, reports and non-conformance/
corrective action closeout reports must confirm that the ongoing quality of
fuel supplies is being provided.

Page 28
4.2: Fuel Filtration
Fit fuel delivery systems including portable systems with water blocking filtration
of the Go/No-Go types. Mark filter canisters with the next date of change
or inspection cycle. Replace all filters at nominated pressure differentials as
annotated on the filter housing or as recommended by the manufacturer.
This must be performed at least annually.

Where fuel is being provided by a recognized supplier using internationally accepted

practices, an equivalent level of risk management may be considered as being in place
if all applicable procedures are being complied with.

The aircraft operator should document the process by which fuel delivery systems
including portable systems that are to be used for fueling the aircraft operator’s aircraft
are assessed and suitable for use.

ev idence Where the fuel system is owned and/or operated by the aircraft operator,
the operator’s documentation should detail procedures, such as initial and
routine audits, that ensure fuel delivery systems used in fueling aircraft meet
the required standards.
Where fuel is supplied from a recognized third-party provider, the aircraft
operator’s SMS should address how fuel quality control is guaranteed.

4.3: Fuel Sampling

When incorporating supply fuel tanks in company owned and operated facilities,
a slope at the base with a sump drain at the tank low point (or equivalent) for
sampling purposes must be specified for installation.

When using a dedicated fuel source, a sample from the source must be retained
in a clear jar with screw-top-lid, labeled with the current date and retained until
completion of the daily flying activities.

The aircraft operator’s SOPs should contain requirements for fuel testing as part of the
pre-flight preparation process. During the conduct of these procedures, flight crew may
request to view the relevant fuel sample prior to commencement of fueling.

Daily fuel samples should be retained until completion of the daily flying activities as
evidence that the fuel stored in the installation is fit for use in aircraft. Such samples
enable demonstration of the fuel’s chemical compliance with published standards
following an aircraft incident that had received fuel from the installation.

ev idence The aircraft operator’s documentation should detail the requirements for
performing fuel testing as part of the pre-flight preparation process.
The aircraft operator’s documented requirements for initial and routine
audits of fuel delivery systems that are routinely used in fueling the
operator’s aircraft should provide for assessment of compliance with the
required storage and daily fuel sampling procedures.
The aircraft operator’s audit program that applies to fuel supplies, including
audit schedules, checklists, reports and non-conformance/corrective action
closeout reports, must confirm the ongoing quality of fuel supplies (such as
fuel installation daily product quality checks). Page 29
 4.4: Fuel Storage
Prior to testing and approval for use, all fuel storage facilities must be allowed
to settle one hour per one foot of fuel depth (or three hours per metre) after the
tanks have been resupplied, or in the case of drum-stock when the barrels have
been moved to the vertical. Additional storage requirements include:
• Storage tanks must have floating suction or minimum standpipe;
• Bulk deliveries must be filtered into storage tanks;
• Fuel systems must be identified by placard during the settling period indicating
the time when settling will be completed;
• Steel tanks must be lined with an approved epoxy liner unless the tanks are
constructed of stainless steel; and
• Company new-build fuel systems must have stainless steel and connection
welded plumbing.

Where fuel is being provided by a recognized supplier using internationally accepted

practices, an equivalent level of risk management may be considered as being in place
if all applicable procedures are being complied with.

The aircraft operator should document the process by which fuel delivery systems
including portable systems that are to be used in fueling the aircraft are assessed and
determined to be suitable for use.

ev idence The aircraft operator’s documentation should include procedures, such

as initial and routine audits, that ensure fuel delivery systems and their
associated operating procedures meet required standards.
The aircraft operator’s audit program that applies to fuel supplies would
normally be one component of the Safety and Quality Management System.
Associated records such as audit schedules, checklists, reports and non-
conformance/corrective action closeout reports must confirm that fuel
Page 30 delivery systems used for fueling the operator’s aircraft, and their associated
operating procedures, meet the required standards.
4.5: Drummed Fuel
Aircraft operators who make use of drummed fuel in the course of their operations FLT 1.08.02
must have a procedure in place addressing the management and use of drummed
fuel stock. The following performance requirements must be addressed:

Storage:
• Drums must be stored:
– horizontally with access bungs at 3 and 9 o’clock; or
–v
 ertically with drum top cover in place to prevent the accumulation of water
on the drum lid; and
• Drums must have minimal contact with the ground (using wooden slats or
equivalent) and be stored under cover.

Quality:
• Fuel must be consumed within its Aviation Release Note certification date*;
• The access bungs must be tight and the seals unbroken prior to use;
• The fuel must be sampled and include a positive test for the presence of
water using water detecting capsules or paste;
• The refuel pump must be equipped with a Go/No-Go filter; and
• Before fueling the aircraft, a small amount of fuel must be pumped into
a container to remove any contaminants from the hose and nozzle.

To provide optimum opportunity for any contaminants to settle, drums must be

brought to the vertical three hours prior to testing. Where this is not practical
(e.g. SAR, Emergency Response, etc.) all performance requirements of this control
must be followed.

The aircraft operator should document in their Operations Manual specific requirements
and/or procedures that are to be followed for the storage and use of drummed fuel,
whether it is under their control or that of a third party. The procedures must provide
assurance of the quality of drummed fuel supplies that are to be used. The aircraft
operator’s documented procedures must be consistent with guidance provided by
fuel manufacturers where these are more stringent than the BAR Standard.

ev idence The aircraft operator’s SOPs and maintenance documentation should detail
the requirements and/or procedures that must apply as part of the pre-flight
preparation process, where drummed fuel is used for fueling of an aircraft.
Such procedures should require the Pilot-in-Command to assess that the
drum-stock to be used has been stored appropriately. The aircraft operator’s
documentation should also detail procedures, such as initial and routine
audits, that provide assurance of the ongoing quality of fuel supplies.

*Where authorized testing of out-of-date fuel is permitted by the fuel provider and the original certification
period is extended, drummed fuel may be used up until that date but not exceeding two years. The revised Page 31
certification documentation must be retained for the duration the drummed fuel is held on stock.
 5.0: Controlled Flight Into Terrain (CFIT)

An airworthy aircraft under the control of crew is flown into the ground
(or water) resulting in an accident
Controlled Flight into Terrain (CFIT) occurs when an airworthy aircraft under the control
of the flight crew is flown unintentionally into terrain, obstacles or water, usually with
no prior awareness by the crew.

CFIT has been associated with a large number of fatal accidents in the resource sector
involving both fixed and rotary wing aircraft. In many industry accidents, a recurring
root cause involves aircraft operating under Visual Flight Rules in a degraded visual
environment that otherwise might have been better suited for operations under
Instrument Flight Rules. Unpressurized aircraft (both aeroplanes and helicopters),
working below the weather to get in and out of mine sites in areas of mountainous
terrain raise the risk of CFIT considerably.

Similarly, night helicopter offshore operations, or onshore in remote areas, have resulted
in a high number of fatal accidents due to CFIT.

Although CFIT remains a significant cause of incident within the aviation industry, it is
widely recognized that these accidents are preventable. The following controls from the
BARS are aimed directly at preventing CFIT accidents.

Flight Operations – Andes Mountains, Chile

Page 32
5.1: Night or Instrument Flight Rules (IFR) – Two Crew Operations
Flights flown at night or in IFR must have two-pilots who hold valid and current FLT 1.05.05
instrument and night flying ratings using Standard Operating Procedures (SOPs) FLT 1.13.15
contained in the Operations Manual. Refer to the FSF ALAR Toolkit
([Link]).

Having two qualified Pilots that comply with approved SOPs reduces the risk of human
error in an environment dominated by incidents attributed to human factors. Using
two-pilots helps mitigate the risk in the following ways:

• Workload distribution: Single-pilot operations require the Pilot to perform the role
of Pilot, navigator, radio operator, systems manager, on-board meteorologist, record
keeper and passenger control. The workload further increases when outside visual
cues decrease, i.e. at night or when operating under the IFR in turn warranting an
additional crew member;
• Error recognition and trapping: Approved SOPs that require the non-handling Pilot
to monitor the actions of the handling-Pilot with the aim of identifying any error
or omission made in operation of the aircraft. As a coordinated crew any identified
error is discussed, rectified and monitored to negate any safety impacts; and
• Reduction in fatigue: With a decrease in outside visual cues at night or under IFR
comes an increased use of instruments to provide necessary situational awareness.
This requires an increase in concentration levels required by a Pilot and a greater
risk of fatigue-related errors which can be mitigated by a second crew member.

ev idence The aircraft operator must have a documented procedure requiring that
flights conducted at night or under the IFR are crewed by two qualified Pilots
when operating for a BARS Member Organization. The aircraft operator’s
SOPs must clearly specify the duties that are to be performed by the second
Pilot and detail the crew coordination processes that apply. For aircraft that
are certified to be operated by a single-pilot and where the aircraft operator
chooses this option for day, VFR or non-resource company flights, a separate
set of SOPs must be in place for the single-pilot role.
Associated flight records should confirm that flights conducted at night/
IFR are crewed by two appropriately qualified Pilots in accordance with
the SOPs. Flight crew files and rostering records must confirm appropriate
implementation of these requirements.

Page 33
 5.2: Special VFR Procedures
Planned use of Special VFR procedures must only be used when endorsed by a
Competent Aviation Specialist.

Special VFR procedures, where authorized for use, allow visual flight operations to
be conducted in technically Instrument Meteorological Conditions (IMC). Typically
these occur where there are distinct changes to the meteorological conditions in close
proximity to the airfield. For example, in coastal environments with low cloud along the
coast and clear conditions offshore or inland and mountainous regions where low stratus
may be encountered in valley airports, but where the airspace further away from the
mountains is clear of weather. Air Traffic Control may authorize Special VFR procedures
to be conducted in controlled terminal airspace in situations where weather conditions
do not meet VMC criteria.

The adoption of Special VFR procedures substantially increases the risks of an operation
and to fly Special VFR safely, it is essential that the Pilot has a thorough knowledge of
the airport and its surrounding environment.

ev idence The aircraft operator’s SOPs should either detail that Special VFR is not
authorized, or where the aircraft operator has specifically authorized Special
VFR operations, that there is a process whereby the company is advised and
provided with the opportunity to agree to the practice. A risk assessment
involving the company’s aviation specialist would normally accompany
such approvals.

Companies should be aware of the use of Special VFR supporting their activities
and this should be discussed during Operations Reviews.

5.3: Night or IFR – Aircraft

Flights flown at night or under IFR must be conducted in a multi-engine aircraft.

Night or IFR conditions are representative of environments in which a successful

emergency landing may not be assured therefore twin-engine operations are
recommended.

BARS Member Organizations contracting for night or IFR operations should require
multi-engine aircraft on contract.

5.4: Night or IFR – Flight Planning

FLT 1.02.14 Flights flown at night or under IFR must be conducted in compliance with an IFR
flight plan.

Operation of a flight under the provisions of an IFR flight plan imposes the most
stringent requirements in relation to routes to be followed and the levels to be
maintained to ensure adequate obstacle clearance throughout the flight.

ev idence The aircraft operator must have a documented policy requiring that flights
operated at night or under the IFR for any BMO is only conducted under
a flight plan that has been filed in accordance with the requirements for
IFR flights. Associated flight records should confirm that flights conducted
Page 34 at night or under the IFR are only conducted in compliance with IFR flight
planning requirements.
5.5: Night or IFR – Simulator Training
For long-term contracts, crews operating any aircraft at night or under IFR must FLT 2.04.01
attend initial and recurrent simulator training. Flight Training Devices may be used
when they are available for that aircraft type.

Use of simulators or Flight Training Devices enable crews to practice abnormal operations
(engine and/or system emergencies) in conditions and situations that would present
an unacceptable risk to train and practice in an aircraft. It allows them to become
comfortable with the application of procedures in critical or adverse situations that
cannot be safely replicated in the aircraft during training.

The company and aircraft operator should consider whether simulators are
considered ‘reasonably available’ prior to a contract being awarded.

ev idence Where the aircraft operator’s check and training program utilizes flight
simulators, the Operations Manual must contain procedures for their use.
The documented program should follow established criteria and cover
requirements and procedures for the use of simulators in the conduct of
initial and recurrent training and checking.
Pilot training records should confirm that requirements of the training
program applicable to the use of flight simulators have been appropriately
applied in the initial and recurrent training of Pilots and the ongoing
evaluation of Pilot competency.
The responsible regulatory authority should provide advice regarding the
ongoing approval status of flight simulators and flight training devices.

5.6: Night or IFR – Approach/Landing Recency

IFR and night approach recency must comply with the responsible regulatory FLT 2.06.02
authority’s requirements, but not include less than three night take-off and
landings for each Pilot in the preceding 90 days.

Flight crew manipulative skills need to be practiced frequently to maintain minimum

competencies. This is particularly true for night and instrument environments where
a combination of manipulative skills and situational awareness require optimum
performance from the flight crew. Recency requirements are commonly conducted
during normal line operations with little disruption to normal schedules. However it
may be necessary for the aircraft operator to schedule either specific recency training
flights or simulator exercises in order to maintain the stated requirements.

The aircraft operator must not assign flight crew to a flight unless they meet the
minimum recency requirements of either the BAR Standard or the responsible regulatory
authority (whichever is the more stringent).

The aircraft operator must have a records management system for recording and
monitoring all relevant flight crew recency parameters including, but not limited to,
day/night take-offs and landings and instrument approaches.

Page 35
 ev idence The aircraft operator must document the system by which recency
requirements are tracked. While manual, paper-based systems are
acceptable; computer programs that more accurately track the varying limits
are readily available and are preferable.
Where the BAR Standard is not used for all operations, there should be
a method for indicating that crew who fail to meet the Standard recency
requirements are excluded from BMO operations until these requirements
are met.
Associated records must confirm that Pilots are maintaining the required
recency and that the rostering system has attended to upcoming
requirements prior to expiry. Flight crew files and rostering records
confirm implementation.

5.7: Night or IFR – Autopilot

FLT 1.02.16
An autopilot or AFCS must be fitted for night or IFR flights. The aircraft operator
must have an automation policy in the relevant Operations Manual that outlines
the conditions and procedures for manual flying.

The aircraft autopilot or Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS) provides assistance
to the flight crew throughout the flight by relieving the Pilot Flying (PF) from routine
manipulative tasks. The correct use of automated systems significantly reduces Pilot
workload enabling time for other flight management demands. The availability of an
autopilot greatly increases a Pilot’s ability to maintain situational awareness, respond
to unanticipated changes (e.g. ATC instruction, weather conditions, etc.) and correctly
respond to and manage an abnormal or emergency situation.

Many industry accidents have cited the failure of flight crew manipulative skills when
automated systems have failed or been disabled. Retention of core flying skills remains
a key component in the safe operation of an aircraft and flight crew should regularly
practice maintenance of these skills when in a low-threat environment to avoid
automation dependency. The aircraft operator should have documentation that details
the conditions under which automation systems may be disengaged and manual flight
undertaken.

ev idence The aircraft operator should have SOPs, consistent with the information
provided in the aircraft and/or autopilot manufacturer’s Aircraft Flight
Manual (AFM)/Pilots Operating Handbook (POH), that clearly specify the
policy for autopilot use and management.
The provisions relevant to auto flight systems in the Operator’s Minimum
Equipment List (MEL) should specify a requirement for the system to be
serviceable for night or IFR flights.

Page 36
5.8: Stabilized Approaches
Aircraft operators must include type-specific stabilized approach requirements FLT 1.02.04
in the Operations Manual. Refer to the Flight Safety Foundation ALAR Briefing FLT 1.13.19
Note 7.1 ([Link]).

Unstable approaches that do not meet standard approach tolerances are a root cause in
approach and landing accidents and Controlled Flight Into Terrain (CFIT).

The stabilized approach is characterized by defined approach speeds, descent rate,

vertical flight-path, and configuration through a series of defined approach gates to the
landing touchdown point. The concept is primarily applicable to fixed wing operations,
but IFR helicopters on instrument approaches will follow the same process.

Day VFR utility helicopter operations require less stringent approach parameters due
to their operating environment. In this case, the aircraft operator will define approach
criteria requiring helipad reconnaissance, wind assessment and approach techniques
involving in ground effect and out of ground effect considerations.

A stabilized approach policy and the accompanying procedure should be developed

for each type flown by the aircraft operator. The policy should reference the aircraft
manufacturer’s recommendations and encompass the nine elements of the Flight Safety
Foundation’s Briefing Note on Stabilized Approaches and any other aircraft specific
factors required (e.g. minimum fan speeds on low bypass ratio engines, minimum
propeller pitch settings, etc).

The nine key elements of the FSF briefing note are reproduced below, and the full version
can be accessed at: ([Link]

Recommended Elements Of a Stabilized Approach

All flights must be stabilized by 1,000 feet above airport elevation in Instrument
Meteorological Conditions (IMC) and by 500 feet above airport elevation in Visual
Meteorological Conditions (VMC). An approach is stabilized when all of the following
criteria are met:

1. The aircraft is on the correct flight path;

2. Only small changes in heading/pitch are required to maintain the correct flight path;

3. The aircraft speed is not more than VREF + 20 knots indicated airspeed and not less
than VREF;

4. The aircraft is in the correct landing configuration;

5. Sink rate is no greater than 1,000 feet per minute; if an approach requires a sink rate
greater than 1,000 feet per minute, a special briefing should be conducted;

6. Power setting is appropriate for the aircraft configuration and is not below the
minimum power for approach as defined by the aircraft operating manual;

7. All briefings and checklists have been conducted;

Page 37
 8. Specific types of approaches are stabilized if they also fulfil the following: Instrument
Landing System (ILS) approaches must be flown within one dot of the glideslope
and localizer; a Category II or Category III ILS approach must be flown within the
expanded localizer band; during a circling approach, wings should be level on final
when the aircraft reaches 300 feet above airport elevation; and

9. Unique approach procedures or abnormal conditions requiring a deviation from the

above elements of a stabilized approach require a special briefing.

An approach that becomes unstabilized below 1,000 feet above airport elevation in IMC
or below 500 feet above airport elevation in VMC requires an immediate go-around.

ev idence The aircraft operator must document a clear policy regarding the criteria to
be met, guidance and requirements for the conduct of stabilized approach.
Aircraft operators are encouraged to develop and implement a policy
for mandatory, internal reporting of occurrences involving approach
destabilization and associated go-around. Tracking of such reports by the
aircraft operator’s SMS will assist with the identification of possible specific
risks or considerations that may exist in the conduct of approaches.

5.9: Mandatory Go-around Procedures

FLT 1.02.05 Aircraft operators must include no-fault, mandatory go-around requirements in
the Operations Manual.

The aircraft operator’s SOPs must include a policy regarding the circumstances under
which the conduct of mandatory and no-fault go-around is to be carried out. The
policy should contain a clear statement that the aircraft operator supports the Pilot-in-
Command’s decision to go-around, regardless of the circumstances. The go-around policy
should be based on the content of the Flight Safety Foundation’s briefing notes ‘Being
Prepared to Go-Around’ ([Link] and
‘Manual Go-Around’ ([Link]

Industry safety discussions often cite the all-engines-operating go-around as being one
of the most poorly conducted maneuvers by flight crew. The aircraft operator should
Page 38 ensure that the go-around maneuver and procedure forms part of its regular check and
training regime to increase crew familiarity with the maneuver.
 ev idence The aircraft operator must document and approve a clear policy regarding
the circumstances under which a mandatory and no-fault go-around must be
carried out. Aircraft operators should also include an all engines operating
go-around in their check and training regime.
Aircraft operators are encouraged to develop and implement a policy
for mandatory, internal reporting of occurrences where a go-around has
been conducted. Tracking of such reports by the aircraft operator’s SMS
will assist with identification of possible specific risks that may exist
during approaches.

5.10: Flight Data Monitoring

When available for the aircraft type, long-term contracts that are for a duration of FLT 1.02.15
three years or greater and which specify individual aircraft must have operational
Flight Data Monitoring capability that is routinely used to assess operational
approach and landing competencies.

Flight Data Monitoring (FDM) is an important component of an aircraft operator’s

SMS and is used to monitor and analize the safety and quality of flight operations. An
effective program will encourage adherence to SOPs and deter non-standard operations
as an adjunct to improving flight safety. Of particular significance is the detection of
adverse trends in any part of the flight operations that require revision of the aircraft
operator’s SOPs.

FDM is an effective tool for identifying any exceedances of flight parameters that
may indicate systemic issues (e.g. training, specific airport procedure requirements or
incorrect flight parameters) or improper operating techniques.

Baseline flight data parameters are established following a data gathering exercise
and variations are identified through flight data monitoring computer analysis program
by comparison. Examples of FDM use include: determination of whether an unstable
approach was an isolated event or symptomatic of a wider problem due to environmental
influences, a weakness in ATC procedures or improper flight management.

ev idence Where FDM is available to an aircraft operator, the operator’s Safety

Management System manual should detail the process for integrating
FDM into the SMS. The process for regular reviews of the data and
an investigative process for out of tolerance events should also be
clearly documented.

Page 39
 5.11: Multi-crew Operations

FLT 1.02.01 Where multi-crew operations are conducted, procedures outlining the duties
FLT 1.02.02 and responsibilities of all flight crew members must be prescribed by the
FLT 1.02.03 aircraft operator.
FLT 1.13.15 The safety enhancement of utilizing multi-crew operations will only be fully realized if
all crew members meet an established operational standard and perform their duties
in a predictable and standardized manner.

This can be achieved by adherence to SOPs that outline the duties and responsibilities
for each crew member. An aircraft operator’s SOPs should be documented and approved
to supplement information provided in the aircraft manufacturer’s approved Aircraft
Flight Manual (AFM).

ev idence The aircraft operator must have SOPs that are consistent with the
information provided in the aircraft manufacturer’s AFM and should detail
how the crew work together, including the duties and responsibilities of both
Pilot flying and Pilot monitoring.
For aircraft that are certified single-pilot and where the aircraft operator
chooses this option for day, VFR or non-BMO flights, a separate set of SOPs
should be in place accompanied by appropriate training and checking for the
single-pilot role.
Associated flight records should be able to confirm that flights conducted
at night or under the IFR are crewed by two appropriately qualified Pilots in
accordance with the aircraft operator’s policy. Flight crew files and rostering
records would confirm implementation.

5.12: CRM/ADM Training

FLT 2.02.01 All flight crew and cabin crew must have successfully completed Crew Resource
FLT 2.02.02 Management (CRM) or Threat and Error Management (TEM) training at intervals
FLT 2.06.04 not exceeding two years. Completion of an Aeronautical Decision Making (ADM)
course is acceptable for approved single-pilot operations.

CRM focuses upon the management of resources by all crew members to enhance safety
through goal setting, teamwork, awareness and both proactive and reactive feedback.
The skills promoted by CRM training provide a significant defence against the threats to
safety that routinely present within the aviation system and against human error and its
consequences. Training the crew in threat and error management reinforces that threats
and errors are a part of everyday aviation operations that must be managed to achieve
safe outcomes.

Evidence-based research indicates there are links between CRM and TEM making it
acceptable for crew to successfully complete either course at regular intervals. Where the
aircraft operator flies aircraft that include cabin crew, these staff should be included in joint
CRM training courses and associated exercises.

While many of the concepts covered and focused on in CRM will apply to single-pilot
operations, they are most beneficial to personnel involved in multi-crew operations. An
ADM course is a recommended alternative for Pilots who are engaged solely in single-pilot
operations. ADM will encourage Pilots to use a systematic decision making process to
Page 40 consistently determine the best course of action in response to a given set of circumstances.
 ev idence Syllabuses of training for CRM, TEM or ADM courses (as applicable) should
be published in the Operations Manual and should include all assigned
flight and cabin crew. The syllabuses for initial training and processes
for conducting periodic training and ongoing evaluation should also
be documented.
Associated crew training records should confirm that these training
requirements have been applied in the induction training of new crew and
are repeated periodically at intervals not exceeding two years (or as required
by the responsible regulatory authority, if more frequent training is required).

5.13: Terrain Awareness Warning System (TAWS)

Aircraft that fly under IFR or at night and on long-term contract must be fitted FLT 1.11.01
with an approved and serviceable Class A TAWS when an approved modification FLT 2.03.14
exists for the aircraft type. The aircraft operator must have related procedures
to be followed by the flight crew in the event of an alert.

CFIT represents a major risk to aircraft operations and accident investigations show the
risk of CFIT increases for flights operated under IFR or at night. The primary function
of Terrain Awareness and Warning Systems (TAWS) is to reduce CFIT by increasing crew
situational awareness.

The term TAWS covers all types of terrain awareness systems that include the Enhanced
Ground Proximity Warning System (EGPWS). The EGPWS has a worldwide digital terrain
database, which, when combined with the GPS position data, provides real-time
predication and terrain avoidance capability.

Class A TAWS is required by commercial air transport aircraft and uses inputs such as
position, attitude, airspeed and glideslope, which along with internal terrain, obstacles,
and airport databases predict a potential conflict between the aircraft’s flight path and
terrain or an obstacle. Class A TAWS provides an alert to flight crew permitting them to
take appropriate evasive action, and is the higher standard of the two classes.

Class B TAWS provides basic functions and whilst not predictive gives indications of
imminent contact with the ground as a result of excessive rates of descent, negative
climb rate or altitude loss after take-off.

ev idence The aircraft operator must publish SOPs, consistent with the information
provided in the aircraft and/or TAWS OEM data clearly specifying procedures
and action to be taken by flight crew in the event of a TAWS alert.
Where TAWS is fitted to the aircraft operator’s aircraft, provisions relevant to
TAWS should be included in the operator’s MEL and Pilot training program.

Page 41
 6.0: Incorrect Loading

Incorrect loading of passengers and/or their lack of proper safety

awareness results in an aircraft accident
Loading errors can present a major hazard to flight safety and there have been numerous
incidents where control of aircraft has been either lost or compromised, due to incorrect
loading.

Aircraft loading must be conducted in a way that ensures the specified maximum
allowable weights are not exceeded and that the load distribution results in the center of
gravity being in, and remaining within, the permitted flight envelope for all stages of the
intended flight.

It is crucial that the flight crew are aware of the aircraft’s weight and center of gravity so
that the aircraft equipment can be configured appropriately for take-off and performance
calculations accurately completed. This is important to ensure that the aircraft can be
rotated at the correct indicated airspeed with full control of the aircraft being retained
and that any limitations imposed by the runway length and obstacles in the take-off path
are determined and complied with.

The process of loading an aircraft is quite complex and requires coordination between
all parties involved in the process. To help guard against common loading errors and
coordination break downs that can lead to errors, aircraft operators and companies
contracting aviation services must develop and comply with a system of checks and
cross checks by load personnel and flight crew members.

Page 42
6.1: Passenger Weight
For aeroplanes with less than 30 passenger seats and for all helicopters, actual GRH 1.04.01
body weight (including hand luggage) must be used. GRH 1.04.05
If within regulatory and operator guidance, standard weights based on seasonal
averages acceptable to the company may be used for fixed wing aircraft
with 30 passenger seats or more, unless aviation specialist advice provides
alternative guidance.

The use of standard passenger weights, as a means of determining the overall weight
of passengers to be carried, relies on statistical data and the standard distribution of
actual body weights amongst the general population. The potential for overloading
an aircraft with only a small number of passenger seats is high if standard passenger
weights are used.

The exception to this is for business jet aircraft, that operate with high power margins
and a fewer seats relative to their Maximum All Up Weight. In these circumstances it is
acceptable practice to use standard weights.

Where standard passenger weights are used, they must be determined and used in
accordance with procedures acceptable to the responsible regulatory authority. Where
approved for use by the responsible regulatory authority, standard passenger weights
will be published, and/or an alternative procedure will be applied allowing aircraft
operators to conduct a survey of their own passenger base to determine the standard
passenger weights. The last point is critical where operations are conducted on a
regional basis and differing body masses exist with differing ethnic populations.

Where approved by the applicable regulatory authority and the Competent Aviation
Specialist, examples of alternative procedures include:
• The construction of limiting case scenarios with associated load plans to support
the approved loading procedures;
• The use of compartment weights on larger aircraft; and
• An estimate of body weight (for business jet operations).

Actual weights should be derived from calibrated scales provided by either the company
or the aircraft operator. The Pilot-in-Command is responsible for ensuring that the
aircraft is loaded within its center of gravity and weight limits at all times.

ev idence The aircraft operator’s documented procedures should include the method to
determine the weight of passengers to be carried on each flight.
Such procedures must require determination and use of actual body weight
(including hand luggage) for passengers to be carried on fixed wing aircraft
with a seating capacity of less than 30 seats, and all helicopters.
Where standard passenger weights are to be used, the aircraft operator
should document the process used to determine those weights and be
able to demonstrate the approval of the loading system by the applicable
regulatory authority.

Page 43
 6.2: Cargo Weight and Loading

GRH 1.01.05 Weigh baggage and cargo separately and include details on the manifest.
GRH 1.02.01 If cargo is carried inside the passenger compartment during passenger carrying
GRH 1.02.02 operations, secure it using nets and straps and place it in front of the passengers
GRH 1.02.03 where practical. Do not obstruct normal or emergency exits.
GRH 1.04.03
GRH 1.04.04 Appropriate measures must be taken to protect all baggage and cargo from the effects
of rain prior to loading on-board the aircraft. While this is good practice to prevent
damage to the baggage and cargo, it is important that exposure to rain does not
significantly increase the weight of items to be carried.

While the carriage of cargo in the passenger compartment during passenger carrying
operations is to be generally discouraged, it is acknowledged that this may be necessary
for some aircraft types. Where an aircraft operator has obtained agreement from the
company to do this, guidance must be readily available to flight crew and loading
personnel regarding the area(s) in the cabin that can be used and the means by which
the cargo will be restrained. It is critical that only aviation certified restraint equipment
is utilized for securing cargo.

ev idence The aircraft operator’s documented procedures should detail the

requirements and processes that are to be used to determine the weight
of all baggage and cargo that is to be carried on each flight. This includes
approval of the loading system in use.
Where an aircraft operator has obtained agreement from the company for
cargo to be carried in the passenger compartment during passenger carrying
operations, the approval should be included in the Operations Manual. The
aircraft operator’s procedures should also detail the locations in the cabin
that may be used and the method by which cargo will be restrained.

6.3: Load and Trim Calculations

FLT 1.06.01 Prior to take-off, the Pilot-in-Command must ensure that fuel and oil requirements
FLT 1.03.03 are correct, and that weight and center of gravity limits of the aircraft have been
FLT 1.03.04 calculated and are within limits for flight. The Load and Trim calculations may be
accomplished by any approved means, but the details must be available in the
cockpit at all times.

The aircraft operator’s load management procedures should specify the calculation
methods acceptable, the center of gravity limits and the requirement for the Pilot-in-
Command to authorize the final load calculation. An approved load-sheet (or approved
alternative) must be completed prior to departure of the aircraft on each stage of every
flight. Where a flight involves a number of stages, a supplementary load sheet reflecting
the loading at the initial stage and accounting for all changes in the load may be used
for each subsequent stage on the same day.

The aircraft operator should retain records associated with flight for a period of 90 days.

Page 44
 ev idence The aircraft operator’s procedures should detail the requirements and
processes to determine the aircraft weight and balance for each flight, and
require a copy of the associated load sheet to be carried on the aircraft and
be available on the flight deck at all times during flight.
Documented procedures should also detail requirements for retention of
load sheets and other documentation related to the weight and balance
calculation for each flight for a minimum period of 90 days.

6.4: Manifest
A passenger manifest that accurately reflects the occupants of an aircraft must be GRH 1.01.02
raised for each flight or, where applicable, each sector. The manifest must record GRH 1.01.06
the full name of each passenger and a copy must be accessible by flight following GRH 1.01.07
personnel at all times.

The aircraft operator’s load management procedures must ensure that a passenger
manifest is raised for each flight or each sector of a flight where passengers change.
The load management procedures should require a check of the names of passengers
allocated a seat on a flight against the list of personnel cleared for travel on a flight
by the company.

It is important that the passenger manifest compiled for each flight accurately reflects
the occupants of an aircraft when in-flight to provide full accountability. The aircraft
operator’s procedures must ensure that a copy of the completed passenger manifest
is readily accessible by flight crew and by flight-following personnel at all times.
The procedures must also ensure that a copy of each completed passenger manifest is
retained on file for a minimum period of 90 days after the completion of the flight.

ev idence The aircraft operator’s documented procedures should detail the

requirements and processes that are used to compile a passenger manifest
for each flight. Such procedures should require that passenger manifests
contain the name of each passenger carried, the places of their embarkation
and destination and clear details of the flight to which the manifest relates
such as the date, estimated time of departure, flight route, and where
applicable, flight number.
Passenger manifests should be retained with load sheets and other
associated loading documentation and should be available in accordance
with the aircraft operator’s documented records retention procedures.

Page 45
 6.5: Dangerous Goods Cargo (Hazardous Materials)

FLT 1.02.06 Comply with current International Air Transport Association (IATA) requirements
FLT 2.03.11 (or similar requirements such as Title 49 of the Code of Federal Regulations)
FLT 2.03.12 associated with Dangerous Goods Regulations. The aircraft operator must have
FLT 2.06.05 appropriate procedures and trained personnel for the carriage and acceptance of
GRH 1.03.01 dangerous goods. All crew must complete dangerous goods awareness training at
GRH 1.03.02 least every two years.
GRH 1.03.03 Dangerous goods are solids, liquids, or gases that are:
GRH 1.03.04
• Explosive substances;
ORG 1.02.04
•G
 oods which, by reason of their nature, are liable to endanger the safety of an
aircraft or persons on-board an aircraft; and/or
• Goods that regulations declare to be dangerous goods.

Dangerous goods may only be carried if an aircraft operator has met the specific training,
documentation, record keeping and incident reporting requirements of the responsible
regulatory authority.

The safe and successful application of regulations for the transport of dangerous goods by
air is dependent on all individuals being aware of the risks involved and having a detailed
understanding of the regulations. This level of awareness can only be achieved through the
completion of initial and recurrent dangerous goods training programs for all personnel
that may be involved in the handling of cargo that has been consigned for carriage on an
aircraft. This includes baggage checked-in or carried on-board by passengers.

Company employees who are involved with the consignment or acceptance of

cargo and baggage should undertake applicable DG training. The aircraft operator
and the company must implement processes to monitor and confirm that training
requirements are met.

ev idence The aircraft operator must be able to demonstrate approval from the responsible
regulatory authority for the carriage of dangerous goods (if applicable).
The aircraft operator must have a Dangerous Goods Manual (or equivalent
document) to provide all personnel with the instructions and information that
is necessary to enable them to safely perform the task of handling and carrying
dangerous goods. The manual must contain information that is required to
ensure that DGs are only carried if packed, loaded and transported in accordance
with responsible regulatory authority approvals and current IATA Dangerous
Goods Regulations (or equivalent).
The aircraft operator must have a documented process that details which
personnel are required to be qualified in the packaging, consignment and
acceptance of DGs (as applicable). The aircraft operator should establish a
tracking system (either manual or electronic is acceptable) detailing staff
currency with respect to DG training. The tracking system should include a
forward looking function to ensure that DG training events are planned with
sufficient notification to meet the 24 month expiry requirement.
Retained loading documentation should be held for a minimum of 90 days. The
documentation should be available in accordance with the aircraft operator’s
documented procedures. In instances where dangerous goods have been carried,
the documentation prescribed by the aircraft operator’s Dangerous Goods
Page 46 Manual (or equivalent document) must be made available.
6.6: Passenger Briefing
Passengers must be briefed on emergency procedures and safety matters prior to FLT 1.09.01
flight, including the following requirements: FLT 1.09.03
• That there is no smoking during the flight or around the aircraft and apron area; FLT 1.09.04
• A general description of the aircraft and specific avoid/danger areas; FLT 1.09.05
• The location of non-smoking and fasten seatbelt signs and briefing cards; FLT 1.09.06
FLT 1.09.07
• The use of seat belts and shoulder harnesses;
FLT 1.09.11
• The location and operation of oxygen masks, if applicable;
FLT 1.13.10
• The means of communication between crew and passengers; FLT 1.13.11
• The brace position;
• The location and use of normal and emergency exits and all life-saving
equipment;
• Instructions on the use of Personal Electronic Devices (PEDs); and
• Passengers must be briefed after any sudden descent, return to base, or any other
event that may cause concern.

Regardless of previous flight experience, passengers maximize their chance of survival

if they receive an appropriate pre-flight safety briefing, retain the information passed
to them and can apply it in an emergency situation.

It is for this reason that all regulatory authorities require that a comprehensive safety
briefing be completed prior to each flight.

A safety briefing and/or demonstration should be provided to passengers prior to each

take-off and can be completed through personal briefing and actual demonstration or by
means of a video presentation. For high capacity jet operations, the regulatory approved
pre-flight safety demonstration meets the above requirements.

In resource sector operations where multi-sector flights utilizing the same

passenger complement and crew occurs (e.g. exploration activities), one safety
briefing for a 24 hour period is sufficient to satisfy the intent of this control.

ev idence The aircraft operator’s procedures should specify the requirements that are to
be followed to ensure that all passengers are properly briefed on emergency
procedures and other matters of importance to their personal safety before
flight. The content and delivery of the briefing will demonstrate that the
above requirements have been met.

Page 47
 6.7: Multi-language Briefing
FLT 1.09.10 When the first language in the area of operations is not English, the aircraft
operator must provide emergency exit decals and briefings in the local language
as well as English.

It is important to ensure that all pre-flight safety briefings and printed safety material
that is provided to passengers is presented in both English and the language(s) most
applicable to the majority of passengers carried on a flight.

ev idence The aircraft operator’s documented procedures should ensure that where
English is not the first language of passengers, decals, passenger briefings
and passenger-briefing cards are provided in English and the local language.
The content and delivery of the briefing will demonstrate that the above
requirements have been met.

Page 48
7.0: Collision on Ground

An aircraft and an object collide on the ground resulting in an accident

The term ‘collision on ground’ covers a range of safety scenarios relating to damage
arising from aircraft colliding with obstacles while maneuvering on the ground, or the
collision of people or equipment with a stationary aircraft (including propellers and
rotors that may be in motion).

Based on data developed by the International Air Transport Association (IATA), the FSF
estimates that 27,000 ramp accidents and incidents – one per 1,000 departures – occur
worldwide every year. About 243,000 people are injured each year in these accidents
and incidents; the injury rate is 9 per 1,000 departures.

Take appropriate measures to address and minimize the possibility of aircraft being
involved in a collision on the ground. Such measures start with the design and layout
of the airfield or landing area and extend to controlling the movement of personnel and
equipment around aircraft movement areas.

Particular care needs to be taken in situations where an aircraft is being readied for
departure or arrival whilst departures of multiple aircraft are occurring.

The Flight Safety Foundation website contains information on ground incident prevention
at: [Link]

7.1: Passenger Terminal Area

Company owned and operated airfields must have a waiting area for passengers
offering security, basic amenities, protection from the elements and a barrier from
the aircraft movement area. Incoming and outgoing passenger routes must be
designated.

Written safety material that reinforces key aircraft safety information should be
displayed in the waiting area, which may also serve for video briefings and the
check-in process.

The company must provide facilities and features and implement procedures at airfields
or landing sites under their control to ensure the safety of persons using those facilities.
Such facilities and features must address the safety, security and operational practices
related to the control of access to, and movement on, aircraft movement areas.

Facilities and features provided in terminal areas and their associated procedures should
ensure the efficiency of passenger processing by maintaining separation, where possible,
between incoming and outgoing passengers. This is particularly important in locations
where specific procedures such as passenger security screening are required.

The company should have documented information regarding the facilities

available and the procedures that are to be followed for each airfield or landing
site under their control. All relevant information should be provided to aircraft
operators so that it can be incorporated into their site-specific SOPs, as required.
Appropriate safety information must be provided in passenger waiting areas.

Page 49
 7.2: Designated Freight Areas
Company owned and operated airfields, helipads and helidecks must have a
designated and secure freight area that provides a controlled environment clear
of the aircraft movement area and public thoroughfare.

The company must provide segregated facilities at airfields or landing sites under their
control and implement supporting procedures to be used for the acceptance, storage
and/or consolidation of cargo. Such areas should be located clear of the aircraft
movement area and positioned to avoid the effects of aircraft prop-wash, jet blast or
helicopter down-wash.

Designated freight areas should also be positioned in locations that are away
from public thoroughfares and provide for restricted access to enhance safety
and security.

The company should have designated areas to be used for the acceptance, storage
and/or consolidation of cargo for each airfield or landing site under their control.
All relevant information should be provided to aircraft operators so that it can be
incorporated into their site-specific SOPs, as required.

The storage location should be adequately designated.

7.3: Passenger Control

A designated Passenger Control Officer (PCO) or Helideck Landing Officer (HLO)
GRH 1.01.08
who is in a position to communicate with the crew at all times must control all
GRH 1.01.09
passenger movements to and from the designated aircraft movement area. The
PCO can be provided by the company or aircraft operator, and may be a crew
member in a multi-crew operation.

The PCO and HLO must be identified using a distinguishing vest if they are not a
crew member of the aircraft.

Appropriate measures must be taken to provide adequate control of all passenger

movements to and from designated aircraft movement areas. The company and aircraft
operator must understand whose responsibility it is to provide a PCO or HLO for any
operation and what roles and responsibilities are to be fulfilled by a person carrying out
this function.

The aircraft operator and/or company should publish a syllabus for the initial and
recurrent training of staff appointed to PCO or HLO positions and detail the process
for certification of competency.

If the company is responsible for passenger control to and from designated aircraft
movement areas, the personnel must be trained and equipped with all necessary
PPE including a high visibility vest with appropriate markings.

Procedures should detail who is to fulfil the role of PCO or HLO at each airfield or
landing site and contain all associated roles and responsibilities.

ev idence The aircraft operator’s operational risk assessment process should consider
any passenger control requirements that are to apply at each airfield or
landing site used prior to the commencement of operations.
The aircraft operator’s SOPs should detail the passenger handling procedures
Page 50 where the PCO duties are carried out by a flight crew member.
7.4: Ground Procedures
The Operations Manual must include requirements on ground handling and the GRH 1.01.01
maneuvering of aircraft.
To ensure the safety of aircraft, equipment and personnel, the aircraft operator must
document procedures relevant to the ramp or ground handling and maneuvering of
each applicable aircraft type, expanding on the information provided in the aircraft
manufacturer’s approved AFM and/or Ground Handling Manual (where available).
Such procedures should be developed to avoid errors that can occur during ground
handling processes and create unsafe situations that may lead to accidents or incidents
either directly involving ground handling personnel or the aircraft.
The aircraft operator’s documented procedures must be made available to all personnel
who are allocated duties associated with ramp or ground handling of aircraft.

ev idence The aircraft operator should document procedures relevant to the ramp
or ground handling and maneuvering of each applicable aircraft type.
Where necessary, such procedures should detail any specific requirements
or procedures that may apply at each airfield or landing site that is used.

7.5: Rotors Running Load/Unload

When loading or unloading passengers from helicopters with rotors running, FLT 1.03.07
the Pilot at the controls must only perform cockpit duties that are related to the FLT 5.03.06
identification of external hazards and passenger movement around the aircraft.
The transfer of passengers whilst the rotors are running must be supervised by
a designated PCO or HLO.
Loading or unloading helicopters with the rotors turning introduces the risk of personnel
and obstacles coming into contact with any of the dynamic components of the helicopter.
The aircraft operator must document the circumstances under which loading and/
or unloading operations for helicopters with the rotors turning is authorized to occur.
This should be accompanied with an operation specific risk assessment. The associated
procedures should require that:
• A Pilot must remain at the controls at all times and is only to be engaged in essential
cockpit duties associated with the identification of external hazards and monitoring
of passenger movement around the aircraft;
• Passengers are provided with an appropriate briefing prior to approaching
the helicopter; and
• Passengers are to be escorted to/from the helicopter by an appropriately trained and
authorized person (either the co-pilot or HLO/PCO).

ev idence The aircraft operator should document the circumstances under which
loading and/or unloading operations for helicopters with the rotors turning
is authorized to occur, and the training requirements and procedures that are
to apply to safely undertake the operation.
The aircraft operator’s documented procedures are to be made available, as
applicable, to all personnel who are allocated duties associated with these
operations.
The company and aircraft operator should have an audit and review process
to ensure that all loading and unloading operations involving helicopters Page 51
with rotors running is conducted in accordance with published procedures.
 7.6: Parking Apron
For all company owned and operated airfields, the parking apron area must be
assessed by the aircraft operator as being suitable for their type of aircraft.
Consider other transient aircraft traffic, helicopter operations, refueling, and the
Pavement Classification Number (PCN). For long-term operations where practical,
taxi lines specific to the contracted aircraft type must be painted in the apron
area for obstacle-clearance maneuvering purposes.

Aircraft apron areas must be provided as required on airfields that companies own or
operate to permit the loading and unloading of passengers and cargo as well as the
servicing of aircraft. Apron areas must be of sufficient size to safely permit the handling
of aircraft at the maximum anticipated traffic density and to accommodate the expected
requirements for transient and longer term parking of aircraft. Consider providing
suitable area(s) that allow for the conduct of safe and efficient de-icing/anti-icing
operations, if required by the location.

Each part of an apron should be constructed to give a pavement load bearing capacity
that is capable of sustaining the effects of loads imposed by the aircraft it is intended
to serve. Consider that some portions of the apron may be subjected to a higher density
of traffic and, as a result of slow moving or stationary aircraft, to higher stresses than
a runway.

Apron marking requirements will be determined primarily by the size of the aircraft being
accommodated and the level of regulatory authority certification that is to apply to the
airfield. However, sufficient guidance markings should be provided to minimize the risk
of an aircraft colliding with an obstacle on the ground, and to facilitate the safe and
efficient movement of persons and equipment around aircraft on the apron areas.

ev idence The aircraft operator’s Safety Management System manual should detail the
requirement for the assessment and management of operational risks that
form an integral part of the planning and execution of any change within
the operation. The aircraft operator should document the requirement and
procedures to be followed for conducting airfield assessments prior to
commencing operations to a new airfield. Such procedures must provide for
the assessment of parking apron areas and their suitability for the intended
operation. Documented records of assessments of airfields and associated
apron areas that have been undertaken should be available for review.

Page 52
7.7: Perimeter Fence
Construct a perimeter fence around all company owned and operated airfields to
prevent access by livestock, other animals and traveling pedestrians.

A perimeter fence or other suitable barrier is intended to prevent:

• Access to the movement area by animals large enough to be a hazard to aircraft; and
• Unauthorized personnel having access to non-public areas of the aerodrome.

The company should appoint a person responsible for the performance of aerodrome
serviceability inspections and reporting functions. The appointed person must ensure
that the aircraft operator is advised of possible or known changes to airfield conditions
that may present a hazard to aircraft operations, including circumstances where the
perimeter fence is not controlling the hazard.

Inspections of aerodrome serviceability must ensure that perimeter fencing and

operational areas of the aerodrome are checked for damage, open gates or signs of
attempted or actual entry by either animals or humans. The company should establish
procedures that are to be followed in such circumstances, including the completion of
a daily checklist, which records any such activity.

The company should document in the airfield operations procedures manual (or
another suitable document), requirements for the conduct of routine inspections
of airfield facilities and the role and responsibilities of persons appointed to fulfil
that function. The company’s documented airfield procedures and requirements
should also provide for timely communication of relevant information to the
aircraft operator.

Page 53
 7.8: Airfield Control
All company owned and operated airfields must have personnel who are
responsible for overseeing and managing the airfield and operating standards.
Responsibilities include having a basic understanding of the local aviation
regulatory system, certification requirements of the airfield and daily airfield
reporting officer duties.

Personnel should be appointed that are responsible for the oversight and management
of the airfield and operating standards of airfield facilities. These functions must be
documented by the company and will include:
• Inspections of aircraft movement areas and checking surface conditions and the
possible presence of foreign objects;
• Inspections of aerodrome markers and markings, lighting, wind direction indicators
and ground signals;
•M
 onitoring obstacles that may infringe the take-off, approach and transitional
surfaces;
• Inspections to determine if any birds or animals are near the aircraft movement
areas;
• Inspections of measures, such as perimeter fencing, that are in place to control the
inadvertent entry of persons or animals into the movement area; and
•M
 anagement of airfield works to ensure the safety of aircraft operations and
aerodrome personnel.

Documented procedures for conducting daily airfield serviceability inspections prior to

the first aircraft movement, after significant wind or rain storms, or when specifically
requested by the aircraft operator are required. The use of checklists is encouraged and
a written record of the completed inspection and any defects discovered is required.

A person appointed to carry out aerodrome serviceability inspections must be trained to

apply all of the documented requirements.

The aircraft operator must be advised of possible or known changes to airfield conditions
which may present a hazard to aircraft operations.

The company should document in the airfield operations procedures manual (or
another suitable document), requirements for the oversight and management of
the airfield including the role and responsibilities of persons appointed to fulfil that
function. The company’s procedures must also mandate timely communication of
relevant operational information to aircraft operator.

Page 54
8.0: Collision in Air

An aircraft and object collide in air resulting in an accident

The threat of collision in the air most commonly refers to another aircraft however it also
includes birds. The significance to resource sector aviation operations, particularly during
development and construction phases, is illustrated by multiple aircraft from different
aircraft operators all utilizing the one airstrip and quite often in uncontrolled airspace.
Appropriate controls must be in place and adhered to for the risk to be well controlled.

8.1: Cruising Altitudes

Comply with the ICAO cruising altitudes for both VFR and IFR flight unless
circumstances, such as weather, require non-standard procedures. Where known
bird migratory routes are identified, make practical attempts to plan cruise
altitudes above 3000 feet above ground level.

The aircraft operator’s SOPs should require flights to be conducted, unless otherwise
assigned a different altitude or flight level by an by the appropriate ATC authority, at
an altitude or flight level appropriate to the track being flown as specified in the tables
of cruising levels provided in Appendix 3 of ICAO Annex 2 – Rules of the Air.

Adherence to the specified tables of cruising levels in accordance with the direction of
flight improves separation from conflicting traffic during cruising flight and reduces the
risk of collision.

While the risk of in-flight collision with birds cannot be eliminated, it is recommended
that strategies be considered by flight crew to minimize exposure to this threat when
operating in areas of known migratory routes. Statistics reveal that the risk of birdstrike
significantly reduces when aircraft are operated at altitudes above 3,000 feet above
ground level.

ev idence The aircraft operator should document a cruise policy that requires flights
to be conducted at an altitude or flight level appropriate to the track being
flown as specified in the tables of cruising levels provided in Appendix 3
of ICAO Annex 2 – Rules of the Air (unless otherwise assigned by the
appropriate ATC authority).
Where applicable, the aircraft operator’s policies should also promote
avoidance of areas of known or expected significant bird activity (if possible).
Where aircraft are required to be operated through or over these areas,
cruising flight at altitudes above 3,000 feet above ground level are to be
recommended where practicable.

Page 55
 8.2: Radar Controlled Airspace
The Pilot-in-Command must consider the use of Air Traffic Controlled or Monitored
airspace when determining cruising altitudes utilized during flight.

Maximizing the extent to which aircraft are operated in controlled airspace optimizes the
safety benefits provided by radar-controlled traffic separation.

ev idence The aircraft operator’s SOPs should outline the requirement for flight crew
to consider operating aircraft at an altitude or flight level applicable to the
track that will ensure that the flight is operated in radar controlled airspace.

8.3: Airfield Bird Control

Conduct active bird control at all company owned and operated airfields when
required and record the presence of birds periodically. Where possible, birds must
be dispersed or removed in accordance with local wildlife regulations. Seeding
grass, open waste disposal and water ponds must be restricted to remove
attractions for birds.

Where bird activity exists, aircraft operators must minimize the risk of bird strike
during all operations.

Individual airfields attract birds for a variety of reasons resulting in differing bird control
challenges at every location. Variables such as migratory routes, seasonal changes,
bird species, local feeding influences, availability of water, freshly cut grass and close
proximity of refuse sites will all play a part in the presence of bird life. The availability
of nesting habitats provided by hangars compounds the problem.

Airfield bird control programs require consideration of the following controls:

•A
 irfield habitat management: Management of grass and surface water (including
transient accumulations), exclusion of roosting opportunities in buildings and trees
within the airport perimeter;
•A
 irfield locality habitat review: An assessment of bird attractants or related
bird activity within the ICAO defined 13km bird circle around the airfield, paying
particular attention to sites that have the potential to directly affect the operational
safety of aircraft such as in the approach and departure corridors; and
•A
 ctive on-airfield control systems: Bird activity monitoring and/or implementation
of active bird deterrence methods.

The key to any successful airfield bird control program is habitat control which involves
making the airfield less attractive to birds. This requires an understanding of why a
particular species of bird may be present in the area and around the aerodrome.

In those cases where the problem is significant, specialist wildlife and bird control advice
should be sought by the company.

The company should ensure that all reports of birdstrikes are relayed back to airfield
management from the aircraft operator. Where applicable, a bird hazard management
plan should be documented as part of the airfield management documentation.

ev idence The aircraft operator should document the requirement to inform airfield
management and the relevant owner, of the details of any bird hazards that
Page 56 are known to be present and any procedures that are to be applied as part of
the bird hazard management plan.
8.4: Traffic Collision Avoidance System (TCAS)
Aircraft capable of being flown at night, under the IFR and on long-term contract FLT 1.11.02
must be fitted with a TCAS. The aircraft operator must have a procedure describing FLT 2.03.14
the action to be taken for TCAS alerts. MNT 3.01.01
While ATC procedures and the ‘see and avoid concept’ will continue to be the primary
means of ensuring aircraft separation, the provision of TCAS (also known as Airborne
Collision Avoidance System or ACAS) is a significant control to prevent airborne collision.
This is particularly true in degraded visual environments of night and instrument
conditions.

For the control to be effective, flight crew must respond to the TCAS in a timely and
predictable manner compatible with the system design. Correct response is dependent
on the correct application of the aircraft operator’s SOPs and the effectiveness of initial
and recurrent training in TCAS procedures.

ev idence The aircraft operator must develop clear procedures for the use of TCAS
equipment and the specific check and training requirements applicable to
the equipment used. The documented procedures must complement the
information provided in the aircraft AFM, POH and OEM instructions.
The check and training program must cover elements required by the
responsible regulatory authority or as recommended by ICAO.
Pilot training records must confirm that requirements of the training
program applicable to the use of TCAS have been appropriately applied in
the initial and recurrent training of Pilots and the ongoing evaluation of
Pilot competency.

8.5: High Intensity Strobe Lights

Aircraft on long-term contract operating in airspace without radar coverage and MNT 3.01.03
where the potential for conflicting traffic is assessed as being high, must have high
intensity strobe or pulse lights fitted. Potential conflicting activities include low
level VFR flights and high density operations in uncontrolled airspace.

Regardless of the type of aircraft flown or the classification of airspace being operated
in, it is the responsibility of all flight crew to avoid in-flight collisions with other aircraft
through visual contact. Although a simple premise, the ‘see and avoid’ concept is the
last line of defence.

The provision of high intensity strobe or pulse lights on aircraft reduces the risks of
in-flight collision by making an aircraft a positive visual target to other flight crew at
earlier stages of a potential conflict. As an added control to the final defence, this is
particularly true when an aircraft is being observed against terrain, a dark sky or in
conditions of low light.

ev idence The aircraft operator must document a procedure for the use of aircraft
lighting and where applicable, this procedure must be reflected in the flight
check system for each aircraft type. Aircraft fitted with conforming light
systems should be regularly checked for correct functioning of the lights.

Page 57
 9.0: Structural or Mechanical Failure

Structural or mechanical failure of the aircraft results in loss of control

and an accident
Certification of aircraft and their component parts by aviation regulators ensures that
commercial and general aviation aircraft meet the highest safety standards, from the
time of their initial design to retirement from service. The certification process ensures
that the particular design of an aircraft, engine, or other component has demonstrated
compliance with current, applicable regulations and successful completion for an aircraft
design results in a Type Certificate being issued.

During the type certification process, the aircraft manufacturer will develop the
maintenance program that applies to that aircraft type to support and ensure the
continuing airworthiness of the aircraft design.

Once the aircraft has entered into service, it is subject to operational wear and tear
that may cause performance degradations or lead to structural or mechanical failure.
The approved maintenance program must be followed to ensure the continuing
airworthiness of the aircraft and to maintain their aircraft’s airworthiness certificate.

9.1: Single-engine Aircraft

Single-engine aircraft must only be used for passenger flights in a non-hostile
environment under day visual conditions.

All single-engine aircraft used for passenger carrying operations must have
turbine engines.

The greater reliability of turbine engines over reciprocating engines is well documented
and results in less risk of experiencing an engine failure when operating turbine powered
aircraft.

A single-engine aircraft having experienced an engine failure will require a forced

landing area within its immediate vicinity. If this occurs over hostile terrain, the safety,
recovery or survivability of the occupants will not be assured.

Use of turbine powered, single-engine aircraft is considered acceptable for passenger

carrying operations during day visual conditions over non-hostile environments.

Page 58
9.2: Multi-engine Aircraft
Multi-engine aircraft must be capable of sustaining a 1% net climb gradient until
reaching the lowest safe altitude, or a point 500 feet above the terrain in the area
of operations, with One Engine Inoperative (OEI). Multi-engine aircraft must be
used if:
• Operating in a hostile environment;
• Any portion of the flight will be in instrument (non-visual) or night conditions;
and
• Operating on extended over water flights.

Engine reliability continues to increase with advances in material and design technology.
However, engines will continue to fail, albeit at an increasingly lower frequency and
therefore use of multi-engine aircraft will provide a level of redundancy if an engine fails.

What is not often realized is that some multi-engine aircraft when operating at (or
near) their performance limits will not be able to maintain higher altitudes with a failed
engine. In this situation, the aircraft is permitted to conduct a ‘drift down’ descent.
Conversely, if an engine fails below lowest safe altitude, the aircraft must have OEI
performance to climb to the lowest safe altitude or a point 500 feet above terrain in the
area of operations using a net 1% gradient. The aircraft operator is required to limit the
payload so that terrain clearance can be assured in the event of engine failure.

The company must be prepared to accept that not all passenger seats can be
utilized to achieve the full One Engine Inoperative (OEI) accountability that
Control 9.2 requires. This is particularly true when operating multi-engine
helicopters at high temperatures and high density altitudes as found throughout
the resource sector.

ev idence The aircraft operator must ensure that it provides companies with any
payload restrictions that are required to enable continuation of flight with
One Engine Inoperative (OEI) and sustain a 1% net climb gradient to the
lowest safe altitude or a point 500 feet above the terrain in the area of
operations:
• When operating over hostile environments; and/or
• At night or in instrument (non-visual) conditions; or
• When operating extended overwater flights.

Page 59
 9.3: Supply of Spares
Approved maintenance organizations must have a list of approved suppliers
MNT 1.03.05
that are included in a Quality Assurance Program to ensure that parts received
MNT 1.05.01
conform to FAA-approved (or equivalent) design data and are in a condition for
MNT 1.05.02
safe operation.
MNT 1.05.04
MNT 1.05.05 For an aircraft to maintain the standard set by the initial certification, a critical control
MNT 2.03.01 is to ensure that all spare parts used in the continued airworthiness of the aircraft are
MNT 2.03.03 traceable, approved and manufactured to the same standard as those components
MNT 2.03.04 originally fitted to the aircraft.
MNT 2.03.05
MNT 2.03.06 Aircraft spare parts must be genuine, procured from an approved supplier, traceable to the
MNT 2.03.07 original manufacturer and stored in an enclosed area free of dust, moisture or any other
MNT 2.03.08 agent that may compromise integrity and serviceability. Items in the stores area must be
MNT 2.03.09 listed on an inventory and must be fully tagged with any expiry dates clearly noted.
MNT 2.03.10 There must be clear segregation of aircraft serviceable and non-serviceable parts.

Approved maintenance organizations must have quality assurance procedures to ensure

that all parts and components to be used in aircraft maintenance are purchased through
a recognized source and are accompanied by supporting documentation or engineering
substantiation.

The aircraft operator must have a quality assurance process that verifies that the
approved maintenance organization is providing an appropriate level of quality and
reliability. This will require the maintenance organization to be included in the aircraft
operator’s audit schedule, unless an equivalent process is in place to guarantee the level
of service provided (such as third party audit or applicable industry body certification).

Possible forms of oversight are presented below as examples of the methods available:
•A
 ppointment of a Director Maintenance/Responsible Person: Oversees maintenance
activities of the AMO on behalf of the AOC holder to ensure maintenance is
conducted in accordance with the AOC Maintenance Control Manual or equivalent;
• S econd party audit: The aircraft operator undertakes an audit of the service
providers before or during the contract time using audit checklists to examine the
contractor against defined criteria or standards;
• T hird party audit: The aircraft operator engages a third-party to carry out an
independent audit of the contractor using audit checklists to examine the contractor
against defined criteria or standards;
• S urvey: The approved maintenance organization completes a survey before or during
the contract period to provide information on their internal methods of delivering a
satisfactory product or service to the aircraft operator; and
• S elf-audit: The approved maintenance organization conducts a self-audit (scope of
which is agreed with the aircraft operator) before or during the contract period to
examine the method of delivering satisfactory service to the operator.

This level of oversight is applicable regardless of whether the maintenance is provided

in-house or contracted to a third-party maintenance organization. It is the responsibility
of the aircraft operator to provide the necessary assurance that the maintenance
provider is completing all tasks to satisfy both the regulatory airworthiness requirements
and the operator’s quality and safety requirements. The aircraft operator must clearly
define, document and demonstrate how this interface is being managed.
Page 60
 ev idence The aircraft operator or its approved maintenance organization(s) must
have a documented quality assurance surveillance program that verifies
that approved parts suppliers hold current FAA-approval(s) (or equivalent)
of their design data, meet industry quality and safety standards and are
stored appropriately.
Details of the surveillance program must be published and records of
surveillance activity must be available for review.
The aircraft operator or its approved maintenance organization(s) must
have a process for tracking all parts held in its stores facility to verify their
source and serviceability status.

9.4: Hangar Facilities

Hangar facilities that are suitable for the activities being performed must be MNT 1.03.02
accessible for aircraft operating on all long-term contracts. Long-term field MNT 1.03.06
operations, particularly in high rainfall, arctic or desert environments, must have MNT 1.03.08
sheltered arrangements for scheduled and non-scheduled field aircraft servicing.

Permanent hangars must be fitted with fire extinguishers and fire alarms which
are regularly tested in accordance with fire regulations. Records of such tests
must be made available upon request.

The aircraft operator in consultation with the company must ensure that aircraft fixed
base locations have access to suitable hangars. Protection of the aircraft or helicopter
from the elements will substantially increase the life of certain components and will
allow maintenance personnel to focus their attention on maintenance tasks without
being distracted by poor weather, fading light, strong winds, high rainfall, snow, etc.

Approvals granted to aircraft maintenance organizations will commonly reflect the

locations at which maintenance activities can be undertaken and where compliance
to the regulatory standards set by the responsible regulatory authority has been
demonstrated.

Consider the provision of suitable facilities for the conduct of foreseeable maintenance
activities at locations that are subject to long-term (greater than six months) or frequent
use. Where permanent facilities are in use, they should be equipped with fire alarms, fire
extinguishers, lighting, ventilation systems, eyewash facilities, appropriate spare parts
storage, flammable stores and have a form of tool control and calibration register.

For all helicopter operations, consider the provision of overhead lifting equipment that
can handle transmission and engine change requirements if necessary.

For all other locations, procedures must be in place to assess the suitability of facilities
and address the facility needs for undertaking any non-scheduled maintenance activities
that may arise.

Companies should engage with aircraft operators pre-mobilization to discuss

provision of suitable hangars supporting their contracted activities. This becomes
particularly important in long-term field environment where portable hangars can
be easily mobilized to provide adequate control effectiveness.

Page 61
 ev idence Certificates of approval issued to approved maintenance organizations
should document the locations at which specified maintenance activities
can be routinely undertaken.
The aircraft operator or its appointed maintenance organization(s) should
have documented procedures that address the suitability of facilities at
any location at which non-scheduled maintenance activities may need to
be performed.
Facilities should be regularly inspected to ensure that all required
equipment is in installed and serviceable.

9.5: Helicopter Vibration Monitoring

MNT 2.08.03 Helicopters on long-term contract must have a plan endorsed by a Competent
MNT 3.01.01 Aviation Specialist to fit a Health Usage Monitoring System (HUMS) or airframe and
engine Vibration Monitoring System (VMS), where systems have been developed
and approved for the helicopter type. The aircraft operator must follow procedures
to routinely download and analize data.

HUMS and VMS are used as post-flight diagnostic tools, where the data is collected and
recorded from sensors and accelerometers for routine analysis. This analysis is aimed
at providing early detection of potential component failure – particularly within the
helicopter transmission.

ev idence Where an aircraft operator has either HUMS or VMS in use, the System of
Maintenance should address procedures for routine data download and
analysis of the data.
Personnel training and HUMS Go/No-Go criteria should also be addressed
by the aircraft operator.

9.6: Engine Trend Monitoring

FLT 1.13.18 All single-engine turbine aircraft on long-term contract must have a plan endorsed
MNT 2.08.01 by a Competent Aviation Specialist to fit an automatic electronic engine trend
MNT 2.08.02 monitoring system when available for the aircraft type. The aircraft operator must
follow procedures to routinely download and analize engine trend data.

Engine Condition Trend Monitoring (ECTM) provides early detection of poor engine
performance through trend analysis. Early intervention to any powerplant issues and
subsequent rectification is a critical control to prevent engine failure. This is particularly
relevant when associated with passenger carrying operations in single-engine aircraft.

The ability of ECTM to provide meaningful information relies on consistent and reliable
data. This is best achieved through use of automatic data acquisition systems.

Page 62
 ev idence When ECTM is used, the aircraft operator should document the system
that ensures engine condition trend monitoring is effectively carried out
through:
• Articulating relevant personnel training and qualification
requirements;
• Stipulating ECTM data is accessed at specified intervals;
• Stipulating ECTM data is only interpreted by an appropriately trained
person;
• Ensuring all ECTM procedures meet OEM and regulatory requirements;
and
• Outlining actions to be taken in response to detection of adverse
trend data.
Associated records such as trend data print-outs/graphs and staff training
records must confirm that requirements of the ECTM program are being
appropriately carried out.

9.7: Minimum Equipment List (MEL)

Aircraft operators must develop a MEL for all aircraft on long-term contracts. FLT 1.01.04
All equipment installed on an aircraft must be operational, unless it is operated in FLT 1.02.12
accordance with an approved MEL or approved by the appropriate civil aviation FLT 2.03.13
authority under an established program for deferred defects. MNT 1.04.08
MNT 2.05.02
Most aircraft are designed and certified with an amount of redundancy in their systems
such that the minimum required airworthiness standards are exceeded by a substantial
margin. Not all instruments, systems and equipment on-board an aircraft are required
for safe operation of the aircraft all of the time. For example, instrument lighting is not
required for operations in day visual conditions and heating systems may be inoperable
in hot environments.

The MEL is a document which provides a regulatory approved framework allowing

the aircraft operator’s personnel to determine what items of equipment under what
conditions are allowed to be inoperative at the time of dispatch for the intended flight.
An approved MEL consists of an approved list of the specific inoperative equipment for
a particular make and model of aircraft by serial and registration mark.

The MEL will define any operational or maintenance procedures and/or limitations
that may be required to be applied prior to dispatch and/or during subsequent flight
to maintain safe operations. The key to using the MEL is to understand that varying
time limits exists for how long an aircraft may be operated between the deferral of
an inoperative item and its repair. The aircraft operator should always ensure that the
continued operation of an aircraft with inoperative equipment is minimized.

It is essential that training in the applicability and use of the MEL and associated
documentation should be provided to both the aircraft operator’s flight crew and the
maintenance personnel.

Page 63
 ev idence Where required, the aircraft operator must have approved MELs for the
relevant aircraft. The aircraft operator’s MEL should be consistent with the
Master MEL and approved by the responsible regulatory authority.
The Operations and Maintenance Control Manuals should detail MEL
training requirements for all flight crew and technical personnel who have
the operational expectation to utilize an MEL. Training records should be
available as supporting evidence.

9.8: Aural Cabin Pressure Warning System

MNT 3.01.04 Where approved for the aircraft type and permitted by the responsible regulatory
authority, all pressurized aircraft must be equipped with an aural cabin pressure
warning system in addition to any visual cabin pressure warning system.

One of the common findings from a number of incidents where a depressurization event
occurred in the cabin of a pressurized aircraft is that the flight crew were unaware of
the onset of the event, particularly in cases where a slow ascent of the cabin altitude
occurred. While most States require the fitment of a cabin altitude alerting system in
their aircraft certification standards, often in smaller pressurized aircraft, this warning
system is restricted to a visual indication only. With a reduction in peripheral vision being
one of the first physiological responses to a hypoxia event, the operation of a purely
visual alerting system means that flight crew may not necessarily notice the alert at all.
The addition of an aural alerting system to operate in tandem with the visual alerting
system provides an additional layer of defence and an increased probability of
a depressurization event being detected.

Courtesy: Cobham

Page 64
10.0: Weather

Weather conditions force an aircraft to deviate from its original flight

path causing an accident
Weather is a key consideration in the planning and execution of all flight operations.
Every weather assessment made by flight crew must be protected from external
pressures intended on influencing their decision to commence or continue a flight (this
includes the client). The resource sector has experienced many fatal accidents associated
with aircraft continuing into deteriorating weather conditions for the category of flight
undertaken. Independent weather assessment and decision-making is an area that only
flight crew can make in the safe continuation of flight.
The supporting framework to resource sector aviation operations must include ensuring
flight crew have access to appropriate weather information for pre-flight planning,
en route and destination planning purposes. In the first instance it will be the aircraft
operator’s responsibility to provide access to this information. However in some remote
areas, the company may need to make internet and satellite telephone capabilities
available to crew members so that they can obtain the necessary information.
Weather analysis, interpretation and decision-making is an important skill-set for any
crew. The aircraft operator must provide all training, tools and procedures necessary for
the crew to perform their duties within the safe operating parameters of the aircraft and
their own abilities.

10.1: Adverse Weather Policy

An Adverse Weather Policy must be developed by the company in conjunction with
the aircraft operator when weather conditions exist that are suitable for flying,
but not suitable for normal operations. Situations can include: excessive wind over
helidecks prohibiting personnel movement to and from the helicopter, excessive
sea state preventing an effective offshore search and rescue capability, or
man-made smoke haze degrading visual conditions in a jungle environment.
The Adverse Weather Policy must outline clearly under what conditions flying
operations should be restricted or temporarily halted.
The purpose of an Adverse Weather Policy is to formalize an agreement between the
aircraft operator and the company as to when weather conditions are such that aircraft
operations are stopped, or are continued albeit with an increased level of approval
authority.
Typically this policy is only required when the deteriorating weather conditions can have
an impact on non-aviation safety issues. Examples include:
• Excessively high wind speeds for personnel movement on helidecks;
• Sea-state conditions that would prevent any search and rescue; and
• Excessive temperature extremes for arriving or departing passengers.
Normally put in place for offshore operations, an Adverse Weather Policy can have an
impact for onshore desert and arctic operations. In all cases the policy should provide
clear guidance on the conditions jointly agreed between the aircraft operator and the
company under which flying operations must be restricted or temporarily halted.
The requirement for an Adverse Weather Policy will be identified during the
pre‑mobilization start-up operational risk-assessment involving the aircraft Page 65
operator and company representatives.
 10.2: Thunderstorm Avoidance
FLT 1.10.01 Aircraft operators must outline thunderstorm avoidance techniques in the
Operations Manual.

Thunderstorms have the ability to impact on all aviation operations, both fixed and
rotary wing aircraft, and the threat must be understood by all flight crew.

The aircraft operator must document all techniques relevant to the aircraft type operated
that are related to navigating around thunderstorms and avoiding the worst of the
conditions that are associated with these systems.

Information will include:

•A
 voidance techniques applicable to operations with or without serviceable weather
radar equipment;
•M
 ost likely location of severe turbulence around the thunderstorm and the
separation standards to be applied to avoid this;
• Precautions to be taken when overflying small but building storms;
• The minimum height at which to fly over a mature storm when clear of cloud; and
• T he minimum lateral separation to be applied when avoiding upwind and downwind
sides of storm cells both above and below the freezing level.

ev idence The aircraft operator must ensure that information contained in the
Operations Manual provides crews with adequate guidance on the
techniques to use to avoid severe weather associated with thunderstorms.

Page 66
10.3: Weather Radar
All aircraft contracted to be able to operate under IFR or at night must be fitted FLT 1.10.2
with a serviceable weather radar. If the weather radar becomes unserviceable, MNT 3.01.01
the aircraft may be flown in Visual Meteorological Conditions (VMC) only. The
aircraft must not be flown in Instrument Meteorological Conditions (IMC), or at
night unless the weather forecasts indicate there is no likelihood of thunderstorms,
lightning, turbulence or icing.

Weather radars fitted to aircraft are designed for the active detection of adverse weather
conditions and allow flight crew to determine appropriate course changes to avoid the
adverse weather.

Despite airborne weather radars being fitted to aircraft, incursions into very active cells
still occur. It is important that aircraft operators provide adequate training to cover
weather radar capabilities, limitations, operating procedures and interpretation to
ensure the crew understands the system.

ev idence The aircraft operator must provide SOPs, consistent with the information
provided in the aircraft and/or radar manufacturer’s AFM/POH, that specify
procedures for use and management of the weather radar.
The provisions relevant to weather radar systems in the aircraft operator’s
MEL or OM should specify a requirement for the system to be serviceable
for night or IFR flights, unless operations can be conducted on routes
where weather forecasts indicate there is no likelihood of significant
convective cloud thunderstorms, lightning, turbulence or icing.
Syllabuses for training relating to weather radar capabilities, limitations,
operating procedures and interpretation should be published. Training
records must confirm that training requirements have been applied in the
training of staff.

Page 67
 10.4: Wind Shear Training
FLT 2.03.15 Flight crew operating aeroplanes on long-term contract must have ongoing training
addressing the identification and recovery measures associated during microburst
and wind shear phenomenon.

The aircraft operator should have in place information, guidance and procedures
regarding the recognition, avoidance and recovery from wind shear and microburst
conditions. Specific training and checking requirements should also be developed and
implemented to ensure flight crew develop and maintain the:
• Knowledge needed to identify the actual or potential presence of wind shear; and
•C
 ompetencies required to successfully perform wind shear escape procedures when
wind shear is being encountered.

The documented procedures must, where required, expand on and be consistent with
information and procedures provided by the aircraft manufacturer regarding recovery
from wind shear encounter that may be contained in the aircraft approved flight manual
or Pilot operating handbook.

Where available, check and training of flight crew on wind shear recovery procedures
should be conducted in an approved flight simulator using wind shear profiles recorded
during actual wind shear encounters.

FSF ALAR Briefing Note 5.4 – Wind Shear ([Link]

[Link])

ev idence The aircraft operator must document a clear policy regarding the
recognition, avoidance and recovery from wind shear and microburst
conditions. Documented procedures must be consistent with information
and procedures provided by the aircraft manufacturer in the aircraft
approved AFM or POH.
Pilot training records should confirm that requirements of the training
program applicable to wind shear identification and recovery have been
appropriately applied in the initial and recurrent training of Pilots and the
ongoing evaluation of Pilot competency.
Aircraft operators are encouraged to develop and implement a policy
for mandatory, internal reporting of occurrences involving approach
destabilization and the associated go-around as would be experienced
with wind shear encounters. Tracking of such reports by the aircraft
operator’s SMS will assist with the identification of specific risks that
may exist.

Page 68
10.5: VFR Minimum Requirements
Aircraft operating under VFR must be flown in accordance with the minimum FLT 1.03.05
local regulatory requirements for flight under the VFR for departure, enroute and
destination legs. Local Standard Operating Procedures must be developed for areas
such as mountainous jungle operations, where rapidly changing VFR conditions can
be common.

Each aircraft operator should establish weather minimums, which will meet or exceed
the minimums prescribed by the responsible regulatory authority for VFR flight.

If the local conditions are dynamic and constantly changing, there may be a requirement
for a conservative approach of increasing the weather minimums depending on the
experience and skill level of the flight crew. Examples of these areas are the high
density-altitude mountainous jungle environments as experienced in PNG, South
American Andes operations, parts of South East Asia and Africa.

As an alternative or in addition to publishing defined weather minimums, an aircraft

operator may elect to adopt a process based on a risk assessment methodology as
promoted in some ADM programs.

([Link]
Risk%20Assessment%[Link])

During the start-up operational risk assessment prior to supporting resource sector
activities, the aircraft operator must review the VFR weather minimum criteria for
the area of operations.

ev idence The aircraft operator must document a clear policy regarding the minimum
weather conditions that apply to a VFR flight, particularly where local
conditions are dynamic and constantly changing due to local topography
or other conditions.

10.6: Cold Weather Training

Crew who operate aircraft in a cold weather environment (ground snow and
FLT 2.03.16
ice) must undergo annual training prior to the onset of the winter season that
addresses:
• Pre-take-off inspections;
• Anti-icing and de-icing including use of holdover time tables;
• In-flight icing and associated hazards;
• Cold weather operational take-off, approach and landing; and
• Runway visibility, contamination and performance considerations.

Free online courses addressing the above include NASA aircraft on-line icing
courses ([Link]

The hazards associated with frost, snow, ice and freezing rain must be understood
by all flight crew and be constantly assessed throughout the flight.

Page 69
 Where aircraft are operated in a cold weather environment, the aircraft operator
must have in place procedures that address ground and flight icing conditions. Initial
and annual refresher training for all flight crew and relevant ground handling and
engineering staff addressing cold weather operations is required for those areas
impacted by these hazards.

Winter operations training packages should be periodically reviewed by aircraft operators

to incorporate the latest relevant information associated with the threats and hazards
associated with cold weather operations.

Training programs for cold weather operations, including review of recent industry
incidents associated with icing, are typically scheduled for all relevant personnel prior
to the onset of the winter season.

ev idence Policies and procedures for de-icing and anti-icing of aircraft on the ground
and other activities associated with cold weather operations should be
published in the Operations Manual where applicable. The syllabus for
initial training and processes for conducting periodic training and ongoing
evaluation of relevant staff should also be documented.
Associated training records should confirm that these training requirements
have been applied in the induction training of new staff and are repeated
annually prior to the onset of winter in the area of operation.
Page 70
11.0: Medical Evacuation

In addition to the Controls and Defences detailed in this Standard, the

following requirements apply to Medical Evacuation (Medevac) flights
A medical evacuation by air (medevac) is the emergency evacuation of a sick or injured
person to a location where suitable medical facilities and care are available. In the
resource sector this typically occurs from mine sites, offshore facilities, exploration
camps and remote areas to pre-determined locations.

The medical condition of a patient and the level of en route care that may be
administered by medical personnel could have a bearing on the capability of aircraft
type to be used. Use of specifically equipped aircraft may be required when requiring
life-support systems, oxygen, defibrillators and multiple stretcher configurations.

Resource sector personnel involved in the medevac call-out and approval process need
to remain aware that the decisions by flight crew involving safe flight operations must
remain independent to the medical urgency of the evacuation underway.

Medical evacuation (medevac) occasionally requires the use of aircraft within a

timescale where achieving prior approval of an aircraft operator may not be in
the best interests of the affected personnel. However, there is a balance to be
struck between responding to an emergency and the additional risks of using
sub‑standard aircraft operators which might put the aircraft (and all passengers)
at risk.

In an emergency, all reasonable effort must be made to obtain input from the
designated aviation specialist prior to management decision in using a non-
compliant aircraft operator. The associated risk assessment must consider
comparative risks to personnel health or safety from using a non-compliant aircraft
operator or delaying the process until an approved operator can be on-scene.

11.1: Securing of Medical Equipment

The aircraft operator must have a procedure that outlines the methodology FLT 4.01.01
associated with securing medical equipment in aircraft.

The aircraft operator must ensure that any medical equipment loaded onto an aircraft is
appropriately fitted and secured for all phases of flight including take-off and landing.
This should include secure storage locations within the cabin of the aircraft to enable
medical stores to be accessible in-flight. Equipment such as oxygen bottles, stretchers
and associated life support systems if carried must have a load plan addressing correct
fitment and securing methods.

ev idence The aircraft operator must provide documented procedures to be followed

during medevac flights that will ensure all equipment is adequately fitted
and secured during flight. Where the aircraft operator provides specific
storage locations and/or equipment, the Operations Manual must provide
instructions to ensure correct usage.

Page 71
 11.2: Weight and Balance
The aircraft operator must ensure that the weight and balance calculations
FLT 4.01.02
accurately account for stretcher carrying operations.

In addition to clear loading instructions regarding the correct fitment and restraint
of stretchers within the aircraft discussed in 11.1, the aircraft operator must have
load information available for flight crew to accurately complete weight and balance
calculations in the medevac configuration.

ev idence The aircraft operator’s Operations Manual must contain procedures to be

used to determine the aircraft weight and balance for each medevac flight
where stretchers and ancillary equipment are carried.

11.3: Medical Transfers

FLT 4.01.04 The aircraft operator must have a procedure for operating aircraft at Sea Level
cabin pressure for medical transfers, when required.

Certain medical conditions will require that the patient is maintained at, or as near as
possible to, a sea level atmospheric pressure. Accordingly, aircraft used for the medical
transfer of patients who are subject to these conditions should be equipped with a
passenger cabin that can be adequately pressurized and maintain a sea level cabin
environment throughout the flight.

For aircraft such as helicopters that do not have a pressurized cabin, operation at low
altitudes may be the only option to deal with the medical emergency being experienced.

ev idence The aircraft operator’s Operations Manual must contain documented policies
and procedures regarding medevac operations where the patient’s medical
condition requires the pressure of the aircraft cabin to be maintained at that
equivalent to sea level.

11.4: Communications
FLT 4.01.03 The aircraft operator must have the capability (such as headsets) to allow
communications between the medical team and the pilots for each aircraft
type considered.

Medevac operations can involve periods of high workload for both the flight crew
operating the flight and the medical personnel providing the in-flight care of a patient.
This can be particularly common where the medical transfer of a critical care patient is
being conducted in adverse weather conditions. In these situations it can be vital for
both the safety of the flight and the patient being transferred, that all personnel can
engage in immediate and unrestricted communication. To facilitate this, aircraft used in
medevac operations should be equipped with an effective intercommunication system
between the medical team and flight crew.

ev idence The aircraft operator’s Operations Manual must outline provision and use
of aircraft intercommunication systems for the medical team and flight
crew. The Operations Manual should also provide guidance on when ‘sterile
Page 72
cockpit’ procedures should be applied.
11.5: Risk Assessment
The aircraft operator must have a risk assessment process so that the urgency of ORG 3.04.06
medical evacuation is separated from the safety-of-flight decision-making process.

The assessment of risks for medevac flights is a complex process given the competing
priorities: safe conduct of the flight versus expedient retrieval involving a potentially life
threatening situation. The safe conduct of the flight must always take priority.

A review of industry fatal accidents in the medical evacuation role presents numerous
accidents that resulted from the conduct or continuation of flight operations past
safe operating parameters due to a fixation on patient well-being. When resulting
in fatalities, the incidents often involved the loss of more than just the patient being
retrieved.

A fundamental foundation to a safe and successful medevac activity (as opposed

to patient outcome), is having a risk assessment process that enables flight go or
no-go decisions to be made independent of the ensuing medical emergency. The
company should recognize and support this process.

ev idence The aircraft operator must document a policy regarding the risk assessment
process that applies to decisions that have a bearing on the overall safety
of a flight operation. Such policies and procedures are to address the initial
decision to undertake a flight and the in-flight decision processes that
determine whether a flight is continued as planned or diverted.
Aircraft operator records should confirm that the documented policies,
processes and procedures associated with the Operator’s Safety
Management System are being complied with and that the required risk
assessments have been completed.

11.6: Equipment Documentation

The aircraft operator must have appropriate documentation, such as Supplemental
MNT 5.01.01
Type Certificates (STC), for all medical equipment attached to the aircraft.

All aircraft modifications that provide for attachment of medical equipment to the
aircraft must be carried out in accordance with all applicable airworthiness requirements
of the responsible regulatory authority.

ev idence All aircraft modifications that provide for attachment of medical equipment
to the aircraft are to be appropriately documented with drawings, data
and specifications and be subject to a Supplemental Type Certificate (STC)
or equivalent.
The Operations Manual must contain descriptions of the equipment fitted
and the manner in which modifications to fit medical equipment may affect
the normal and emergency operation of the aircraft and its systems. The
equipment should be installed in the aircraft as per the specifications.

Page 73
 11.7: Equipment Inspection Schedule
All medical equipment (including oxygen cylinders) that are capable
MNT 5.01.02
of being attached to the aircraft must be on an inspection schedule to
determine serviceability.

The aircraft operator’s System of Maintenance for an aircraft used in medevac operations
must include details of the inspection schedule applicable for all medical equipment
fitted to the aircraft and held by the operator to ensure its ongoing serviceability.
The inspection schedule should reflect any requirements or recommendations of the
equipment manufacturer or any conditions that may be applicable to the STC (or
equivalent) that address fitment of equipment to the aircraft.

ev idence The aircraft operator’s System of Maintenance (or equivalent) for an aircraft
that is used in medevac operations includes details of the inspection
schedule that applies to all medical equipment fitted to the aircraft to
ensure its ongoing serviceability.
Aircraft maintenance records must confirm that documented requirements
and procedures contained in the aircraft System of Maintenance (or
equivalent) are being followed.

11.8: Provision of Oxygen

The aircraft operator must have a procedure that ensures any oxygen cylinders
MNT 5.01.03
are filled to manufacturer specifications. Where oxygen cylinders are permanently
MNT 5.01.04
fitted to stretcher systems they must undergo regular hydrostatic testing in
accordance with manufacturer specifications.

A necessary component of any aircraft used for the conduct of medevac flights is the
provision of oxygen for patient use during flight. The provision of oxygen for medical
use should be independent of that required to be carried for operational purposes.

ev idence Where aircraft to be used in medevac operations are permanently fitted

with a medical oxygen supply source the Operator’s Operations Manual
must contain descriptions of the equipment fitted and procedures that
ensure oxygen cylinders are filled to and in accordance with manufacturer
specifications.
Where portable oxygen equipment is to be used, the aircraft operator’s
procedures should contain requirements to ensure that oxygen cylinders are
filled to manufacturer specifications and are safe for carriage on the aircraft.
The oxygen equipment must be fitted to the aircraft as per the
manufacturer’s data or the applicable engineering approval.

Page 74
11.9: Flight Crew Qualifications, Experience and Recency
All requirements of Appendix 1 of the BAR Standard are to be met.
FLT 2.01.01
The aircraft operator must ensure that all flight crew assigned to medevac flights have a
current licence and meet both the minimum qualification and experience requirements
defined by the responsible regulatory authority and as specified in Appendix 1 of the
BAR Standard.

ev idence The aircraft operator must maintain records of flight crew qualifications and
experience. There must be a documented control mechanism in place to
ensure that when crew are assigned to flights, crew pairings meet the task
requirements.
Flight crew files and rostering records must confirm that minimum
experience requirements are being met and crew allocations are appropriate
to meet the task requirements.

Page 75
 12.0: Aircraft Accident

Mitigating defences in the event of an aircraft accident

All aviation operations must be conducted in a manner that manages and mitigates
the known or identifiable risks involved to ensure that the residual risk is as low as
reasonably practicable.

If a critical control failure results in an event occurring, the BAR Standard identifies
defence controls to mitigate the impact of the incident.

The defences identified in this section are recognized as the minimum expectation
and companies, through risk assessment conducted jointly with their contracted
service providers, are encouraged to provide additional mitigation as warranted
by localized conditions.

12.1: Aircraft Certification Standards

Aircraft designed to the latest certification standards have increased
crashworthiness and survivability characteristics when compared to those aircraft
certified to older standards. Consider the certification standard when selecting
aircraft for all long-term contracts.

Over time, the emphasis on aircraft certification standards has increased. From being
initially focused on the airworthiness aspects of the aircraft design such as structural
strength and handling qualities, the overall crashworthiness of a design has been given
greater importance and emphasis in certification requirements.

The certification approach to crashworthiness principally involves ensuring that:

• Aircraft occupants are provided protection from the crash impact;
• The possibility and severity of a potential post-impact fire is minimized; and
• Evacuation of occupants from the aircraft cabin can occur as quickly as possible.

Periodic upgrading of regulatory certification standards has led to developments that

enhance the effectiveness of each of these factors.

Prior to any contract renewal or tender process, companies should consult with
aviation specialists to determine the availability and practicality of contracting
aircraft to the latest certification standards.

12.2: Emergency Response Plan

ORG 3.11.01 All aircraft operations (including company owned or operated airports) must
ORG 3.11.02 have an Emergency Response Plan (ERP) commensurate with the activity
ORG 3.11.03 undertaken that covers: documented land-before-last-light limitations, exposure
ORG 3.11.04 considerations, local Search and Rescue (SAR) capabilities, and hazards associated
ORG 3.11.05 with the surrounding environment.
ORG 3.11.06
The ERP must be exercised annually for all long-term operations and include a
ORG 3.11.07
bridging document detailing lines of communications between the company
ORG 3.11.08
and aircraft operator.
ORG 3.11.14

Page 76
 Aviation accidents/significant incidents are rare events and despite the importance
of implementing immediate and positive action, evidence shows that very few
organizations are prepared when such an event occurs. Initiation of timely and
appropriate action is extremely critical in situations where delays or the implementation
of incorrect actions may affect the chances of someone’s survival.

People who have been involved in the immediate response to an aircraft accident
will readily agree that during the first few minutes (and maybe hours) events can be
confusing and chaotic. How an organization performs in the aftermath of an accident
or other emergency can depend on how well it handles the immediate response during
that time immediately following a major safety event.

Successful response to an emergency begins with effective planning. Both the company
and aircraft operator should develop documented ERP detailing what should be done
after an accident and who is responsible for completion of each action. The ERP provides
the basis for adopting a systematic approach to managing the organization’s affairs and
operations following a significant and unplanned event and should be practiced and
reviewed regularly.

ev idence The aircraft operator must document an ERP to provide instructions and
guidance on the duties and obligations of personnel following an accident
or significant incident.
The company must document an ERP for each airfield they operate.
An airfield ERP must be appropriate to the aircraft operations and other
activities conducted at that location and should provide for the coordination
of actions to be taken in an emergency at the airfield or in its vicinity.
An ERP appropriate to the size, nature and complexity of the operations
being undertaken should be documented and available.
The ERP should adequately detail and provide for:
• A responsible and qualified person to lead the emergency response;
• The duties and responsibilities of key personnel in an emergency;
• Contact details for all relevant organizations and individuals including
local search and rescue (SAR) capabilities;
• Effective communication between the aircraft operator, company and
SAR resources;
• A process for periodically checking and updating emergency contact
lists; and
• Conducting periodic, scheduled emergency response drills, exercises
and/or tests (if the aircraft operator conducts offshore operations, it
should ensure emergency response drills include worst-case scenarios
involving considerations such as last-light, significant weather and the
time taken to search for missing aircraft).
The documented ERPs for both the company and aircraft operator should
provide guidance to both organizations in pre-planning for emergencies,
as well as detailing the protocols that will ensure appropriate coordination
between the company and aircraft operator and other affected agencies.

Page 77
 12.3: Emergency Locator Transmitter

MNT 3.03.01 An Emergency Locator Transmitter (ELT) meeting the requirements of Technical
MNT 3.03.02 Standard Order (TSO) 126 (406MHz) or equivalent must be fitted to all contracted
aircraft. The responsible party noted on ELT registration as the primary contact
must be detailed in the aircraft operator’s Emergency Response Plan.

ELTs are distress beacons that are activated following an aircraft accident either
automatically using a crash sensitive switch that detects excessive force of deceleration
or manually by a Pilot or other person.

Each ELT has a discrete digital code that, when activated, transmits a position and
identification signal that is detected by satellites within the international Cospas-Sarsat
system. This information is then transmitted back down to ground stations where the
code is read, enabling the source of the transmission to be identified (aircraft registration
and location) and the owner of the aircraft determined. ELT registrations are required
to be updated to reflect the current operator and contact details. The aircraft operator’s
point of contact (normally a key member of the Emergency Response Team) should be
registered with the applicable authority.

ev idence Documented procedures for the activation, serviceability testing and

maintenance of ELTs should be provided in the Aircraft Flight Manual (AFM),
Operator Manual (OM) and Maintenance Manual (MM) as required and
applicable.
Each ELT should be registered with the appropriate authority and the details
recorded in the ERP. The aircraft operator should maintain ELT registration
documents that ensure the operator contact details and applicable aircraft
identification are current and correct.
Aircraft maintenance records must detail the completion of serviceability
testing and maintenance procedures of ELTs, and show that devices are
being maintained in accordance with the approved System of Maintenance.

12.4: Satellite Flight Following

FLT 1.12.01 All aircraft on long-term contract operating in hostile environments must be
FLT 2.07.02 fitted with satellite flight following systems. The system must be monitored by
designated flight following personnel with no secondary duties who are able to
initiate the Emergency Response Plan if required. The system components must
include: a cockpit distress function with corresponding audio at the base station,
cockpit indication of functionality, satellite telephone with text back-up, internet-
based monitoring system and the ability to adjust reporting intervals based
on altitude.

Satellite flight following equipment provides three dimensional coordinates of

appropriately equipped aircraft to authorized ground stations via an associated satellite
network. Aircraft GPS position information is transmitted to the satellite network
and relayed to ground stations where this information is represented real-time on an
internet-based graphical map showing the speed, altitude, direction and position of
aircraft.

Satellite flight following significantly reduces the time required to locate an aircraft and
Page 78 respond to an emergency situation, in turn maximizing the chances of survival where
aircraft operations are conducted in hostile environments.
 ev idence Where an aircraft operator has aircraft fitted with a satellite flight following
system, the operator should provide documented procedures that allow for
the system to be monitored by designated flight following personnel, with
no secondary duties, who if required, are authorized and able to initiate the
Emergency Response Plan.
The Operator’s Operations Manual (or equivalent document) should contain
job descriptions that include the roles and responsibilities for these positions
and the training requirements for persons appointed to these positions. It
should also contain the process by which their ongoing competencies are
assured. The documented training requirements should adequately address
management of the flight following function in both normal and emergency
operations. Where personnel associated with flight following are to utilize
radio communications equipment that transmits over the aeronautical radio
communication network, documented requirements must detail the training
and licensing that applies.

12.5: Flight Following

Where flights are conducted outside of controlled airspace or are not subject to
FLT 1.12.02
any form of position reporting, the aircraft operator in conjunction with the
FLT 2.07.01
company must establish a system of flight following appropriate for the operation.
FLT 2.07.02
An Emergency Response Plan must be able to be activated at all times in the event
of distress or loss of communications.

Flight following is normally a service provided by national air traffic control services
which focuses on providing information about passing and surrounding traffic. An added
benefit of the services provided is the monitoring of an aircraft’s normal operations and
the ability to initiate response actions in emergencies.

In situations where flights are authorized to be conducted without flight following being
provided by ATC, the aircraft operator must ensure that a system is in place for all such
flights. The system must closely monitor the safety and progress of flights and initiate
the ERP in the event of an emergency situation developing or communications being lost.

ev idence Where an aircraft operator conducts flights outside of controlled airspace or

in locations where they are not subject to any form of position reporting, the
operator should provide documented procedures that allow for such flights
to be monitored by designated flight following personnel. Persons who are
responsible for flight following will be tasked with no secondary duties and
must be authorized, if required, to initiate the ERP and notify relevant SAR
authorities.
The aircraft operator’s OM (or equivalent document) should contain job
descriptions that detail the roles and responsibilities for these positions
along and the training requirements for persons appointed to these
positions. It should also contain the process by which their ongoing
competencies are assured. Where personnel associated with flight following
are to utilize radio communications equipment that transmits over the
aeronautical radio communication network, documented requirements must
detail the training and licensing that applies.
More on next page... Page 79
 ev idence The aircraft operator’s documented SOPs provides for equipment
requirements and procedures that will ensure that constant radio contact
can be maintained and that routine position and altitude reporting occurs at
intervals of 15 minutes, but not exceeding 30 minutes.

12.6: Survival Kit

FLT 1.09.06 Survival kits appropriate for the geographical location and climatic conditions
MNT 3.03.03 (offshore, jungle, arctic, desert, etc.) must be carried for those operations where
search and rescue response times would require use of the equipment.

The ability for a search and rescue response will vary, and will always be affected by
variables such as weather, availability of resources and time of day. Because of this,
every flight should be considered as a potential survival situation requiring survival
equipment appropriate to the location and climate.

ev idence The aircraft operator will have a documented procedure specifying what
requirements are to be contained in a survival kit if requested by the BMO
or when required by the responsible regulatory authority. Where a survival
kit is not routinely carried on an aircraft, the aircraft operator should have
a documented procedure to be followed in circumstances where the fitment
of survival kits is required. The condition and content of a survival kit should
either form part of the System of Maintenance or be tracked and inspected
using an equivalent process.
The content of the survival kit should be described in the aircraft operator’s
documentation and must be applicable to both the seating capacity of the
aircraft to which it is fitted and the geographic and/or hostile environment
where operations are to be undertaken.

12.7: Flight Crew PLB

FLT 5.04.03 Flight crew operating helicopters in hostile environments must carry a voice-
capable GPS Personal Locator Beacon (PLB) and any other necessary survival
equipment on their person.

The requirement for helicopter flight crew to wear a voice-capable PLB as mitigation
addresses several lessons-learned from resource sector accidents:
• Back-up source of location in the event the ELT does not activate;
• T he ability to communicate to searching aircraft to assist in locating survivors. This
is particularly important in a jungle environment where the overhead canopy may
prevent the searching aircraft from visually identifying the survivors below; and
• T he ability to communicate the condition of the survivors to the searching aircraft,
and whether there is a requirement to winch the critically injured out prior to last
light before a ground party can reach the accident scene.

The requirement to have the PLB carried in a survival vest on the flight crew is to
maximize the opportunity of its use in any accident scenario. Where the aircraft operator
elects to carry voice-capable PLBs in the cockpit, but not as part of a flight crew survival
vest, a risk-based discussion demonstrating equivalent level of capability should be
Page 80
documented and available to the company.
 ev idence Where an aircraft operator undertakes helicopter operations in hostile
environments directions should be provided in the Operations Manual
regarding the requirement for flight crew to carry a voice-capable, GPS PLB
on their person.
Maintenance records should detail the completion of serviceability testing
and maintenance procedures of beacons fitted to survival vests.
The aircraft operator should maintain registration documents for each
beacon that appropriate identification and contact details are up to date
and correct.

12.8: First-Aid Kit

At least one first-aid kit must be carried on all aircraft. MNT 3.03.04

The aircraft operator must ensure that a minimum of one first-aid kit is carried on
all aircraft that are used to support resource sector operations. Where not defined
by regulatory requirements, the contents of first-aid kit(s) should be determined by
specialist medical advice and applicable for the type of activities being undertaken.

The first-aid kit(s) should be stored in an appropriate location in the aircraft to ensure
ready access by the crew in-flight. The location should be near an exit as it may need
to be used outside the aircraft in an emergency situation.

ev idence The aircraft operator’s documented procedures must require a minimum of

one first-aid kit to be carried as aircraft equipment on all aircraft that are
used to support company operations. The aircraft operator should document
a defined location where the first-aid kit(s) is retained on each aircraft
and where the contents of a first-aid kit are not defined by regulatory
requirements, a full description of the required contents of the kit carried on
each aircraft.
The aircraft operator should have a documented procedure in place to
provide for the contents of first-aid kit(s) to be routinely inspected and
ensure the required contents remain intact, serviceable and within the
expiry date.

Page 81
Crew change – Western Australia
 12.9: Passenger Dress Requirements
Passengers must wear clothing and footwear appropriate to the environment
being flown over regardless of the flight duration.

With the exception of hard hats with chin straps, the wearing of caps and
other headgear of any type in and around helicopters is prohibited. This does
not apply to flight crew members inside the cockpit, conducting an aircraft
inspection with rotors stopped or during rotors running with the cap secured
by communication headset.

The ability to adjust the environmental conditions of a passenger cabin of an aircraft

ensures that, despite the severity of ambient conditions outside the aircraft, passenger
comfort can be maintained. While this level of comfort can enable passengers
to wear clothing that is comfortable for the flight, what a passenger wears on a
flight can significantly affect their chances of surviving an emergency where the
aircraft may be required to make an emergency landing at a location other than the
intended destination.

To maximize the chances of surviving an emergency landing, passengers must be

required to wear clothing and footwear appropriate to the environment being flown over,
based on a risk assessment. Transport Category aeroplanes are generally excluded from
this requirement, however at the discretion of the company these aircraft may continue
to be included in the requirement.

Guidance associated with helicopter and commuter category aircraft typically includes:
• Long sleeve shirts and long trousers;
• Closed-toe shoes with skid-resistant soles;
• Avoid any synthetics that melt when exposed to intense heat; and
• Use of layers in cold, hostile environments.

The company should develop guidance on passenger dress requirements, in

consultation with the aircraft operator. The dress requirements established by
the company should also be the minimum acceptable standard that applies to
the aircraft operator’s personnel.

12.10: Cockpit Voice Recorder (CVR)/Flight Data Recorder (FDR)

MNT 3.01.01 Aircraft on long-term contract and certificated with a seating capacity of more
MNT 3.04.01 than nine passenger seats must be fitted with a Cockpit Voice Recorder and Flight
Data Recorder when available for the aircraft type.

A cockpit voice recorder (CVR) records the audio environment in the flight deck of
an aircraft and a Flight Data Recorder (FDR) monitors and records specific aircraft
performance parameters. While outputs from the FDR may be used to support a Flight
Data Monitoring (FDM) – or Flight Data Analysis Program (FDAP) – the prime purpose of
both the CVR and FDR is to collect and record data associated with the conduct of flights
for the purpose of investigation of accidents and incidents. Typically, data is recorded
onto a device designed to survive an accident and both devices are mounted in the tail
section of an aircraft to maximize the likelihood of their survival in a crash.

Outputs from both the CVR and FDR are protected by regulations that ensure any data
retrieved is for accident investigation purposes with the aim of improving safety.
Page 82
 ev idence Where fitted, relevant information regarding the CVR and FDR (as applicable)
should be contained in the aircraft operator’s documentation as follows:
• The AFM and SOPs should articulate required operating procedures;
• The MM should detail the required maintenance procedures; and
• The MEL should specify the conditions under which flight can be
undertaken with either piece of equipment unserviceable.
Maintenance records must confirm that required and approved maintenance
intervals and procedures are being followed.

12.11: Upper Torso Restraint

All helicopter and single-engine aeroplane crew and passenger seats must be
fitted with upper torso restraints and be worn at all times. FLT 1.13.11
The use of seat belt extensions that interfere with the full effectiveness of the FLT 6.08.01
upper torso restraint is prohibited. MNT 3.01.01
MNT 3.01.02
Survivability of an aircraft accident is influenced by the following aspects:
• A liveable structure during the impact sequence;
• The impact forces transmitted to the occupant;
• Occupant retention;
• Post-crash fire; and
• Evacuation.

The US National Transport Safety Board (NTSB) conducted a study regarding general
aviation crashworthiness where analysis of data from 1,982 accidents revealed that
shoulder harnesses:
• May have prevented 20 percent of the fatalities; and
• Significantly reduced 88 percent of the original serious injuries found in the
survivable accident data (refer to NTSB/SR-85/01 for details). Page 83
 All aircraft must be equipped with restraint systems that meet the minimum certification
standards for the specific aircraft. The restraint system for each forward-facing or
aft-facing seat in all helicopter and single-engine aeroplanes must consist of a safety
belt, and a shoulder harness (three-point or four-point system), with a metal-to-metal
buckle or latching mechanism. This provides the occupant adequate protection when
exposed to dynamic loads to be expected in normal and emergency situations.

For helicopter operations, each front seat occupant is to be provided with, as a

minimum, a restraint system that is fitted with a double-strap shoulder harness
(four-point system). Aircraft may be fitted with a five-point system that provides an
additional crotch strap.

Aircraft occupants, including flight crew, must wear lap belts and shoulder harnesses
during all phases of flight unless the Pilot-in-Command directs otherwise in consideration
of a valid operational or safety reason.

ev idence The aircraft operator’s SOPs should provide directions regarding the
mandatory wearing of seat belt/upper torso restraint (UTR) systems and the
circumstances under which restraints for the upper torso can be removed.
The aircraft operator should also provide a recommendation or policy that
passengers should ensure their restraints remain fastened at all times
while seated. Correct donning, wearing and removal of the UTR must be
addressed in any pre-flight safety briefing.
The certification standard of the UTR must be demonstrated either through
OEM data or Supplemental Type Certificate.

12.12: Limitations in Sideways Seating

FLT 1.09.09 Sidewards facing seats must be avoided during take-off and landing, unless
FLT 1.13.11 regulatory approved shoulder restraints are used and passengers are briefed on
the importance of their use accordingly.

Research shows that the human body has less resistance to accelerative forces in the
lateral than in the longitudinal direction. In an accident scenario occupants of sideways
facing seats are more exposed to injury than occupants of forward or aft facing seats.

Tests conducted using sideways facing seats have shown that occupants of these seats
cannot be adequately restrained during an accident sequence using the conventional lap
seat belt. Unless a regulatory approved harness is fitted, the seats are not to be used
during take-off and landing.

ev idence Where an aircraft operator is using aircraft fitted with sideways facing seats,
the aircraft operator must document a requirement that these seats are not
to be utilized during take-off and landing unless the aircraft is fitted with an
approved sideways facing occupant restraint system. The aircraft operator
must provide adequate guidance for crew to enable them to ensure that
the approved harness is fitted correctly for passengers seated in sideways
facing seats.

Page 84
12.13: Crash Boxes
Company owned and operated landing sites supporting long-term operations must
have a crash box accessible to personnel at the airfield or primary helipad.

Contents of the crash box must be tailored to the environment and aircraft type and at a
minimum should include:
• Rescue axe;
• Bolt cutters;
• Crowbar;
• Grab hook;
• Hacksaw and six spare blades;
• Fire resistant blanket;
• Fire resistant gloves; and
• Adjustable wrench.

The equipment listed will be of use in the immediate response to an accident where
rescue of personnel is required. The crash box must be readily accessible, located in
the vicinity of the airfield or helideck and must be ready for use at all times.

The company should ensure a suitably provisioned crash box is made available at
an airfield or helipad. The relevant documentation must include a list of contents,
the location of the crash box and the inspection schedule.

12.14: Rescue Firefighting

All company owned or operated helipads or airfields must have a means of
providing a fire response capability commensurate with the potential risk.
Personnel must receive training on the equipment provided.

A rescue firefighting capability will focus on providing a first response capability for
the rapid evacuation of an aircraft’s crew and passengers in an emergency scenario.
This capability will vary depending on the size of the aircraft being operated.

Key principles for the provision of a rescue firefighting capability supporting resource
sector operations include:
• The level of firefighting capability should be risk-assessed as being appropriate for
the activity undertaken;
• Personnel tasked with a firefighting role should receive appropriate initial and
recurrent training on the likely scenarios and the equipment being used;
Page 85
• Annual exercises using the firefighting resources should be conducted;
 • As close to contract start as possible, flight crew supporting long-term contracted
operations should provide an overview of the contracted aircraft basic fire
considerations to supporting rescue personnel. This should include location of
aircraft fuel tanks, emergency exits and their external operation, wheel brake areas
likely to get hot in high speed aborts and basic aircraft fuel isolation; and
• A discussion on the various types of fire suppression, including compressed air foam
systems, and their relative merits should be conducted with firefighting specialists
when required.

Where the airfield or helideck has a firefighting capability established, the

capability should be supported by a risk assessment confirming acceptance of
the capability.

Firefighting equipment should be subject to regular inspection, tagging and testing

and personnel should have initial and recurrent training appropriate to the tasks
assigned to them.

Page 86
12.15: Insurance
It is the responsibility of the contracting company to determine the level of ORG 2.02.01
insurance required in accordance with company risk management standards.

Such insurance must not be cancelled or changed materially during the course
of the contract without at least 30 days written notice to the company.

The company must be named as additional insured under the contract.

Insurance forms a necessary part of any recovery from an incident or accident.

The company should ensure sufficient insurance cover is in place and that aircraft
operators have the necessary insurance in place as part of their AOC and approval
to operate.

The company should ensure that the aircraft operator’s insurance meets their
expectations and that the company is nominated as additional insured.

ev idence The aircraft operator should have statements of insurance cover that state
the level of insurance carried for both hull loss events and per passenger.

Page 87
 1 HELICOPTER EXTERNAL LOAD OPERATIONS

Helicopters provide the operational flexibility to move cargo and/

or to perform low-level geophysical operations, using an external
underslung load.
The critical controls essential for the conduct of minimum-risk external load
operations are:
• Certified, in-date and serviceable external load equipment and rigging;
• Qualified, experienced, current and competent riggers and flight personnel;
• Serviceable helicopter suitable for the load/environment;
• Fuel management;
• Suitable pick-up and set-down areas;
• Aircraft performance margins, particularly when pick-up and set down are at
different density altitudes; and
• Standard Normal and Emergency Operating Procedures with accompanying training.

Expanding on and implementing these critical controls allows risk mitigation

measures to be applied to any external load activity, whether onshore or offshore.
Control self-assessments using the following standards helps to determine the localized
controls required and provides the company with an assessment of their effectiveness.

Page 88
13.0: Fuel Exhaustion – External Load Operations

The helicopter operates on minimum fuel load to maximize lifting

capability and runs out of fuel and suffers an engine flame-out resulting
in an accident
To improve lifting capability, the helicopter’s operating weight is minimized in order
to maximize the external load weight that can be carried. After the helicopter’s
operating weight has been reduced to a minimum by the removal of non-mission critical
equipment, the only variable remaining to reduce the operating weight is fuel.

External load activities are conducted in Visual Flight Rule (VFR) conditions and are
generally:
• Within relatively short distances of the operating base; and
• In close proximity to accessible refueling points.

These factors support minimizing the reserve fuel carried to maximize the external load
weight capability. However, operating with reduced fuel margins can only be conducted
when all fuel management controls are risk-assessed and complied with as briefed and
planned.

13.1: Fuel Reserve

Maintain a minimum fuel reserve of 20 minutes at all times.
FLT 5.03.08
Unless more reserve fuel is required to be carried following the completion of a risk
assessment or by the applicable regulatory authority, flight crew engaged in external
load operations must ensure that a minimum “fixed” reserve of fuel is carried to allow
for 20 minutes of flight.

Carriage of this reserve fuel is intended to provide for unplanned maneuvering in the
vicinity of the landing site. This reserve fuel would normally be retained in the helicopter
upon final landing.

For those helicopter types where illumination of the low fuel light requires the helicopter
to land immediately or “as soon as practicable”, a specific risk assessment should
be conducted to determine the minimum fuel requirements that satisfy the intent of
this control.

ev idence Aircraft operators must include these requirements in their Operations

Manual or SOPs as a responsibility of the Pilot-in-Command. The 20 minute
fuel reserve must be expressed in the same terms as the helicopter fuel
gauges (pounds, kilograms, gallons, liters or percentage).

Page 89
 13.2: Low Level Light

FLT 5.05.02 When available for the aircraft type, a fuel low level warning light must be fitted.

The fuel low level light, when illuminated, provides cautionary advice to the flight crew
that the quantity of fuel on-board has reduced to a low level and action must be taken
to terminate the flight before fuel exhaustion. Flight Manual instructions may differ
between helicopter types, typically requiring the flight crew to “land immediately”,
“land as soon as possible” or “land as soon as practicable”.

Where a Supplement or STC is available, it is preferable to have the fuel low level light
linked to the Master Caution system to increase the alerting level provided to flight crew.

Regardless of the Flight Manual requirements, the flight crew must understand the
actions required of them if the low level light illuminates. This includes having detailed
knowledge of the aircraft fuel system and how much usable fuel remains when the light
illuminates.

When use of the low level fuel light is relied upon, such as external load operations,
regular calibration of the low fuel detection system should occur and be part of the
System of Maintenance of the aircraft.

ev idence Where a fuel low level warning light system has been fitted to a helicopter, it
should be referenced in the AFM (possibly as a Supplement or STC). Aircraft
operators must include these requirements in their Operations Manual or
SOPs as a responsibility of the Pilot-in-Command. The applicable MM and/
or SoM must address the ongoing maintenance and calibration requirements
(minimum annually) applicable to the system installed.

Page 90
14.0: Failure of Lifting Equipment – External Load
Operations

The lifting equipment fails and drops the load resulting in an accident
on the ground
Certified, in-date and serviceable external load equipment is a critical control in any
external load activity. External load equipment includes everything from the belly hook
of the aircraft downwards. This incorporates the line, swivels, shackles, D-rings, straps,
nets, baskets, welded lifting lugs, bags and anything used to secure or support a load.

A disciplined and rigorous assurance process using the following controls will assist in
preventing failure of lifting equipment:
• Certified to manufacturer’s requirements by appropriately qualified personnel, and
within the certification period (in-date);
• Periodic scheduled servicing by appropriately qualified personnel in accordance
with the aircraft operator’s maintenance schedule;
• Each item is stamped and/or “tagged” showing its certified load rating, and its
compliance with certification dates and servicing cycles;
• Assessed as serviceable by maintenance personnel after each use before return
to store;
• Maintained in the aircraft operator’s maintenance system in accordance with the
requirements of aircraft parts;
• Assessed as serviceable before use by ground/flight crew;
• Securing shackle pins (e.g. lock-wire) to prevent accidental load release; and
• Returning the equipment to the aircraft operator immediately after use and
ensuring that it is not used for any other purpose.

14.1: Lifting Equipment

The aircraft operator must ensure the serviceability and certified safe working load MNT 4.02.05
of lifting equipment is adequate for the task and appropriate to the material used
for the line.

Failure of lifting equipment has been a significant cause in the loss of loads in flight.

Certification of the lifting lines by personnel who have been trained in the Original
Equipment Manufacturer’s (OEM’s) requirements is essential. Use of lines not certified
or without appropriate certification documents must not be permitted.

Based on industry standards the ultimate breaking strength of rigging must be five to six
times the safe working load of that rigging. The safe working load limit of the line must
be a minimum of 5:1 and pre-determined as being capable of lifting the planned load
prior to use. Most certified rigging equipment will be provided with a 6:1 ratio.
Work Load Limit charts are available from the lifting equipment OEMs.

Page 91
 ev idence The aircraft operator must retain records reflecting that any lifting
equipment has been certified for use by the equipment manufacturer,
has been tested and released to service by the approved maintenance
organization and has been subject to a manufacturer’s approved
maintenance program.
Associated records must confirm that requirements of the lifting equipment
manufacturer’s approved maintenance program are being appropriately
carried out.

14.2: Servicing Schedule

MNT 4.01.01 Lifting equipment must conform to a servicing schedule that provides all necessary
documentation associated with inspections, certification and serviceability.
Copies of this servicing schedule must be made available to the aircraft operator’s
representatives in the field.

All lifting equipment must be tracked using a documented and auditable servicing
schedule. As with certification requirements of the lifting equipment, the servicing
schedule relies on appropriate tagging of the equipment. Metal tags are the preferred
method as synthetic nylon tags have been known to deteriorate. Most synthetic lines
should not be color coded on the line itself (unless they are provided in a manufacturer’s
color scheme), as long-term degradation of the material in contact with the paint can
occur. Color coding on steel is acceptable.

Lines without any form of identification or tagging must not be used and must be taken
out of service until re-certification can occur.

All re-certification, scheduled servicing and any other checks must be documented by the
aircraft operator on an external load lifting equipment register and the register must be
available for reference by the staff operating in the field.

Where lifting equipment is provided by a third party, for example a contracting “client”,
the aircraft operator must ensure that any lifting equipment provided meets these
maintenance, certification and tagging requirements.

ev idence The aircraft operator must maintain records, or have access to third party
records, showing that all lifting equipment has been certified for use by the
helicopter or equipment manufacturer. The records must also show that
the equipment has been tested and released to service by the approved
maintenance organization and that it has been subject to a manufacturer’s
approved maintenance program.

Page 92
14.3: Visual Inspections
All lifting equipment (cables, lines, straps, baskets, swivels, clevises, etc.) must be MNT 4.01.02
inspected by qualified personnel daily prior to the flight. Any signs of wear, fraying,
corrosion, kinks or deterioration must result in the equipment being withdrawn
from use.

To supplement the certification process, a daily inspection by qualified personnel such

as the Pilot, Load Master or other qualified and trained personnel in accordance with
all OEM requirements will assist in mitigating the risk of equipment failure. Qualified
personnel can include personnel trained by the aircraft operator, external load specialists
or through accepted industry training programs. Early detection of impending equipment
failure will ensure that defective equipment is removed from service and returned for
repair or discarded.

All external load activities, schedules and plans must allow adequate time for the aircraft
operator’s personnel to perform all necessary checks on load equipment prior to the
day’s tasking.

ev idence The aircraft operator must document in their Operations Manual and SOPs
that all lifting equipment is subject to a daily serviceability inspection
by qualified personnel prior to use. Such procedures must clearly state
requirements for the removal of equipment from service if found to be
not in a fully serviceable condition. Associated records must confirm
that requirements for daily inspections of lifting equipment are being
appropriately carried out.

14.4: Shackles
The shackles used to connect the cable to the aircraft must conform to specific MNT 4.02.01
Flight Manual supplements regarding the diameter of the shackle rings and their
use with respective hook types on the aircraft.

Shackles provide a method of attaching load lines to the aircraft and the load line to
the load itself. The shackle, ring or device used to connect the load to the hook must
be compatible with the hook. A review of accidents involving under slung loads reveals
that the use of the incorrect size and shape of the shackle that links the load to the
hook has contributed to a number of dropped loads. An incompatible shackle raises the
potential of:
• Unintended release (dynamic roll-out) where the shackle (or ring) collapses the hook
“keeper”, allowing the load to detach from a closed hook; and
• The load not releasing when intended due to the ring jamming on the hook assembly.

If there is no Flight Manual supplement available, a pre-start operational risk analysis

should be conducted to confirm the correct shackle size is being used.

ev idence The aircraft operator must document procedures that require shackle rings
used in external load operations to meet the design specification of the
equipment fitted to the helicopter and as detailed in the applicable AFM
supplement.

Page 93
 15.0: Inadvertent Load Release – External Load
Operations

The load is inadvertently released in flight, falls to the ground and

causes an accident
A dropped external load poses a serious risk to personnel and ground facilities and
probable destruction of the load. The risk of part of the disconnected load or external
load equipment striking part of the helicopter should not be discounted. Risk mitigation
strategies must consider human failures as well as technical failures as both classes of
failure have been well documented in previous incidents.

15.1: Manual and Electrical Release Mechanisms

MNT 4.02.02 The aircraft must have a serviceable cockpit manual and electric release
mechanism and an external manual release at the hook.

Pilots releasing external loads will normally utilize the cyclic or collective mounted
electrical release switch. However, if an electrical release mechanism fails or if there is
a total electrical failure, the alternate system of the cockpit mounted manual release
system will have to be used by the Pilot. Ground crews also have the capability of
releasing the load from underneath the helicopter using the hook mounted release
mechanism should the need arise.

Both the manual and electrical hook release systems should be checked and functionally
tested before commencing hook operations each day, and each time the hook assembly
is fitted to a helicopter.

ev idence The aircraft operator must document procedures that require all lifting
equipment to be subject to a daily serviceability inspection by qualified
personnel prior to use. Such procedures must contain requirements for
the daily inspection of manual and electrical hook releases to ensure the
serviceability and correct operation of this equipment.
Associated records must confirm that requirements for daily inspection
requirements are being carried out.

Page 94
15.2: Standardized Controls
When practical for aircraft of the same or similar type, the aircraft operator must MNT 4.02.07
standardize electrical load release switches, particularly when located on the cyclic
and collective controls.

Misidentification and selection of a cyclic or collective hook release switch has been a
significant cause of inadvertent load release during external load activities.

Standardization of release switches will play an important role in minimizing the

occurrence of human error. Aircraft operators should standardize the switches in their
aircraft fleet that are to be operated by the same Pilots. At a minimum the same type
and model of aircraft used on the same external load operation must have standardized
switches. However, this philosophy should also extend to all aircraft of the same model
and type, and where practical, to different types of helicopter if the aircraft operator’s
flight crew are operating more than one type.

If standardized switches have not yet been fully implemented, detailed differences
training must be provided to all flight crew until such time as the standardization
can occur.

Where dedicated helicopters are to be used on an external load campaign,

verification and assurance of standardized controls throughout the contracted fleet
should occur prior to contract start.

ev idence Inspection of a representative sample of helicopters in an aircraft operator’s

fleet should confirm that, in accordance with the aircraft operator’s policy
and equipment design requirements, the layout of all external load release
switches is standardized on helicopters of the same or similar type. Where
an electrical load release switch is fitted to a helicopter, it should be
referenced in the AFM (possibly as a supplement or STC).
Differences training must be provided where there is still a non-standard
fitment throughout the aircraft operator’s fleet.

15.3: Guarded Release Switch

When available for the aircraft type, all electrical release switches must be guarded MNT 4.02.03
to prevent inadvertent activation.

One of the design standards for aviation is that a two-stage activation process should
protect critical systems. The two-stage process comes in many forms, and can involve
the use of “gates” or lift-and-throw type switches. The primary design philosophy is to
protect against inadvertent selection by introducing the requirement for the flight crew
to go through two separate and distinct processes before a system can be activated.

To protect against inadvertent activation of the external load release switches, guards
should be fitted to all electrical release switches where possible.

Whenever non-standard conditions within company operations or equipment exist,

appropriate differences training on the equipment type must be developed. The training
must be documented as having been provided to all flight crew involved in the external
load operation.
Page 95
 Where dedicated helicopters must be used on an external load campaign,
verification and assurance that guarded release switches are in place should occur
prior to contract start.

ev idence Inspection of a representative sample of aircraft in an aircraft operator’s

fleet must confirm that, in accordance with the aircraft operator’s policy
and equipment design requirements, each electrical load release switch is
guarded to prevent inadvertent activation. Where an electrical load release
switch is fitted to a helicopter, it should be referenced in the AFM (possibly
as a supplement or STC).

15.4: Load Construction

FLT 5.03.09 The aircraft operator must ensure that all loads are rigged by qualified personnel.

The integrity of an external load can be affected by many factors including the load’s
rigging, shape, size, length and distribution. External loads are subject to a wide variety
of forces in flight and the aerodynamic effects on loads cannot always be anticipated.
Qualified personnel must always be used during the load preparation phase as they will
be best able to anticipate the load construction and restraint requirements.

While the Pilot-in-Command of a helicopter performing an external load operation has

final responsibility for the acceptance of any load to be carried, only personnel who
have been appropriately trained and qualified must be authorized to perform rigging
of the load. Personnel such as qualified Load Masters or aircraft operator’s specialists
must be trained and qualified using recognized industry training programs that utilize
manufacturer standards and rigging procedures.

Electromagnetic or mechanical swivels must be used in conjunction with load equipment

to allow rotational movement of the load and avoiding twisting. In an electromagnetic
swivel, an electric current continuously passes through the rotary connector of the
swivel. All swivels should be certified and appropriately rated for the load carried.

Aircraft operators’ documentation, or third party riggers’ documentation, must include

guidance for rigging of loads carried by various means. This includes loads carried on
pallets within nets, long loads requiring the use of pipe-hooks, use of unequal lines
for slender lengthy loads liable to swing, loads containing flammable liquids or other
hazardous materials, and loads likely to have aerodynamic characteristics.

ev idence The aircraft operator’s Operations Manual must detail the roles and
responsibilities of personnel assigned to construction and rigging of loads
that must be carried in helicopter external load operations. It must also
include the details of the training that must be provided to personnel
appointed to these positions and the process by which their ongoing
competencies are assured.
Associated records must confirm that the requirements have been applied
in the training and qualification of personnel who are allocated duties
associated with construction and rigging of loads that must be carried in
helicopter external load operations.
Approved rigging manuals document correct rigging procedures for various
load types.
Page 96
16.0: In-flight Loss of Control – External Load Operations

Poor manipulative control in-flight results in a loss of control and an

aircraft accident
The safe carriage of an external load requires strict adherence to several controls.
The manipulative handling of the aircraft by the Pilot is as important as having certified,
serviceable equipment supporting a well-constructed load.
The complexity of external load operations is further increased by engines and
transmissions operating close to their limits, Pilots being remotely located from the load
and the lack of normal visual reference available during many operations.
The load itself can create handling issues for Pilots especially if the load swings or
oscillates, or tends to “fly” causing increased Pilot responses that can sometimes
become impossible for the Pilot to manage.
The ability to perform external load work requires specific training by flight crew
to ensure that all the necessary manipulative skills are developed as well as an
understanding of how to deal with unexpected load deviations in flight.

16.1: Pilot Experience

Pilots engaged in external load activities must comply with the following FLT 5.01.01
requirements: FLT 5.01.02
• Successful completion of operator’s external load training program tailored to
vertical reference operations, and the long-line (>50 feet), or the short-line
(<50 feet), whichever is applicable;
• At least 200 hours external load operations, 100 of which must be vertical
referencing (if used in that role); and
• An annual long-line and/or external load base check with designated check and
training personnel.
(See also Common Control 1.2: Flight Crew Qualifications, Experience and Recency.)
The aircraft operator must not assign a Pilot-in-Command as an operating crew member
of a flight engaged in external load operation unless they meet the minimum experience
and recency requirements of either the BAR Standard or the responsible regulatory
authority (whichever is the more stringent).

ev idence The aircraft operator must document in the Operations Manual, minimum
qualification and experience requirements for flight crew engaged in external load
operations that reflect both the minimum standard for the roles as defined in the
BAR Standard and that may be required by the responsible regulatory authority.
Details of the aircraft operator’s training and checking program for external load
training (long line/short line as applicable) must be published in the Operations
Manual and follow established criteria. The program must cover requirements
and procedures for initial training and approval along with the processes for
conducting periodic recurrent training and checking (annual long-line and/or
external load base check).
Associated Pilot training records must confirm that applicable requirements
of the training program have been applied in the training of Pilots engaged in
external load operations and the ongoing annual evaluation of Pilot competency
(long line and/or short line as applicable).
Flight crew files and rostering records must confirm that crew assignments are Page 97
appropriate to meet the task requirements.
 16.2: Pilot Daily Flight Times

FLT 5.02.01 Where the external load moves are more than three per hour, comply with the
FLT 5.01.03 following flight times:

Single-pilot operation Two-pilot operation

3-hour maximum flight time per flying 5-hour maximum flight time per flying
period, followed by a 30-minute rest period, followed by a 60-minute rest
break. Hot refueling does not constitute a break.
rest break.
6-hour maximum flight time per 8-hour maximum flight time per
calendar day. calendar day.

High repetition external load work is considered more fatiguing than normal operations
due to the high levels of concentration required by the flight crew. Limitations imposed
on the flight times, duty periods and rest requirements for flight crew are established to
minimize the effects of fatigue and to ensure that flight crew are performing at adequate
alertness levels to enable safe flight operations.

ev idence Details of the aircraft operator’s Flight and Duty Time management program
should be published in the Operations Manual and where helicopter external
load operations are undertaken, must reflect the limitations detailed in the
BAR Standard (unless the responsible regulatory authority’s requirements
are more stringent).
Associated Flight and Duty Time records must confirm compliance with all
requirements of the Flight and Duty Time limits that are applicable. The
Flight and Duty Time records that are maintained must be consistent with
information provided in other documents such as aircraft flight records.

16.3: Instrument Remote Indicators

For single-pilot operations using vertical referencing techniques, and where the
FLT 5.05.01
aircraft instruments are not in the Pilot’s scan, a remote indicating fire warning
light and torque gauge must be fitted where available for the aircraft type.

Where single-pilot, external load operations involving vertical referencing (long-line)

are to be conducted, instruments and/or indicators that enable the Pilot to monitor
critical aircraft operational limits should be provided in a position that is within the
Pilot’s field of view when observing the load. Provision of a remote First Limit Indicator
(FLI) or remote torque gauge and fire warning lights can considerably reduce risks and
Pilot workload during an operation that is demanding. Audio outputs indicating the
same parameters routed through the Pilot’s headset may be considered as an adequate
alternative.

ev idence Inspection of the aircraft operator’s helicopter fleet should confirm

that remote FLI or fire warning lights and torque gauges that facilitate
monitoring during single-pilot, vertical referencing external load operations
are fitted. Where a remote FLI or fire light and torque gauge are fitted to
a helicopter, it should be referenced in the AFM (possibly as a supplement
Page 98 or STC).
16.4: Standard Operating Procedures
The helicopter operator must have Standard Operating Procedures outlining all
requirements of personnel engaged in the external load activity. The procedures
must be relevant to the local environment and terrain being operated in.

Aircraft operators undertaking external load operations must ensure that training and
checking programs are implemented to provide for initial and recurrent training and
checking of all flight crew and ground personnel assigned external load duties.

The external load operations training and checking program must be documented in the
Operations Manual and follow established training and checking criteria. The aircraft
operator’s training policies and program should be tailored to suit the experience and
aptitude of the individuals being trained as well as the equipment to be used in the
proposed role. The training program must ensure that training objectives are achieved
and that individual competencies and required safety standards are being maintained.

The program must provide initial and recurrent training and checking for specific
personnel that is commensurate with the duties they must perform and should at a
minimum address:
• Equipment used;
• Inspection, overhaul and recertification of all applicable equipment;
• Load construction;
• Ambient conditions of the operating environment and the effect of density altitude;
• Crew duty and responsibilities;
• Communications – normal and abnormal (radio failure);
• Hand signals;
• Flying techniques, including load controllability assessment versus airspeed
(VNE with a load attached); and
• In-flight emergency procedures.

The aircraft operator must not assign a Pilot or ground crew to perform duties associated
with an external load operation unless that person has completed all necessary
requirements of the aircraft operator’s training and checking program and has been
confirmed as being competent to act in the assigned role. Such requirements must be
applied to all applicable personnel irrespective of their employment basis
(e.g. full-time, free-lance, part-time or casual).

ev idence Details of the aircraft operator’s external load training and checking program
must be published in the Operations Manual and follow established training
and checking criteria. The syllabuses and procedures for conducting initial
and periodic external load training and checking must also be documented.
Associated training records must confirm that the documented requirements
have been applied in the training, approval and ongoing evaluation of
competency for personnel assigned to duties associated with external load
operations during both normal and emergency situations.

Page 99
 16.5: External Mirrors
Where available for the helicopter type, external mirrors showing the hook area
MNT 4.02.04
must be fitted to the aircraft. Where fitted, the mirror must not interfere with the
design and operation of the Wire Strike Protection System (WSPS).
The provision of external mirrors enables the flight crew to gain the necessary assurance
that the hook area and line attachment are correctly configured and operating normally.
It provides a final check to the flight crew that the load is securely attached and
electrical connections (if fitted) are correctly made.

ev idence Inspection of the aircraft operator’s helicopter fleet should confirm that
external mirrors that permit viewing of the hook area during external load
operations are fitted in accordance with the aircraft operator’s policy.
Where external mirrors are fitted to a helicopter, they should be referenced
in the AFM (normally as a supplement or STC).

16.6: Load Weight

FLT 5.03.01 All loads must have accurate weights provided to the Pilot before each lift.
FLT 5.03.02 Standard load plans can be used as long as the weights are accurately known
(e.g. compressors, rig break-down, sample bags, etc). A load meter must be fitted
to the aircraft if considered necessary during the pre-start risk assessment.
(See also Control 6.2: Cargo Weight and Loading, Control 6.3: Load and Trim Calculations.)
Control of the weight of external loads is essential for the safe conduct of each
operation. The weight of external loads must be made available to the Pilot-in-Command
before each flight. Care must be taken to ensure that the weight of straps, slings, hooks,
swivels, etc. is included in the total weight to be lifted.
When a load meter is fitted to the aircraft type, it must be positioned such that the load
information is in view of the flight crew whilst maintaining control of the aircraft.

ev idence The aircraft operator’s documented procedures must include the

requirements and processes to determine the weight of the external load to
be lifted for each flight and the procedure to ensure that accurate weight
information is provided to the Pilot before each lift.
Where standard loads are carried, the aircraft operator’s Operations Manual
must specify the circumstances under which standard load information
may be used to ensure that standard load weights are only used when
Page 100 accurately known.
16.7: No Carriage of Passengers
Only personnel who are employed or contracted by the aircraft operator to FLT 5.03.07
accomplish the work activity directly associated with that operation may be
carried on helicopters during external load operations. This includes transit
with an empty line attached.

Passenger carrying activities and external load activities should be treated as two
separate and independent tasks. Only personnel who are essential to the safe conduct
of an operation must be carried on-board the helicopter during external load operations.
If a helicopter has a dual role of carrying passengers and external load activity, normal
fuel reserves (BARS Control 3.5) must be used for all passenger carrying activities.

ev idence The aircraft operator should include a requirement in the Operations Manual
that only personnel who have a role that is directly related to the safe
conduct of an external load operation are carried on helicopters during each
flight, including those where no load is attached to the external line.
Observations of operations where possible, can confirm compliance with the
aircraft operator’s requirements that no passengers must be carried during
external load operations.

Page 101
 17.0: Line Fouling In Transit – External Load Operations

The load becomes detached from the line or the line is flown empty
which, when above a certain speed, causes it to stream up and
rearwards into the tail rotor resulting in an accident
A long-line is any line that is 50 feet or greater in length.

A short-line by definition is less than 50 feet in length, but should also have the added
restriction of not being able to reach the tail rotor of the aircraft type being flown.

Long lines are inherently unstable when flown above certain speeds. Unweighted lines
will always drop vertically down from the hook when the helicopter is hovering and will
begin to trail behind the helicopter as the speed is increased. The angle at which they
trail is proportional to the forward airspeed of the aircraft, as too is the instability of
the line.

The aerodynamics of an unweighted line are unpredictable and there have been many
accidents caused when the long line has streamed to a position where contact with the
tail rotor has occurred with the subsequent loss of control of the helicopter.

17.1: Weighted Lines

FLT 5.03.03 The long-line must be suitably weighted if it is to be flown without a load attached.
FLT 5.03.04 Implement pre take-off checks which are designed to ensure flight crew involved in
repetitive loads are aware of when the line is attached.

The most common risk mitigation strategy to prevent long line streaming into the
tail rotor is to add a minimum weight to a long line, in order to alter the mass and
aerodynamic characteristics.

The short-line should never be able to reach the tail rotor of the helicopter type being
used, and should never be flown without a load attached.

ev idence The aircraft operator should have published in its Operations Manual a
restriction on flying with unladen long lines and publish a minimum mass
that is required to be attached to a long line when the line is flown without
a load attached.
Pre take-off checks must include confirmation of a long line attachment to
the aircraft.
Observation of flight operations where possible can confirm compliance
with the aircraft operator’s procedures and that transit with a long-line
and no load attached is prohibited unless the minimum mandatory weight
is attached.

Page 102
17.2: Never Exceed Speeds (VNE)
All applicable VNE speeds must be briefed and understood by all flight crew prior FLT 5.02.07
to the commencement of operations. If the aircraft Air Speed Indicator (ASI) is
calibrated in different units of measurement than the documented VNE speeds,
a separate risk assessment must be conducted and reviewed with a Competent
Aviation Specialist prior to start.

The maximum airspeed achievable with varied external cargo shapes is limited
by controllability. Care should be taken when carrying external cargo as handling
characteristics may be affected due to size, weight, and shape of cargo load.

The VNE for carriage of external loads set by the manufacturer is usually derived from
the aircraft’s response after releasing a load in-flight due to emergency.

Some loads have a natural tendency to “fly”, such as boats or flat packs that can
act like a wing. In these cases the stated VNE may be too excessive and the Pilot must
reduce the maximum forward airspeed as required. Maximum operational air speed with
external loads is dependent upon the load configuration and sling length and it is the
aircraft operator’s responsibility to establish the maximum operational speed for each
specific configuration.

ev idence The aircraft operator must publish the VNE speeds applicable to all helicopter
types in its inventory capable of conducting external load operations. The
VNE speeds published must comply with manufacturer’s data, extracted
from the AFM. The Operations Manual should also include the process for
determining a safe transit speed during all external load operations. The
process must detail an incremental increase in airspeed based on load
stability and the recovery measures to be used if the load becomes unstable.
Observation of flight operations where possible, can confirm compliance
with the aircraft operator’s published procedures and limitations.

17.3: Maneuver Boundary Envelope

All safe transit speeds, the maximum angle of bank, the maximum allowable FLT 5.02.02
rate of descent and general handling associated with stable load operations FLT 5.02.03
must be briefed and understood by all flight crew prior to the commencement FLT 5.02.04
of operations. FLT 5.02.05

Carrying an external load attached to a helicopter degrades stability and handling

qualities, and reduces the operational flight envelope by comparison to a helicopter
with no load. The safety of an external load operation relies on flight crew having a
full knowledge and understanding of the way in which carriage of an external load
will affect the handling characteristics and limitations of the helicopter.

Page 103
 ev idence The aircraft operator’s SOPs must clearly specify a requirement for all flight
crew to have a full knowledge and understanding of the way in which
carriage of an external load will affect the handling characteristics and
limitations of the helicopter. In multi-crew operations, the aircraft operator’s
documented SOPs should detail how the crew work together, including
specific detail on the conduct and content of pre-flight briefings to ensure
that crew members are aware of, and understand the effect of, an external
load on the helicopter’s operational envelope. For single-pilot operations,
the aircraft operator’s SOPs should provide details of the relevant self-brief
that should be completed by the Pilot prior to commencing a flight. Load
performance in flight should also be addressed during an aircraft operator’s
External Load Training Program.
Observations of flight operation where possible, can confirm the suitability
of the aircraft operator’s procedures and compliance with them.

17.4: Short-Line (<50 feet)

FLT 5.03.05 Transit with a short-line and no load attached is not permitted.

A short-line by definition is less than 50 feet in length, but should also have the added
restriction of not being able to reach the tail rotor of the aircraft type being flown.

Transit with a short line without a load attached must not be conducted. Best practice
is to consider a short line to be part of the load; dropping or picking up the load is
achieved by releasing/attaching the short line to the aircraft cargo hook.

ev idence The aircraft operator must clearly specify a requirement in the Operations
Manual that flight with a short-line and no load attached is prohibited.
Observation of flight operations where possible, can confirm compliance
with the aircraft operator’s procedures and that transit with a short-line and
no load attached is prohibited.

Page 104
18.0: Ground Loss of Control – External Load Operations

A departure from normal operations on the ground results in loss of

control of the load and aircraft and results in an aircraft accident
Helicopter external load operations by necessity are conducted while the helicopter is
running. Risk factors such as noise, downwash, vibration, raised dust/snow/debris and
turn-around time pressures all contribute to the high-risk nature of the activity.
Defences used in this high risk environment include training, qualification, experience
and awareness of all personnel including both ground and flight crew. To ensure the
levels of situational awareness are adequate, a clear understanding of the activity’s
purpose, associated procedures and individual and team accountabilities and
responsibilities must be understood.

18.1: Ground Briefing

The Pilot must ensure all personnel involved in the external load activity are
FLT 5.02.06
briefed prior to the commencement of operations. This brief must include all
emergency scenarios that could involve the ground crew.

The Pilot should ensure a full and comprehensive pre-flight briefing is conducted with all
personnel involved in an external load operation. An integral component of the briefing
should be an assessment of identifiable risks that may be unique to that specific operation.

The briefing should:

• Cover all aircraft emergency scenarios and actions required by Pilots and ground
personnel;
• Include the assigned Load Master, hook-up person and marshaller (if required) and
identification of same vests;
• Identify antennae, skid gear and other fuselage parts that can cause injury to
personnel or damage to the helicopter;
• Discuss load sequencing with the Load Master, Pilot and crew on size, shape and
weight with respect to the fuel burn and turn-around time;
• Reiterate how sling gear can get entangled on skids or other obstacles;
• Discuss potential static discharge and how to avoid it;
• Review wind direction and flight paths;
• Discuss the importance of areas being clear of debris and loose materials that can
blow away, be sucked into rotors or cause injury to personnel;
• Confirm hand signals procedures;
• Confirm radio terminology to be used;
• Emphasize that no crew member should turn their back on the line or the load during
all approach, hook-up and departure operations;
• Emphasize that all crew members should maintain eye contact with the line and/or
load at all times during the final approach, maneuvering, and departure phases of
the operation;
• Make it clear that ground personnel not essential to the hook-up operation must stay
in recognized safe areas when the helicopter is operating;
• Make it clear that the load must be securely attached, and all ground members must
be clear before the signal is given for the Pilot to depart; and
Page 105
• Make it clear that all ground members must wear appropriate PPE.
 ev idence The aircraft operator’s Operations Manual must specify a requirement that
prior to commencing external load operations, the Pilot must conduct a
briefing with all personnel involved with the operation. This briefing should
include all known aircraft emergency scenarios that could involve ground
crew and encourage discussion of identifiable risks associated with the
planned operation.

18.2: Aircraft Ground Control

A Pilot must remain at the controls of an operating helicopter whilst it is under
FLT 5.03.06
power on the ground at all times. The controls must not be left unattended with
the aircraft under power in any circumstances, even to assist in activities such as
hot refueling or load attachment.

(See also Control 7.5: Rotors Running Load/Unload.)

Ground personnel in close proximity to a running helicopter on the ground have a high
risk of being struck by helicopter main or tail rotors. During rotors turning operations,
aircraft operators must minimize the risks to ground personnel by ensuring that a Pilot
remains at the controls at all times. The Pilot must only be engaged in essential cockpit
duties so that they can consequently devote their attention outside the cockpit to
identify external hazards and monitor activities around the aircraft.

ev idence The aircraft operator must document in the Operations Manual the
requirement for a Pilot to remain at the controls of a helicopter that is under
power and with the rotors turning at all times while on the ground.

18.3: Ground Personnel

Ground personnel must wear appropriate Personal Protective Equipment (PPE)
FLT 5.04.04
including hard hats with chin straps, impact resistant goggles, gloves, safety
shoes, high visibility vests and a means of ground-to-air communications with the
flight crew.

Access to, and movements within, a lifting or dropping site should be strictly controlled
and non-essential personnel must not be allowed to work in, or cross, the operating area
when external load operations are taking place. All ground personnel who are required
to perform functions supporting the external load operation must be provided with PPE
to ensure that the risk of sustaining personal injuries during the operation is minimized.
Although not stated in the control, the PPE requirements should include hearing
protection such as helmets with incorporated hearing defenders.

ev idence The aircraft operator must document the PPE requirements that must apply
to ground personnel involved in external load operations. Such requirements
should include hard hats with chin straps, impact resistant goggles, hearing
protection, gloves, safety shoes and a high visibility vest.
Where operations must be conducted in dusty conditions or if the load to be
carried is likely to give rise to significant or harmful dust, ground personnel
Page 106 must be provided with suitable respiratory protection.
19.0: Aircraft Accident – External Load Operations

Mitigating defences in the event of an aircraft accident

Effort should be made to avoid incidents and accidents associated with external load
operations and this includes the requirement to plan for a possible adverse outcome.
The defences in Section 12.0 of the BAR Standard are applicable to external load
operations, as are the additional defences listed below.

19.1: Flight Crew Helmets

Flight crew involved in external load activities must wear serviceable flying FLT 5.04.01
helmets that comply with industry standards.

Aircraft operators should ensure that flight crew involved in external load operations
wear an approved flight helmet with inbuilt communications capability and visor.
The prime purpose of the helmet is to provide impact protection and thereby reduce
the risk of head injury in the event of an accident.

ev idence Where external load operations must be conducted, the aircraft operator
must document a requirement that a serviceable industry standard helmet
must be worn by all flight crew while involved in such operations.
Observations of flight operations where possible, can confirm compliance
with the requirements for serviceable flying helmets to be worn by flight
crew involved in external load operations.

19.2: Flight Following

Positive continuous communication and flight following must be maintained with FLT 1.12.04
the aircraft either by ground support crew or designated flight following personnel.
Operation normal calls must be scheduled at 15 minute intervals unless the
risk-assessment permits an increase to 30 minutes.

(See also Defence 12.5: Flight Following.)

The aircraft operator must ensure that where helicopter external load operations are
being undertaken, continuous communication can be maintained with ground support
personnel or designated flight following personnel. Flight following must be maintained
with the aircraft through provision of scheduled “operations normal” calls that must be
provided at intervals of 15 minutes but no greater than 30 minutes.

The ready availability of satellite flight following should the norm for all operations. In
addition to assisting in locating downed aircraft, it can also provide useful coordination
with multiple aircraft and drop schedules. In an external load environment, one minute
reporting intervals for the satellite flight following is appropriate.

Where satellite flight following is in use (and operational), the frequency of scheduled
operations normal calls should be addressed in the pre-start operational risk assessment.

The aircraft operator must ensure that personnel who are assigned to maintain contact
with aircraft in these operations closely monitor the safety and progress of flights and
are able to initiate the ERP if an emergency situation develops or if communications
are lost. Page 107
 ev idence Where an aircraft operator conducts helicopter external load operations,
the Operations Manual should contain documented procedures that provide
for such flights to be monitored by ground support personnel or designated
flight following personnel.
The aircraft operator’s SOPs include equipment requirements and procedures
that will ensure that constant radio contact can be maintained and that
“operations normal” reporting occurs at intervals of 15 minutes but not
exceeding 30 minutes.
Available records should confirm that a log of required position reports is
maintained as an integral component of the following of a flight’s progress.

Page 108
2 HELICOPTER OFFSHORE OPERATIONS

The controls and defences detailed in this section are in addition to

applicable core requirements documented in Volume 1 of the BARS
Implementation Guidelines.
The controls and defences illustrate the unique operating environment offshore
helicopter operations represent, and why additional measures are required to
minimize risk.

Additional training for key staff can be sought through the two day Flight Safety
Foundation Offshore Aviation Coordinator Course that provides detailed instruction
on the basics of offshore aviation operations and the background to all controls and
defences.

Regardless of global location, an important first step in planning any offshore

helicopter operation is to determine whether the environment is considered “hostile”
or “non-hostile” (See BARS/ICAO definition). An understanding of the operating
environment using this definition will influence the critical controls applicable to an
offshore operation. Other factors unique to offshore operations that will influence both
the company and the aircraft operator’s implemented controls include:
• Specific patterns associated with turbulence and/or heat induced by the offshore
superstructure or gas plumes from turbines and flare stacks;
• Rolling, pitching and heaving helidecks;
• Close proximity of obstacles surrounding the helideck, and below helideck level;
• Degraded visual conditions (including rain, mist and dust storms);
• Pilot techniques associated with changing between instrument and visual
conditions;
• Availability and capability of search and rescue assets;
• Limitations of Night Visual Flight Rules when operating offshore;
• Hazards associated with offshore installations, such as H2S, fire or gas alarms, and
perforating operations; and
• Absence of regulatory guidance in some offshore regions.

Page 109
 20.0: Helicopter to Vessel Interface – Offshore Operations

Helicopter operates to a vessel and crashes on deck

20.1: Helicopter/Ship Operations

All helicopter-to-ship operations must be conducted in accordance with the
standards contained in the International Chamber of Shipping (ICS) Guide to
Helicopter/Ship Operations.

The ICS Guide to Helicopter/Ship Operations provides all interface requirements for ship to
helicopter operations. As the primary reference document it is equally relevant to vessel
owners, aircraft operators and the resource sector. Vessel activities typically include marine
Pilot transfer, tanker support, seismic crew transfer and medical evacuation.

Companies should reference the ICS guide in all contract technical requirements
and at minimum understand what gaps (if any) exist in the ship-to-helicopter
interface as it pertains to the ICS guide. This most likely will be facilitated by
a risk assessment involving representatives from the vessel, aircraft operator
and company.

20.2: Vessel Operations

Floating vessels include Floating Production Storage Offload (FPSO), Mobile Drilling
Unit (MODU), Diving Support Vessels (DSV), Derrick barges and seismic vessels.

Measure the Pitch, Roll and Heave of floating vessels as close to helideck level
and centerline as possible to provide accurate readings that can be communicated
to the helicopter from the vessel, and verified by the crew as being within limits
before landing.

Floating vessels move around a center of gravity due to wind and wave motion. The
subsequent movement of the vessel’s helideck presents greater challenges to flight
crew, particularly during the landing phase. To provide assurance that safe operating
limitations are being maintained, accurate deck movement information must be passed
to the flight crew.

When the helideck is located away from the center of gravity of the vessel (e.g. bow or
stern mounted helidecks), the movement is accentuated. The movement of the helideck
defines safe landing limitations for the helicopter. It is therefore essential that the
motion sensing accelerometers are located as close to the helideck as practicable, or
have undergone software-based processing to provide accurate helideck pitch, roll and
heave (PRH) information.

Communication of the helideck motion must be provided to the flight crew in a

standardized format acceptable to the aircraft operator. If a vessel changes course, PRH
limits are exceeded or any another event likely to influence landing or on-deck operations
occurs, the information must be able to be immediately communicated to the flight crew.

Where required by the OEM, all motion detecting equipment must be calibrated and
certificates of calibration must be made available and verified by the aircraft operator.

The aircraft operator and the vessel must agree on a procedures be followed by vessel
Page 110 personnel around a helicopter which is required to make an emergency departure
because of uncontrolled slippage while on the vessel’s helideck.
 Small vessels may have rapid changes to PRH and therefore only Pilots who have been
formally qualified to do so should undertake operations to them. Operations to small
vessels should only be conducted if the helicopter has out-of-ground-effect (OGE)
power available.
Passengers should not be carried during small vessel operations unless they are
deplaning or emplaning at that vessel.
The aircraft operator and vessel HLO must conduct a safety briefing before passenger
operations begin, to align operating practices for all normal and emergency procedures.
This should include:

Item Briefing Requirement

1 The process for vessel to request normal, freight and medevac flights
2 Limitations of the helicopter provider to make these flights
3 Limitations on night operations, winching, external loads
4 Any other limitations imposed by the company
5 Passenger and cargo manifesting
6 Dangerous goods
7 Radio procedures
8 Clearances for helicopter to land and depart
9 On deck clearances for HLO
10 Helideck net (if applicable)
11 Crane procedures (if applicable)
12 Pitch, roll and heave limits
13 Maximum acceptable wind conditions
14 Weather information to be passed to Pilots
15 Method of classifying wind information, whether relative, magnetic or true
16 Passenger control on deck
17 Passenger baggage management
18 Clear deck policy
19 Drug and alcohol and no-smoking policies for passengers
20 HUET requirements
21 Allowable baggage limits
22 Prohibition on carry-on luggage
23 Emergency procedures with helicopter on deck
24 Firefighting support during helicopter operation
25 Medevac procedures
26 Provision of safety briefing on-board the vessel for departing passengers
27 Management of immersion suits and life jackets
28 SAR capability of the floater to assist in aircraft emergencies
29 Medevac response

ev idence The Operations Manual documents the requirements for flight crew to
obtain information regarding helideck movements prior to landing, what
limits apply to the relevant helicopter type and guidance on the actions to
be implemented when limits are exceeded.
The Operations Manual must document the requirement for a formal briefing
between the vessel HLO and the aircraft operator prior to commencement of
passenger flights.
Aircraft operators must have controls in place for small vessel operations
including the certification of Pilots, the carriage of passengers and power Page 111
requirements.
 20.3: Pitch, Roll and Heave (PRH) Limits for Landing
Aircraft operators must have defined motion limits documented in their Operations
FLT 6.06.07
Manual that detail acceptable limits for landing to, and departure from, vessels.
These limits may be generic to aircraft types (such as OGP guidance), or type specific
(such as HCA Helideck Landing Limits). Regardless of origin, the PRH limits documented
by the aircraft operator must have industry validation or a risk-assessed method,
assessed as being suitable to the aircraft operator.

ev idence The aircraft operator must document in the Operations Manual, specific
operational limitations defined by the maximum allowable helideck pitch,
roll and heave, including heave rate. The source of the limits must be stated.
SOPs covering approach and landing to floating decks should ensure the
crew are provided with the current PRH data.

Page 112
21.0: Night Controlled Flight Into Terrain/Water (CFIT/W)
– Offshore Operations

The helicopter operating at night flies into terrain or the water whilst
still in an airworthy and operational state

21.1: Night Recency

All offshore crews rostered for night support must maintain a recency of three FLT 6.03.01
night deck landings every 90 days.

(See also Common Control 1.2: Flight Crew Qualifications, Experience and Recency.)

Night offshore is a predominantly instrument environment complicated with a

combination of instrument approaches, visual landings or instrument go-arounds and
instrument take-offs. This mix of flight profiles may have to be conducted without
reference to a horizon, ambient starlight, moonlight or surrounding visual cues other
than the illuminated platform. The impact this can have on human sensory responses
is well documented in many night offshore accident studies.

Clear and unambiguous crew coordination in all phases of flight is essential for the safe
conduct of night operations. So too is the maintenance of high levels of instrument
proficiency and manipulative control. To meet the instrument flying proficiency required,
Pilots must pass an annual flight check on, and must retain currency on, general
instrument flight techniques, and on the specific instrument approach procedures
relevant to the onshore and offshore locations.

The final part of the landing sequence must be performed by visual reference augmented
by close scrutiny of cockpit indications. The night take-off is a combination of visual
into instrument flight. Both of these techniques require continual practice. To retain this
level of proficiency, all flight crew rostered on a night schedule must meet a recency
requirement of three night landings and take-offs every 90 days.

In operating environments (such as far northern latitudes) where limited hours of

darkness may make 90-day currency impractical during the summer season, consider
maintaining recency by use of a simulator.

ev idence The aircraft operator must document in the Operations Manual the
requirements for Pilots to be flight checked annually, and to retain recency
in, general instrument flying techniques and relevant instrument approach
techniques in normal and emergency flight conditions.
The aircraft operator must document in the Operations Manual, the
requirement for Pilots to maintain a recency of the landings and take-offs at
night at offshore helidecks in the previous 90 days and the method by which
such recency requirements are tracked.
Paper-based or electronic recency tracking records must confirm that Pilots
are maintaining the required recency for night landings and take-offs at
offshore helidecks and that the rostering system has attended to upcoming
requirements prior to expiry. Flight crew files and rostering records confirm
appropriate implementation.

Page 113
 21.2: Night Offshore Time

FLT 6.03.02 Flight crew must have 25 hours total night offshore time before operating in
command offshore at night.

The demanding nature of night offshore operations requires a level of experience and
familiarity with the operating environment that can only be consolidated through real-
time experience. Recognizing there must be a means by which flight crew can gain this
experience, the onus is placed on the aircraft operator providing assurance that the
Pilot-in-Command has 25 hours night offshore time accrued as co-pilot, under instruction
(dual) or In Command Under Supervision (ICUS).

The aircraft operator should also have a training program for Pilots new to the night
offshore environment that provides a competency-based approach prior to release to the
operational night roster.

ev idence The aircraft operator must maintain records of flight crew experience
including the time logged as a crew member engaged in night offshore
operations. There must be a documented control mechanism in place
to ensure that a Pilot is not assigned as Pilot-in-Command of a flight to
be conducted offshore at night unless they have achieved a minimum
experience of 25 hours in such operations.
The aircraft operator should also publish a competency-based syllabus for
flight crews new to the night offshore environment and a record of training
to confirm that an appropriate level of competency has been achieved.
Information contained on files maintained by the aircraft operator for each
individual flight crew provides a record of flight crew qualifications and
experience. Flight crew files and rostering records confirm appropriate
implementation and that crew pairings are appropriate to meet the
task requirements.

21.3: Night Offshore Procedures

FLT 6.04.01 Night offshore operations must be flown with two qualified Pilots, in a
FLT 6.04.02 multi-engine aircraft that is operated and equipped for flight under Instrument
FLT 6.04.03 Flight Rules. The aircraft operator must have SOPs pertaining to night offshore
FLT 6.06.01 operations which include reference to stabilized approach criteria and missed
FLT 6.06.02 approach/go-around protocol.

The aircraft operator must have documented Standard Operating Procedures designed
to ensure all flight crew know individual responsibilities and actions in the night
environment. Details should include reference to stabilized approach procedures,
go-around and missed approach procedures and instrument take-off procedures under
both normal and abnormal/emergency situations.

(See also Control 5.1: Night or IFR – Two Crew Operations, Control 5.8: Stabilized
Approaches, Control 5.9: Mandatory Go-around Procedures, Control 5.11: Multi Crew
Operations, Control 5.12: CRM/ADM Training.)

Page 114
 ev idence The aircraft operator’s SOPs must provide requirements relating to night
offshore operations, with specific information to be provided in relation to
the conduct of stabilized approaches to offshore facilities. The SOPs should
at a minimum address:
• The minimum aircraft and crew requirements;
• Crew roles and responsibilities during both normal and emergency
situations;
• The criteria to be met for a stabilized approach; and
• The circumstances under which the conduct of mandatory and no-fault
go-around procedure must be carried out.
The aircraft operator’s SOPs must clearly specify the duties that must
be performed by the Pilots and adequately detail the crew coordination
processes that must apply.

21.4: Night Validation Flight

All new-build helidecks must have a night validation flight conducted by an
approved aircraft operator that assesses the platform and helideck lighting.
Consider the following when planning the evaluation flight:
• Use of experienced personnel such as Check and Training Flight Crew;
• Performing the flight as soon as practicable during operational start-up; and
• Assessing the night lighting against the surrounding ambient conditions.

(See also Common Control 1.13: Operational Risk Assessment, Control 2.3: Landing Site
Assessments.)

New-build and reworked installations will have helideck lighting assessed during
acceptance testing in dry-dock or close by the construction site. This environment is
typically surrounded by abundant ambient illumination and the acceptance performed
at ground level rather than on a typical approach angle.

Page 115
 A non-revenue flight conducted by appropriately experienced flight crew will validate
the effectiveness of an installation’s helideck night lighting. It will also detect glare from
unshielded lights during the approach, poorly illuminated windsocks which may provide
little or no information prior to landing, and rotating beacons which may provide a
distraction to flight crew.

During the conduct of the non-revenue validation flight, review of the elements
contained in Control 20.2 should also be covered, specifically involving all HLOs.

Although new build platforms can have their night lighting validated and accepted
during shore-based acceptance testing from the deck, flight validation (without
passengers) in a controlled environment using qualified crew who have been
briefed on the nature of the task is recommended. The company should make this
request to an aircraft operator capable of completing the task.

21.5: Night Medical Evacuation (Medevac) Policy

When required for the operation, the company must consult with the aircraft
operator to develop a night Medevac policy. Flights should only be conducted in
life threatening situations and where stabilization until first light is not an option.
The final decision must be made by the Offshore Installation Manager (OIM) in
consultation with medical staff and the aircraft operator.

(See Threat 11: Medical Evacuation.)

OGP accident studies indicate that since 1990 the vast majority of night offshore
fatal accidents that occurred during night medical evacuations were for non-life-
threatening injuries.

Night offshore operations present a greater risk than day visual offshore operations.

To avoid unnecessary night medical evacuations that could have been completed after
the patient has been stabilized until first light, a pre-determined set of expectations
and call-out procedures must be established prior to or during the start-up phase of
the activity. Any medevac request instigated by the offshore facility must involve advice
from the medical staff (preferably a qualified medical doctor) as well as an independent
risk-based assessment conducted by the aircraft operator.

The company should initiate a risk-based review of night offshore medevac

procedures to ensure that: (1) when practicable, non-life-threatening injuries are
stabilized until first light for medical retrieval; (2) medical personnel (preferably a
doctor) assist the OIM in the decision to medevac; (3) aircraft operators can make
an independent and overriding decision on the ability to safely conduct a night
offshore medevac.

21.6: Serviceable Radio Altimeters

FLT 6.11.01 All offshore helicopters must be equipped with at least one radio altimeter with
dual displays, with audio and visual alert both of which must be serviceable for
any flight at night or flight conducted under IFR. This requirement supersedes
what may be outlined in the regulatory approved MEL.

The requirement for two-crew coordination whereby both crew members need ready
access to accurate altitude information is increased during night offshore operations.
Page 116
 Approach information required to determine landing decision points and departure
information for the profile-type flown needs precise altitude information to be clearly
presented to both crew members. The aural alerting function of the radio altimeters
provides an additional awareness capability and should be used as a last line of defence
to prevent a Controlled Flight Into Terrain/Water (CFIT/W) accident.

ev idence The aircraft operator must document in the Operations Manual or MEL
a requirement for at least one radio altimeter with dual displays, both
of which must be serviceable at the time of dispatch for any offshore
flight at night or flight conducted under IFR. Aircraft operator procedures
should address the requirement for setting any aural alerting systems on
the radar altimeter and the procedures to be followed in the event of an
unexpected alert.
Aircraft records and Maintenance Release documentation can confirm
compliance with these documented requirements.

21.7: Weather Radar

All offshore helicopters flown at night or under IFR must be fitted with color FLT 6.11.02
weather radar having a minimum range scale of 2.5nm with one half nm range
scale graduations.

The provision of serviceable weather radar for Pilots operating at night or under IFR
significantly improves the safety of operation in areas of hazardous weather.

Weather radars can provide for the conduct of procedures such as Offshore Standard
Approach Procedures (OSAP), Airborne Radar Approaches (ARA), and the Helicopter
En Route Descent Areas (HEDA). These approach types require published procedures,
training, checking and where possible approval by the responsible regulatory authority.

The reduction in range scale permits very accurate approaches to the offshore facility,
but must be accompanied by published SOPs on how each type of approach and any
subsequent go-around/missed approach must be flown.

Color radars provide a more detailed and more easily interpreted presentation of actual
weather conditions than the older monochrome radars.

ev idence The AFM for helicopters utilized for offshore operations at night or under the
IFR should contain details of the weather radar fitted. The Aircraft operator
must document in the Operations Manual or MEL specific requirements that
must apply to the serviceability of airborne weather radar equipment for
flight at night or flight conducted under IFR. (See also BARS Control 10.3).
The aircraft operator must document in their Operations Manual, detailed
requirements and procedures for the conduct of OSAP, ARA and HEDA, and
produce and distribute to Pilots, certified Instrument Approach Plates for
each procedure in accordance with local Civil Aviation requirements for such
plates.
Aircraft records and Maintenance Release documentation can confirm
compliance with the documented fitment and serviceability requirements.
Pilot training records must confirm compliance with documented
requirements for the conduct of OSAP, ARA and HEDA (where approved). Page 117
 22.0: Helideck Collision – Offshore Operations

The helicopter collides with an obstacle on the helideck and crashes into
the water adjacent to the platform

22.1: Helideck Control – Helicopter Landing Officer (HLO) and Assistants

All offshore installations must have a HLO available for all helicopter movements
with relevant duties and responsibilities clearly outlined in a current and
up-to-date HLO Manual. Recurrent training must be scheduled every three years.

Any personnel designated as an assistant to the HLO must receive formalized

training from an approved HLO, and where possible participate in periodic
emergency drills.

In addition to standard PPE, all helideck personnel must wear and be identified by
a high visibility vest.

(See Control 7.3: Passenger Control.)

A Helicopter Landing Officer (HLO) must be provided at all manned offshore helideck
installations and available during the conduct of all helicopter operations. The HLO is
responsible for a wide variety of tasks related to helicopter operations, each of which
relate to ensuring the overall safety of helicopter operations and all personnel involved.

The offshore helideck operator should ensure that policies and procedures relating
to provision of HLOs at company facilities are appropriately documented. The
policies and procedures must cover requirements for initial HLO training and
approval along with the processes for conducting periodic recurrent training and
checking to assure ongoing competencies.

These documents must clearly detail all relevant HLO procedures and
responsibilities that must apply at each location to ensure the adequate
supervision of helideck operations and provision of serviceable helideck facilities.
It should be clearly stated that a HLO has responsibility for the overall conduct and
safety of helideck operations and that all personnel, when carrying out any duties
in support of helicopter operations at that facility, must be under the direct control
of the HLO.

ev idence HLO training records must be available to the aircraft operator for review
and must confirm that the documented requirements of the HLO training and
checking program have been applied consistently in the initial training and
ongoing assessment of HLO competency.

Page 118
22.2: Helideck Inspection
All helidecks must have an annual helideck inspection conducted by a Competent FLT 6.10.02
Aviation Specialist or the aircraft operator. Documented findings and action plans FLT 6.10.03
resulting from any inspection must be retained by the HLO.

Prior to commencing operations to a new helideck, or when there is a new operator

for an existing helideck, experienced and qualified personnel from the aircraft
operator must perform an inspection and brief all relevant offshore personnel in
the safe operating practices and procedures for the helicopter type being used.

(See Control 2.2: Airfield Inspections.)

It is important that a Competent Aviation Specialist or an approved person from the

aircraft operator inspect the helideck to confirm that there has been no alteration to, or
deterioration in the condition of the facilities that are provided in support of company
operations.

The HLO must conduct and document a weekly walk around inspection of the helideck
to check the serviceability status of all associated equipment, to ensure no unauthorized
work had been performed, or no equipment has been added that infringes the helideck
or the helideck protected areas. Discrepancies noted must be added to an action
closeout plan.

All items on or associated with the helideck that require periodic scheduled maintenance
must be included in the vessel’s computerized maintenance program.

The company’s assurance documentation for offshore helideck operations should

detail the inspection program that must be implemented to ensure that helideck
facilities routinely used by the aircraft operator’s helicopters continue to meet
required standards. The standard (e.g. CAP 437) and the associated checklists used
during routine inspections must be fully documented. The reporting procedures
must ensure that all findings and action plans arising from helideck inspections
are provided to and retained by the HLO and communicated to the aircraft
operator. In addition to aviation specialists, appropriately qualified (such as HCA
or industry equivalent courses) personnel accepted by the company may conduct
annual inspections.

ev idence The aircraft operator must have a system of oversight to ensure that the
helideck meets their requirements. Completion of such an inspection or
review of inspection records will allow the aircraft operator to determine
the presence of any operational risks to be addressed and facilitate the
management of identified risks through the Aircraft operator’s Safety
Management System.
Associated records must confirm that the documented inspection
requirements, processes and procedures are being complied with and that
the desired outcomes are being achieved.

Page 119
 22.3: Helideck Design
All new helidecks must conform to the standards of ICAO Annex 14 Volume II
FLT 6.10.01
Heliports and be designed to accommodate the largest helicopter anticipated for
use in the life of the structure. Refer to CAP 437 ‘Offshore Helicopter Landing Areas’
and the ICAO Heliport Manual for standards and practices.

Bow mounted helidecks on FPSOs may require decks with a larger than normal
diameter up to 1.5D (D = overall length of the helicopter with rotors turning) due
to PRH considerations. Obtain advice from a Competent Aviation Specialist prior
to the final design review.

The management of a helideck from its original design through to its routine use in
operations will require the involvement of a variety of organizations and disciplines.
Each of these will approach the issue of initial design and facility specifications from
a different perspective. To ensure the helideck design achieves the best facilities and
support arrangements that provide an environment for safe operations, it is important
that all perspectives are considered. ICAO Annex 14 Volume 2 and CAP 437 both contain
detail on industry standards that have been accepted worldwide.

Where local regulations differ to the ICAO or CAP 437 design standards, a gap analysis
should be conducted to ensure the more stringent requirement is applied, except where
the responsible regulatory authority is insistent on their requirement.

Each company should have the requirement in their design documentation for all
new-builds (and major reworks) to meet the requirements of ICAO Annex 14 Volume
II and the CAP 437 from a design perspective. Where CAP 437 provides guidance
using the word “should”, all items for design consideration must be considered
mandatory unless a variance process has been approved internally by the company.

22.4: Helicopter Performance

Offshore helicopters must be flown to minimize exposure time over the helideck
FLT 6.06.03 edge and must be operated to at least Performance Class 2 requirements at
FLT 6.06.04 all times.

Helicopter performance is divided into three different classifications: Performance

Classes 1, 2 and 3. Performance Class 1 (PC1) for a helicopter means the class of
operations where, in the event of failure of an engine, performance is available to enable
the helicopter to land within the rejected take-off distance available (e.g. the helideck)
or safely continue the flight to an appropriate landing area, depending on when the
failure occurs.

Performance Class 2 (PC2) is the class of operations where, in the event of failure of an
engine, performance is available to enable the helicopter to safely continue the flight
except when the failure occurs early during the take-off maneuver or late in the landing
maneuver, in which case a forced landing may be required.

Performance Class 2 operations can be designed to operate with a permitted exposure

time for the periods where safe continuation of flight or landing is not assured, or
alternatively at all times with a safe forced landing capability (e.g. PC2 E and PC2 DLE).
Further discussion with aviation specialists and/or the aircraft operator during the
operational risk assessment should be conducted to further understand the benefits of
limited exposure operations and the impact on payload.
Page 120
 Performance Class 3 (PC3) for helicopters means the class of operations where, in the
event of failure of an engine at any time during the flight, a forced landing in case of
a multi-engine aircraft may be required, and in the case of single-engine aircraft will
be required.

ev idence Aircraft operators of helicopters flying to Performance Class 2 standards

should have detailed operating procedures that describe how to minimize
the amount of time spent over the deck edge (approach and departure)
where performance outcomes are not guaranteed. The procedures must
be supported by repetitive training (simulator preferable) and form part of
every flight crew assessment.

22.5: Multiple Helicopters on Helideck Operations

A procedure for a second helicopter landing on a helideck must be included in the FLT 6.09.01
aircraft operator’s Standard Operating Procedures or Operations Manual. FLT 6.09.02
Operations requiring the landing of a second helicopter to an offshore helideck
must be risk assessed and approved by a company designated Competent Aviation
Specialist prior to the activity.

If a helicopter becomes unserviceable on the helideck, the only practical solutions to

transport maintenance support to the site may be to: land a second helicopter on the
already occupied deck, winch personnel and their equipment down to the helideck, or
transport them by boat and use the platform crane to bring them and their equipment
to the helideck. Each method has its own risks.

On larger helidecks where the land-on option is possible, it is only permissible when
appropriate risk assessments are conducted and include the following considerations:
• Helideck and second helicopter size (minimum separation distances on landing);
• Positioning of the disabled aircraft in relation to area of availability, wind direction
and therefore approach direction of the rescue aircraft;
• Securing of the disabled aircraft’s main rotor;
• Possibility of securing the disabled aircraft to the platform;
• Non-essential personnel not in the rescue aircraft during landing or departure;
• Non-essential persons not on helideck as the rescue aircraft is landing or departing;
• Which seat the rescue flying Pilot will occupy during the operation – this should be
on the same side as the disabled aircraft when the rescue aircraft is on the approach;
• Carriage of a crewman to assist in rescue aircraft wheel/skid placement on helideck;
• Last light considerations (day only operations);
• Helideck load bearing capability (static and dynamic loads must be considered);
• Other options for transporting the required personnel (ship, barge, proximity of other
helidecks, hoist, etc.); and
• Removal of the disabled helicopter off the helideck by the platform crane if a suitable
work area is available and aircraft maintenance personnel are available to supervise
the move.

Page 121
 Companies positioning offshore installations long distances offshore and in
isolated areas should consider the requirement for two helicopter landings during
the initial helideck design stage.

ev idence Where the aircraft operator wishes to land a second helicopter on an

already occupied helideck, it must have documented procedures in place
(local procedures or in the Operations Manual) that require the completion
of a risk assessment prior to departure. The risk assessment must address
the hazards and the procedures required to mitigate the risk to an
acceptable level.
The aircraft operator must also confirm that the OIM authorizes the
operation and that prior consultation between the OIM and the aircraft
operator will occur.

Page 122
23.0: Rescue Hoist Operations

The helicopter is performing hoisting operations and, through

manipulative error, experiences an abnormal situation that results
in an accident

23.1: Crew Hoist Experience

All personnel assigned to hoist operations must have completed an approved FLT 6.02.03
training program relevant to the task. A minimum of three hoist cycles within the
past 12 months must form part of the training schedule for all crew members.

Prior to commencing hoist operations, the aircraft operator must ensure that all
personnel are qualified to undertake the hoisting activity and are undergoing recency
training at the intervals outlined in Control 23.1 of the BARS.

Minimum winch areas are obstacles and clearance must be in accordance with CAP 437
and the ICS Guide.

ev idence Details of the aircraft operator’s training and checking program for crew
engaged in rescue hoist operations must be published in the Operations
Manual and follow established criteria. The program must cover
requirements and procedures for initial training and approval along with the
processes for conducting periodic recurrent training and checking.
The aircraft operator must document in the Operations Manual minimum
recency requirements for crew engaged in rescue hoist operations and the
method by which these recency requirements are tracked. While manual,
paper-based systems are acceptable, computer programs that more
accurately track the limits are the preferred option.
Associated crew training records must confirm that relevant requirements of
the training program have been applied during the training of crew engaged
in rescue hoist operations and the ongoing evaluation of competency.
Associated records must confirm that crew are maintaining the recency
required for rescue hoist operations, or are competency checked
immediately prior to conducting winch operations, and that the rostering
system has attended to upcoming requirements prior to expiry.

23.2: Training Program

The aircraft operator must establish a training program and minimum qualification FLT 6.02.01
criteria for all personnel involved in hoist operations, including, but not limited to: FLT 6.02.02
the flight crew, hoist operator and down-the-wire swimmer (where applicable).

The training program must include an initial competence course followed by annual
refresher training.

All personnel who are likely to be assigned duties involving hoist operations are required
to maintain both a qualification and competency in the role. This will include: (1)
Captains and co-pilots; (2) hoist operator; (3) down-the-wire swimmer (if applicable).
The aircraft operator may develop an in-house training program or utilize third-party
Page 123
 assistance to provide the required training. Regardless, there must be a published and
approved syllabus that leads to the award of the qualification.

To provide the company with assurance that all risks associated with hoist operations
have been adequately addressed, advice from aviation specialists should be obtained to
confirm suitability of the risk assessment and training syllabus. At minimum this should
include:
• Helicopter performance requirements;
• Regulatory requirements (licensing, endorsement, operating approvals);
• Crew roles and responsibilities;
• Equipment standards;
• Weather minimums;
• Procedures (normal and emergency);
• Communications (internal and external requirements); and
• Minimum winching area requirements.

Aircraft operator Check and Training records must document the initial qualification, as
well as recency activity to ensure currency in all aspects of the hoisting activity.

Where hoisting is conducted on a regular basis to a specific vessel, consideration should

be given to including vessel personnel in the training program. Additionally, where hoist
training is conducted over water at night, a safety boat should be in attendance.

ev idence The aircraft operator’s Operations Manual must contain details of the
minimum qualifications required for all personnel involved in hoist
operations, the training program applicable to each role and the process
by which ongoing competencies are assured.
Details of the aircraft operator’s training and checking program for crew
engaged in rescue hoist operations must be published in the Operations
Manual and follow established training and checking criteria. The program
must cover requirements and procedures for initial training and approval
along with the processes for conducting periodic recurrent training
and checking. Training records must be available and confirm that the
requirements of the training and checking program have been applied
consistently in the initial training and ongoing competency assessment
of personnel involved in rescue hoist operations.

23.3: Hoist Equipment

MNT 4.01.03 All role specific equipment including the hoist, lifting device, harnesses, PPE and
associated tools must be maintained, tested and certified in accordance with the
manufacturers approved maintenance program.

All equipment used in hoisting must fall under an inspection and maintenance program
to ensure that it is fit for purpose. Technical logs for hoist usage should be maintained
that record hoist cycles and defects and the usage of all lifting devices. Maintenance
records should track the equipment standard, incorporation of Service Bulletins or
Airworthiness Directives, and life limited components (e.g. cable cutting/guillotine
cartridge). There are very rarely secondary lines of defence during hoisting activities that
Page 124
 will protect against an equipment failure and therefore it is critical that each component
is fit for purpose when required for use.

Survivors who have been in the water for long periods may need to be winched by a
stretcher in a horizontal position as their blood may rush to their legs once the water
pressure on them is removed.

ev idence The aircraft operator or approved maintenance organization must

maintain records reflecting that any role specific equipment to be used
for rescue hoist operations is certified for use by the aircraft or equipment
manufacturer. They must also show that the equipment has been tested and
released to service by the approved maintenance organization and has been
subject to a manufacturer’s approved maintenance program.
Associated records must confirm that the requirements of the lifting
equipment manufacturer’s approved maintenance program are being
appropriately carried out.
Winching equipment and training must include use of stretchers.

23.4: Night Hoist Offshore Operations

Conduct night hoist operations in aircraft that are specifically equipped for the FLT 6.02.04
task (including auto-hover capability) and with a crew specifically trained in night
hoist operations.

Due to the acute lack of visual reference available during night hovering and night
hoisting over water, this activity must only be conducted in a helicopter that is
appropriately equipped for the task. At a minimum, the helicopter should be capable
of single-engine hover operations OGE, possess an auto-hover capability (4-axis) and
have appropriate external illumination capability. Night hoisting must therefore only be
conducted in specifically equipped aircraft with crew who have been specifically trained
and are current in the activity. To date, the ability to maintain a night hoisting capability
has been considered as a specific specialist role performed by personnel assigned solely
to this task. Any deviation from this model of a specialist role should be subject to a risk
assessment involving all parties, prior to operational status being confirmed.

ev idence An aircraft operator that undertakes night rescue hoist operations must
document in the Operations Manual, the minimum aircraft equipment,
training and recency requirements for crew engaged in night overwater
rescue hoist operations.
Training records must confirm that the requirements of the training and
checking program applicable to night overwater rescue hoist operations
have been applied consistently in the initial training and ongoing
competency assessment of flight crew involved in those operations.
Associated records must confirm that Pilots and winch aircraft operators
are maintaining the recency required for night overwater rescue
hoist operations.

Page 125
 24.0: Aircraft Fuel Complication – Offshore Operations

The helicopter experiences fuel supply complications resulting in engine

flame-out and an accident

24.1: Refueling System Inspection

FLT 6.10.04 An annual inspection of offshore installation fuel systems must be conducted by
the company designated Competent Aviation Specialist or aircraft operator. The
inspection must include a review of refueling procedures that cover daily testing,
sampling and sample retention practices.

(See Threat 4.0: Fuel Contamination.)

Fuel quality, onshore or offshore, is a critical control. In an offshore environment the

added issue of potential salt water contamination heightens the requirement for all fuel
controls to be rigorously followed. Initial fuel system design, inspection and ongoing
maintenance are key components of this critical control. Due to the regular transfer and
incorporation of transportable fuel tanks to the offshore installation and fuel system,
care must be given to all practices and procedures associated with offshore refueling
and fuel sample retention.

Fuel should be tested for quality and results documented at all stages of the fuel
transport system including: from arrival at the aircraft operator’s land bulk depot, to
testing when transferred to transportable tanks, to arrival offshore, to transfer from the
offshore bulk storage to the fuel distribution system, at the fuel distribution system, and
finally at the aircraft.

The vessel operator must include in the vessel’s computerized maintenance program,
all items on or associated with the platform fuel system that require periodic scheduled
maintenance.

ev idence The offshore facility’s documentation should detail the requirement for
initial, intermediate and annual inspections, and scheduled maintenance
designed to provide assurance of the ongoing quality of fuel supplies.
The aircraft operator’s audit program that applies to fuel supplies would
normally be one component of the Safety and Quality Management System.
Associated records such as audit schedule, audit checklists, audit reports
and non-conformance/corrective action closeout records must confirm that
requirements providing assurance of the ongoing quality of fuel delivery
systems and fuel supplies are being complied with.

24.2: Offshore Alternates

FLT 6.06.05 One-way fuel computations and offshore-only alternate diversions must not be
used unless the offshore destination has been approved for OEI landings by a
Competent Aviation Specialist.

Offshore flight planning procedures must require helicopters to be flown to a destination

or alternate destination suitable for the conduct of One Engine Inoperative (OEI)
landings. In normal operations this requires onshore alternates to be carried at all times.
Page 126
 In some circumstances, out of necessity, offshore alternates may be the only choice
available. Risks associated with holding an offshore installation as an alternate include:
• Sudden deck closure (crane, cargo, weather, fire or gas alarms);
• An aircraft emergency requiring a running landing (hydraulics, tail rotor failures); and
• An aircraft emergency on an aircraft which threatens the offshore installation (fire).

An offshore alternate must only be authorized after the completion of a risk-assessed

process involving aircraft operator representatives and company aviation specialists.
When an offshore alternate is approved:
• OEI landings must be possible for the aircraft type, at its calculated arrival weight in
the ambient conditions; and
• A “green” deck must be available, at that offshore alternate prior to the aircraft
passing the Point of No Return (PNR) on the outbound flight.

The installation selected as suitable for nomination as an offshore alternate must have
an approved aircraft refueling capability with all recent serviceability and fuel testing
checks completed.

ev idence The aircraft operator must document in the Operations Manual, a policy for
flights to offshore destinations that provides for fuel planning requirements
to address the issue of carriage of one-way fuel and offshore only alternate
diversions (where applicable). Associated records such as aircraft load-
sheets, Flight Logs and fuel records should confirm compliance with SOPs
requiring all flights to be operated to a destination or alternative landing
site that has been assessed as suitable for the conduct of OEI landings.

24.3: Fuel Testing

Pilots must take (or witness the taking of) a fuel sample from the delivery side and FLT 6.06.08
as close as possible to the delivery nozzle of all offshore refueling installations
prior to each refueling operation. The fuel sample must be tested for water and
contaminants as in Control 4.1.

(See Control 3.1: Fuel Check, Control 3.2: Flight Plan Weather Data, Control 3.3:
Flight Plan.)

The Pilot-in-Command must ensure that the fuel being uplifted is free of water and
visible contaminants, and is therefore acceptable for operation of the helicopter.
The aircraft operator’s SOPs must document the requirements and/or procedures for
fueling of aircraft and performing fuel testing as part of the pre-flight preparation
process following completion of refueling operations. The PIC must inspect the fuel
sample personally.

ev idence The aircraft operator’s documented SOPs must detail the requirements and/
or procedures for fueling of aircraft and performing fuel testing as part
of the pre-flight preparation process following completion of refueling
operations.
Where fuel is supplied by a third-party, the aircraft operator must have
procedures in place to confirm that the quality of fuel being provided meets
aircraft operator and company standards. In such cases, it would be normal
to see the third-party provider addressed under the aircraft operator’s and/
Page 127
or company’s audit schedule with appropriate records.
 25.0: Helicopter Accident – Offshore Operations

Mitigating defences in the event of an aircraft accident

25.1: Aircraft Flotation System

FLT 6.12.01 Offshore helicopters must be fitted with a pop-out flotation system. Install
FLT 6.12.02 automatic inflation systems on the aircraft when available for the aircraft type.

A ditching, either planned or unplanned, is one of the more significant risks facing
offshore helicopters and their occupants.

Early flotation design relied on fixed floats and boat hulls that have evolved into
fitment of deployable floatation systems as an industry standard. These systems are
usually stored either on the skid assemblies or fixed to the underside of the helicopter
fuselage. The activation is via the use of compressed gas initiated by the flight crew, or
automatically upon water contact where this option is fitted.

The design of the flotation system is intended to keep the helicopter upright in the water
at certain sea-states, despite the high aircraft Center of Gravity which could otherwise
roll the aircraft over. This functionality permits passengers and crew to evacuate the
ditched helicopter and deploy liferafts in an orderly fashion if sea states are less than
the maximum design limits. Companies should be aware of the sea-state certification
of external flotation systems when contracting the aircraft for the specific area of
operation.

Companies should stipulate aircraft flotation systems with consideration of

localized sea-state requirements, in the contract with the aircraft operator. Control
10.1 (Adverse Weather Policy) should also reference limitations to flight operations
when sea-states exceed aircraft certification capability.

ev idence Aircraft operators of offshore helicopters must provide a helicopter type that
is equipped with an acceptable floatation system. Crew training, operating
procedures and the System of Maintenance should all reflect adoption of
this capability. Helicopter reviews should confirm that the floatation system
is fitted and that it is well identified and included on the passenger briefing
video/brief and the passenger safety cards.

Page 128
25.2: Pop-out Windows
When an approved modification exists, emergency pop-out windows must FLT 6.12.03
be installed.

Pop-out windows provide an alternate and readily accessible escape path for passengers
in the event of a ditching where the helicopter floatation equipment does not keep the
helicopter upright on the water, and door jettisoning or opening is not possible. The
most common variety is where a tag is pulled to progressively remove a locking bead
from around the window seal. The window can then be pushed out, permitting escape.

Companies should stipulate pop-out windows and all associated training

requirements as part of the contract with the aircraft operator. This training should
include escape training through pop out windows for both passenger and crew.

ev idence Aircraft operators of offshore helicopters must provide a helicopter

equipped with pop-out windows. Crew training, operating procedures and
the System of Maintenance should all reflect adoption of this capability.
Helicopter reviews should confirm that the pop-out windows are fitted and
that they are well identified and included on the passenger briefing video/
brief and the passenger safety cards.

25.3: Emergency Exit Lighting System

When an approved modification exists, an emergency exit lighting system must be FLT 6.12.04
fitted to the aircraft.

Emergency Exit Lighting Systems illuminate during a ditching to provide visual

confirmation of the emergency exits for passengers. The marking of emergency exits
greatly assists passengers to exit the aircraft after an emergency, particularly at night.
Emergency exit lighting is generally self-illuminating luminescent strips or powered
from a self-contained battery packs. Self-powered (glow in the dark) or Tritium type
luminescence signs should have a scheduled inspection program that ensures adequate
brightness levels are being maintained over time.

Companies should stipulate emergency exit lighting as part of the contract with
the aircraft operator.

ev idence Aircraft operators of offshore helicopters must provide a helicopter type

that is equipped with an Emergency Exit Lighting System. Crew training,
operating procedures and the System of Maintenance should all reflect
adoption of this capability. Helicopter reviews should confirm that the
Emergency Exit Lighting System is fitted and that the system is well
identified and included on the passenger briefing video/brief and the
passenger safety cards.

Page 129
 25.4: Liferafts

FLT 6.12.07 Two approved liferafts that are reversible or self-righting, double chambered and
capable of being tethered to the aircraft, must be carried and be readily accessible
in the event of ditching. Each liferaft must have an overload capacity that is equal
or greater to the total occupants carried in the aircraft. Preference is to be given
to liferafts with inflatable floor and canopy.

A ditching scenario ideally allows the helicopter occupants to be able to enter liferafts
while they are tethered to the helicopter. Once all occupants are aboard, the tethers
should be cut with the special knives provided in the raft kits and the liferafts moved
away from the aircraft in case it sinks. The tether should incorporate a “weak link” so
that if the helicopter does sink before the tethers are cut, the liferafts can disengage
and not be dragged down with it.

Acceptable liferafts should be self-righting (always floating correct side up) or reversible
(either side is acceptable when first entering). Either liferaft type will avoid the problems
of survivors unsuccessfully attempting to flip a liferaft in high sea states or high
wind conditions.

Liferaft design certification rules mean that each liferaft has a “standard” and
“overload” survivor capacity. The overload capacity is for use when one of the liferafts
is not accessible and allows for all occupants to be able to utilize the remaining liferaft.
Offshore survival kits including signaling devices should be carried in the liferafts and are
typically tethered to the liferaft by a lanyard.

ev idence Each helicopter used offshore should have a clearly marked location for
storage of the liferafts that complies with standard restraint criteria.
Deployment and operation of the liferaft should be addressed in the
pre-flight safety video/briefing and on each passenger safety card.
Liferafts will have raft equipment, and survival kits, with contents
approved by an aviation specialist.

Page 130
25.5: Externally Deployed Liferafts
When an approved modification exists, externally deployed liferafts must be fitted FLT 6.12.08
to the helicopter with a means of activation located both internally and externally.
Note – any liferaft assembly that can be deployed remotely by the Pilots meets the
intent of this control.

Externally mounted liferafts provide a better option than internally mounted liferafts
by maximizing space in the cabin thus reducing obstacles to egress. They also avoid
inadvertent activation inside the cabin and ensure that the raft always makes it outside
of the cabin despite any possible structural deformation of the cabin after impact. Where
an approved modification exists, the liferafts should be fitted externally. Dual activation
options should always be provided so that the liferafts can be deployed either by the
flight crew in the cockpit or externally by any personnel using activation handles in place
near the liferaft location, regardless of whether the helicopter is upright or inverted.

ev idence When fitted, the aircraft operator’s SOPs or emergency procedures must
cover the deployment of externally mounted liferafts and the situations
where internal versus external deployment is preferred. Each helicopter used
in the offshore role should have a clearly marked location for storage of the
liferafts and their respective activation handles. Deployment and operation
of the liferaft should be addressed in the pre-flight safety video/briefing and
on each passenger safety card.

25.6: Life Jackets

Constant wear, single chambered (minimum) passenger life vests manufactured to FLT 6.08.02
an approved TSO must be worn at all times in offshore operations. Life vests with FLT 6.12.05
crotch strap must be considered in the pre-start risk assessment.

Life jackets are an essential survival tool in any ditching scenario. Life jackets come in
many sizes, shapes and standards and it is important that life jackets of an appropriate
standard, manufactured to meet strict TSO requirements are in use.

Crotch straps prevent the life jacket from riding up over the survivors in the
water thereby reducing the risks of fatigue and/or drowning and are therefore a
minimum requirement.

Spray hoods are a requirement as they provide an effective method of preventing

progressive drowning from wind induced spray and waves relentlessly pounding a
survivor’s face.

Other items that should be carried on life jackets include:

• A life line to enable survivors to tie themselves together;
• A light to attract attention, preferably a strobe light;
• A whistle to enable survivors to locate each other;
• A grab handle to enable rescuers to more easily bring survivors into a rescue craft; and
• Reflective tape to improve visibility to rescuers at night.

In non-hostile situations where time to rescue may be extended, but where survivors not
in a raft may become well scattered due to wind and/or current, considerations should be
given to the addition of a “smart” GPS Personal Locator Beacon (PLB) to each life jacket. Page 131
 These allow automated sequential emergency transmissions by multiple survivors, thus
extending transmission time and preventing interference from multiple PLBs that would
otherwise operate at the same time.
Crewmembers’ life jackets should also include a PLB with a voice capability and day/
night flares.
Companies, in conjunction with the aircraft operator, should consider common
life jacket types used in the offshore field local to the activity to strive towards
compatibility with the surrounding workforce and aircraft operators.

ev idence Aircraft operators of offshore helicopters must provide an appropriate

standard of life jacket. Crew training, operating procedures and the System
of Maintenance should all reflect employment of this capability.
Aircraft operator reviews should confirm that the life jackets are provided
and that they are well identified and included on the passenger briefing
video/brief and the passenger safety cards.
Life jacket equipment is provided in accordance with company requirements.

25.7: Survival Suits

FLT 6.08.03 Survival suits certified for use by the local regulatory authority must be provided
to crews and passengers for helicopter offshore operations in hostile environments
and when required by risk assessment.
Survival suits greatly increase the chance of survival in cold sea conditions through the
delay in the onset of hypothermia. The normal calculation of survival times involves a
combination of air and water temperatures; hence survival suits may only be required at
certain times of the year. Survival suits must be worn where a risk assessment indicates
their use will significantly increase the chances of survival following a ditching. This is
particularly the case if there is no localized Search and Rescue (SAR) capability that can
guarantee the timely recovery of an aircraft’s occupants.
Survival suits are available in a variety of differing standards, designed for a range of
environmental conditions. Where the responsible regulatory authority does not specify
a standard, the outcome of the risk assessment should define the applicable standard of
suit required. At minimum, the risk assessment should consider the expected time in the
water and address the following factors:
• SAR capability:
–H
 elicopter: performance, size, day/night hoist capable, maximum number of
survivors that can be winched with regard to aircraft weight and fuel limitations
and winch duty cycles;
– Survivors: maximum number requiring retrieval (including crew);
–V
 essel: availability, methods of retrieval, communications compatibility with
search aircraft;
– Response time (including time to launch, transit and on-station times);
– Navigation capability (detection of all survivors and likely spread of survivors);
– Dropping of supplies/survival equipment (ability to drop linked liferafts);
• Weather and sea state (particularly sea temperature and wind);
• Last light considerations;
Page 132 • Medical capability on-board the SAR helicopter or vessel; and
• Availability of appropriate survival suits.
 Companies operating in cold water and/or hostile environments should ensure the
use of survival suits is considered in the operational risk assessment performed
prior to operational start-up.

25.8: Helicopter Underwater Escape Training (HUET)

All flight crew and passengers must complete a HUET course that includes the use FLT 6.01.01
of a Modular Egress Training Simulator (METS) at least every four years, unless
local regulation requires greater frequency or an established internal variance
process has been approved.

Having the knowledge and skills necessary to assist with survival in an offshore
environment, significantly increases the chances of surviving such an emergency
situation. HUET courses will increase an individual’s knowledge of safety procedures
and ability to successfully exit an actual ditching involving a submerged helicopter.
The ability of a METS trainer to submerge, and then roll inverted, provides a very realistic
training environment and is the minimum standard considered acceptable for offshore
operations.

HUET training should be representative of the escape paths and exit types for the
helicopter model being flown. HUET training facilities that can replicate spray/wave
and day/night conditions are preferred.

ev idence The company and aircraft operator must have documented policies requiring
that all flight crew and passengers involved in offshore operations must
undertake an accepted HUET course. This must be an element of their initial
training and then to be repeated every four years (or more frequently if
required by the responsible regulatory authority).
Associated training records must confirm that the documented
requirements, processes and procedures associated with the company’s and
aircraft operator’s HUET program are being complied with consistently in
initial training and on a routine basis. Personnel files and rostering records
confirm appropriate implementation of training programs.
The aircraft operator should have a process to confirm current HUET
credentials at check in.

25.9: Public Address (PA) System

The helicopter must be fitted with a PA system of sufficient clarity and volume FLT 6.11.03
so that passengers can understand instructions from the crew at all times
during flight.

It is important that the helicopter flight crew have the capability to pass information
onto passengers, not only of a general nature, but also when faced with diversions,
holding or when declaring an emergency and adopting the brace position.

The provision of multiple plug-in headsets is not a recommended option unless double-
disconnect cords are fitted, as headset cords may hinder emergency egress by snagging
exiting passengers. Use of the PA system (when available for the aircraft type) is
considered the most effective solution if it can be set at an appropriate level and is clear
enough to be heard and understood by all passengers.
Page 133
 Alternatively, infra-red headsets without cords may be considered.

In the event that double hearing protection (ear plugs and ear defenders) is being
employed and the public address system is not loud enough to be heard, either the
designated passenger on headset (See 25.10) could pass on information verbally to other
passengers, or the flight crew could alert passengers to remove ear defenders before
making the PA announcement.

ev idence The aircraft operator should have documented requirements in place that
direct PA announcements to be made at certain stages of flight, but in
particular a standardized approach to making emergency announcements
and alerting passengers.

25.10: Passenger to Crew Communication

Passengers must be able to communicate with the crew. Means of communication
FLT 6.11.04
can include access to a headset for a designated passenger or carriage of
a crew member.

In-flight issues originating from the rear of the aircraft (for example from the baggage
compartment or engine bay), such as a sudden onset of unusual noise, vibration, smoke
or over-heating electrical odors may occur where it is noticeable to passengers before
flight crew. Passengers may also experience distress, illness or chronic air sickness.
Under these circumstances, the ability to pass any safety-related information to the
flight crew is required. Typically the capability will comprise of a headset connected into
the crew Inter-Communication System (ICS).

The passenger headset would normally be allocated to a specific seat occupied by a

suitably experienced and briefed passenger identified during the check-in process.
If this is not practicable because of a lack of space, ICS access, issues with chords
blocking egress or headset damage, an alternate means of verbal communication
should be considered.

ev idence Where a passenger to crew communication facility is available, the aircraft

operator must have procedures in place to brief the senior passenger who
will be using the headset. The required brief should cover the critical times
of flight (e.g. take-off, approach and landing) when no communication
should be undertaken with the flight crew unless a critical cabin emergency
is underway (e.g. cabin fire with visible naked flame).

Page 134
25.11: Additional Offshore Safety Briefing
When the actual aircraft used for an offshore flight is configured differently to FLT 6.05.01
that shown in the video safety briefing, a verbal briefing covering the differences FLT 6.05.02
between the actual aircraft and the one shown in the video must be provided to FLT 6.05.03
all passengers prior to departure.

In addition to the briefing requirements contained in Section 6.6, the following

minimum aspects must be provided via video briefing prior to boarding the aircraft
for both onshore and offshore legs:

• Demonstration on the use of the life jackets used in that helicopter

• The proper use of survival suits, including the need to have suits fully zipped with
hoods and gloves ON during take-off and landing or otherwise advised by the
Pilot-in-Command
• Demonstration of liferaft deployment and boarding
• Demonstration of deployment of all survival equipment
• Boarding and disembarkation instructions.

Research has demonstrated that passengers who receive a pre-departure safety briefing
exhibit a better response to an evacuation command and therefore have a better chance
of survival. Where the briefing covers the specific detail of the aircraft or helicopter in
use, the passenger response is further enhanced.

ev idence Where differences in fleet standard exist or where the pre-flight safety
briefing does not reflect the current fleet standard, the aircraft operator
should document the requirement for a specific offshore safety briefing to be
conducted by the flight crew. The content of the briefing should be detailed
in the Operations Manual such that all crew deliver a consistent message.

25.12: Cabin Baggage

Only soft cover books or securely bound magazines can be taken on board the FLT 6:05:04
helicopter. Briefcases, laptop computers and newspapers are prohibited as FLT 6:05:05
carry-on baggage and must be secured in the baggage compartment. FLT 6:05:06
Loose cabin baggage presents a hazard during emergency landing or ditching, either
acting as a flying object that could cause serious head injury due to rapid deceleration or
by impeding egress through emergency exits. Floating baggage (particularly newspapers)
can obscure escape paths in a submerged ditching scenario.

Companies should inform passengers of these requirements prior to their arrival

at the departure point, which should also display clear guidance as to the
expectations associated with cabin baggage. Where the aircraft operator has more
stringent requirements, these should be adhered to.

ev idence The aircraft operator should have instructions and signage in place that
prohibit cabin baggage other than soft cover books and securely bound
magazines. This information should be provided to passengers at check-in.
During the check-in process, attending staff should ensure that the
requirement for passengers to carry only soft cover books and securely
Page 135
bound magazines is enforced.
 25.13: Flight Following

FLT 6:07:01 Dedicated aircraft flight following must be provided by a person capable of
FLT 6:07:02 initiating the Emergency Response Plan. The flight following must consist of
FLT 6:07:03 constant radio contact being maintained, with aircraft reporting intervals detailing
the aircraft position and altitude not exceeding 15 minutes.

An approved satellite system may be used in lieu of the flight following system.
Set satellite reporting intervals to two minutes with higher reporting frequencies
encouraged at lower levels.

(See Defence 12.4: Satellite Flight Following, Defence 12.5: Flight Following.)

Knowledge of the location of an offshore helicopter is critical in the event of ditching,

particularly when occupant survival depends on response times.

Disciplined radio reporting schedules provide this capability, but the prevalence of
lightweight satellite transmitting devices that provide a much greater level of accuracy
and do not require crew interaction are the preferred method of aircraft flight following.
While two-minute updates are considered an industry norm, higher frequency updates
should be considered when the aircraft descends from cruise levels in preparation
for landing.

ev idence Aircraft operators of helicopters in the offshore environment must have

appropriate flight following facilities, equipment and procedures in place.
The facilities should include a dedicated workstation for the staff member
conducting flight following activity, with immediate interface available to
the applicable search and rescue agencies. Where the equipment installation
includes a satellite capability, this information should be displayed on a
television monitor or computer screen.
Automated flight following systems must meet company requirements.

25.14: Survival Kits

FLT 6.12.06 Offshore-specific survival kits that comply with local regulatory requirements must
be carried and packed into aircraft liferafts.

Survival kits provide water, food and medical supplies to support long-term survival
situations where survivors have to remain in a raft for an extended period of time.
Survival kits also provide protection from the elements (sunscreen, sea sickness tablets
etc.) and location aids to enhance raft visibility in a search situation.

ev idence The aircraft operator must detail the requirement for carriage and the
content of offshore survival kits. The survival kits should form part of the
internal audit program and the System of Maintenance and should be
tamper-proof.

Page 136
25.15: Emergency Response Plan (ERP)
Offshore installations and vessels must make provision for aviation emergencies on
and around their facilities when developing Emergency Response Plans.

(See Defence 12.2: Emergency Response Plan.)

The company will have several emergency scenarios that will be used in the development
of the Emergency Response Plan for an offshore field. Aviation scenarios present
large risks to the safety of offshore personnel and should always be included in the
development of the company emergency response plans and exercises.

Companies should always ensure aviation scenarios are used when developing
emergency response plans for the offshore field.

25.16: Emergency Response Drills

Emergency drills (or desktop exercise) with aviation related objectives must be ORG 3.11.06
conducted within 30 days of a project’s initiation, and then annually for ongoing ORG 3.11.08
operations. ORG 3.11.09
Test the integrity of the ERP by conducting exercises on worst-case scenarios ORG 3.11.10
involving last-light, weather and aircraft disposition. ORG 3.11.14

Test and validate bridging communications between the company, the aircraft
operator and all SAR resources.

The company and aircraft operator must ensure that an emergency response exercise
is undertaken regularly to test the capability and adequacy of the ERP. Completion
of emergency response exercises will enable all personnel to practice the role that is
assigned to them and help identify areas of the ERP or personal performance that may
need improvement. Lessons learned from emergency exercises should be documented
and used to revise the ERP and enhance training to improve proficiency in executing
those plans.

The development and exercise of an emergency response bridging document between

the company and the aircraft operator should be a priority. This will ensure duplicated
actions are not conducted and the flow of communications is appropriate for
the emergency.

The initial ERP may be pre-planned to enable participants time to prepare and to give the
plan, as formulated, every chance of success. This will enable the plan to be validated
and personnel to be trained in the response required. Subsequent ERPs should be
unannounced to test the participants as well as the plan.

Page 137
 ev idence The aircraft operator must ensure that the ERP provides for emergency
response exercises to be conducted within 30 days of a project’s initiation,
and annually to validate and practice applicable emergency drills. These
should not be desktop exercises, and where possible, should involve all
the search and rescue assets as well as the bridging documents in place
between the aircraft operator and the company.
Desktop exercises should be used to augment the actual exercises as
required, especially if failures in documentation have been identified in the
actual exercises.
The procedures should require that each emergency response exercise
must be designed to achieve a specific objective and enable the associated
communications and coordination procedures to be evaluated and practiced
in complex and restrictive scenarios. Post exercise reports must confirm that
the documented inspection requirements, processes and procedures are
being complied with and that the desired outcomes are being achieved.

25.17: Last Light Limitations

Daytime offshore flights using single-engine and multi-engine helicopters not
meeting Performance Class 2 must be scheduled so that they land 30 minutes
prior to official sunset. The 30 minute timing must be reviewed during the pre-start
risk-assessment and take into account the following:
• Occupant survival time in the localized water conditions
• Search and rescue resources available
• Total call-out and recovery time
• Cumulative time taken for individual winch operations.

This requirement is only applicable to aircraft being operated to Performance Class 3

– multi-engine helicopters not capable of maintaining flight in the event of an engine
failure, and all single-engine helicopters.

Companies scheduling flights returning onshore after last light should require the
aircraft operators to ensure the activity is conducted to a minimum of Performance
Class 2.

25.18: Night Time Offshore Passenger Flights

Perform a risk assessment with input from the aircraft operator before conducting
night passenger flights. The risk assessment must include:
(1) The existence, availability and effectiveness of available night SAR resources;
(2) SAR response times; and
(3) Survival times of personnel given environmental conditions and mitigating
measures (such as survival suits). In this review it is expected that dedicated night
SAR helicopters with full night hoisting capability would be available.

Night offshore flight increases the complexity of successfully locating and recovering
personnel in the event of ditching.

If routine night passenger flights are conducted, the SAR plan must be risk assessed
Page 138 using all worse-case localized conditions anticipated. This includes potential ditching
locations at the furthest point from both onshore and offshore rescue resources.
 Companies considering the use of night offshore passenger flights should conduct a
thorough risk assessment involving the contracted aircraft operator, the company,
an aviation specialist and all available SAR resources prior to approval being given.

A dedicated appropriately equipped SAR aircraft and trained crew must be on

standby on operational readiness at all times when night passenger flights are
airborne.

A standby vessel capable of night retrieval of survivors should also be on readiness

whenever night passenger flights are airborne.

25.19: Linked Liferaft

For long-term operations, the company in consultation with the aircraft operator
must consider using linked liferafts to supplement any hoist or other means
of rescue.

The Linked Liferaft is also known also as the Helicopter Emergency Rescue Deployment
System (HERDS) or Air Sea Rescue Kit (ASRK).

In hostile conditions, retrieval of personnel from the water will be driven by time
pressures before the onset of hypothermia impacts the survivors. This will normally
dictate a SAR plan to use a helicopter provided with a hoist, or closely located standby
rescue vessel.

The linked liferaft system consists of two (or more) liferafts joined together by a length
of buoyant rope. The linked liferaft assembly can be loaded on any operational helicopter
that has a sliding door. The linked liferaft system is dropped upwind of the survivors,
with the rope extended between the two rafts. The wind blows the assembly down to the
survivors, with the intention that the rafts and rope straddle the survivors. The survivors
can pull themselves along the rope to either of the liferafts.

Linked liferafts also provide a better visual target for SAR crews as well as keeping
survivors in rafts in close proximity to one another.

Companies should determine through a risk assessment what method of search

and rescue will be acceptable to them. If linked liferafts are part of the recovery
plan, the requirement to maintain them, service them and train in their use should
be stipulated contractually with the aircraft operator.

ev idence If the aircraft operator has a linked liferaft capability in place, they should
also have SOPs covering linked liferaft deployment, including considerations
of sea state, wind and drop position. Crew training records should indicate
that crews have been trained in the deployment of a linked liferaft on an
initial and recurrent basis (minimum annually).

Page 139
 25.20: Acoustic Beacon

FLT 6.12.09 All offshore helicopters must have an underwater acoustic beacon (pinger) that
transmits when submerged. If equipped, the pinger must be attached to the CVR.

Acoustic beacons provide the ability to locate submerged aircraft by recovery crews.
These beacons are normally powered from an internal battery and activate as part of the
ditching sequence. To complement any recovery and accident investigation, the pinger
should be attached to the cockpit voice recorder (CVR).

When conducting combined emergency response exercises with the contracted

aircraft operator, companies should ensure homing equipment used to locate
pingers is readily available, including personnel trained in its use. In some remote
locations, this may require contractually stipulating the aircraft operator to
maintain this capability.

ev idence Confirm that the pinger is fitted to the helicopter and is attached to the CVR
if fitted. Ensure that the pinger falls under the System of Maintenance.

25.21: Re-breathers

FLT 6.05.02 Approved non-pressurized re-breathing equipment may only be used when crew
FLT 6.08.04 and passengers have received training in its use and its deployment is covered in
pre-flight safety briefings.

A re-breather is a type of Emergency Breathing System (EBS) that uses a closed-

circuit breathing apparatus which collects exhaled breath to permit the re-breathing
(recycling) of the substantially unused oxygen content of each breath. Consequently,
in a submerged helicopter scenario, re-breathers provide additional breathing time
underwater, and have the additional benefit of defending against the cold shock
breathing impulse.

There are important techniques and limitations that need to be trained for when using
re-breathers, not least of which is breathing style (inhalation and exhalation) and control
of the breathing rate. Untrained personnel must not be provided with re-breathing
equipment.

Where used, re-breathers should also be incorporated into HUET.

Companies using re-breathers as an emergency breathing system for their offshore

personnel should ensure that appropriate training for all personnel using the
device type has been conducted.

ev idence The aircraft operator should have instructions in place that prohibit the issue
of re-breathing equipment to passengers who are not trained in its use.
During the check-in process, attending staff should ensure that re-breathing
equipment is only provided to accredited passengers.

Page 140
3 AIRBORNE GEOPHYSICAL SURVEY OPERATIONS

Airborne geophysical survey operations are higher risk than other

aviation activities in the resource sector. All proposed activities are
subject to a detailed risk analysis that meets the standards of the
company, aircraft operator and the IAGSA.
To achieve the data quality required from sensor packages either installed on or towed
from the platform, airborne geophysical flying requires tight line tracking and adherence
to height tolerances.

Airborne geophysical operations often require all available aircraft performance.

Operation in this flight regime leaves little room for error in a high workload
environment. As a consequence, manipulative skill by the flight crew coupled with
appropriate fatigue management of the activity become critical controls for the safe
conduct of the operation and are applicable to aeroplanes and helicopters.

To reflect the increase in difficulty of this type of flying, geophysical operations demand
greater role experience and more stringent risk controls than those contained in the
generic requirements of the BAR Standard.

The assurance process for geophysical operations is no different to other specialist role
flying activities and will comprise of a combination of: (1) BARS audits of the aircraft
operator; (2) a detailed risk assessment prior to the activity; (3) start-up operational
review when considered necessary from a risk-based perspective.

Critical controls for airborne geophysical flying will always include:

• Equipment;
• Personnel;
• Fatigue management; and
• Operational requirements.

Page 141
 32.0: Personnel

Inadequate experience or high workload causes poor decision making

and results in an accident

32.1: Aircrew Experience and Recency

The following requirements are in addition to those listed in Appendix 1.
FLT 2.01.04
FLT 7.02.01 Experience and Recency Requirement Captain Co-Pilot Other Footnote
FLT 7.02.02 crew
All BARS Appendix 1 requirements Yes Yes
Total time – geophysical 300 hours 10 hours
Command/ICUS time – geophysical 300 hours 0 1
Command/ICUS on contract aircraft type 50 hours 0
Command/ICUS preceding 90-days on 10 hours 0 2
contract aircraft type
Geophysical training program Yes Yes Yes 3
Simulator training Yes Yes 4
Helicopter Underwater Escape Training Yes Yes Yes 5
Survey Crew Resource Management Training Yes Yes Yes

1. Agricultural Pilots with formal ratings provided by a regulatory authority, who have at least 500 hours of low level
agricultural flying incorporating GPS line flying, may apply a 250 hour credit towards total Command time.
2. Alternatively successful completion of a geophysical line check of at least two hours (excluding use of ferry time within
the preceding 90 days). Document flight crew competencies against established criteria.
3. Successful completion of a geophysical training program and where applicable a mountain flying course. Document
flight crew competencies against established criteria. Where the aircraft is operating with a fuel system that has been
modified from the original certification criteria, include a specific training module on fuel system management.
4. In addition to training on the actual aircraft, when reasonably available and supported by the client, flight crew
must undergo periodic simulator training that includes low-level emergencies and marginal performance situations
(including VMCA).
5. HUET training must be conducted for all crew involved in over-water ferry flights and offshore geophysical operations.

(See also Common Control 1.2.)

32.2: Flight Crew Remuneration

FLT 7.01.02 To remove unnecessary pressure to fly and potentially compromise minimum standards,
flight crews must not be paid on the basis of hours or distance flown.

When remuneration is based on hours or distance flown, there is a natural reaction to

press further and farther, thereby introducing the possibility of additional risks such
as fatigue, poor weather or the acceptance of less risk tolerance than would normally
be present. Remuneration should be based on an agreed contract basis, unrelated to
production rates.

The contract should reflect the remuneration method in place for the survey operation.

32.3: Crew Complement

ORG 3.04.06 The minimum crew complement must be a Pilot and operator. Single-pilot operations
must only be accepted after conducting a risk assessment which delivers mitigation
Page 142 measures acceptable to all. Where an observer is carried due to operating country
requirements, the observer is to be considered part of the crew.
 All survey operations are high-workload events. In order to share the workload, two crew
operations should be the norm. Where single-pilot operations are necessary for payload/
performance or due to system design, the risk assessment must consider all facets of the
operation that affect crew performance.

The aircraft operator should document the risk assessment and the factors taken into
consideration.

32.4: Two-pilot operations

Night surveys must be operated with a two-pilot crew. Conduct a pre-start risk FLT 7.05.01
assessment on two-pilot operations when: ORG 3.04.06
• Performing low-level offshore surveys; and/or
• In areas where a high workload is anticipated with managing traffic and/or airspace.

The aircraft operator should document the risk assessment and the factors taken
into consideration.

Page 143
 33.0: Aircraft Equipment

Certified and appropriate equipment must be fitted and serviceable

prior to departure on a survey flight

33.1: Aircraft Canopy

To facilitate good lookout and field-of-view, the aircraft canopy and all transparencies
must be clear, unscratched and serviceable throughout the activity.

Clean, clear canopies reduce flight crew workload by reducing glare and permitting the
acquisition of terrain details earlier in the flight. Clean transparencies also permit the
early identification of airborne hazards such as other aircraft or birds.

Inspection of the aircraft is more likely to occur as part of the Operational Review
process, but may be undertaken during the BARS audit if a representative aircraft is
available.

33.2: Upper Torso Restraints

Four-point upper torso restraints with lockable inertial reels must be provided to all
FLT 7.04.06
aircraft occupants.

Four-point upper torso restraints provide greater energy absorption ability than the
three-point lap/sash belt and therefore increase survival chances in the event of
an accident.

Inspection of the aircraft is more likely to occur as part of the Operational Review
process, but may be undertaken during the BARS audit if a representative aircraft is
available.

33.3: Oxygen Supply

The aircraft must have continuous oxygen capability if unpressurized and operating
FLT 7.04.02
above 10,000ft Above Mean Sea Level (AMSL).

The System of Maintenance for an aircraft equipped with an oxygen supply must include
details of the inspection schedule for the oxygen equipment fitted to the aircraft to
ensure its ongoing serviceability. The inspection schedule should reflect any requirements
or recommendations of the equipment manufacturer or any conditions that may be
applicable to the STC (or equivalent) that address fitment of equipment to the aircraft.

Aircraft maintenance records must confirm that documented requirements and

procedures contained in the aircraft System of Maintenance (or equivalent) are
being followed.

33.4: Supplemental Type Certificate (STC)

All role-specific equipment must be installed under an STC or Engineering Order.
FLT 7.04.01
Geophysical equipment can often invalidate the aircraft’s certification basis due to
the modifications required to the basic aircraft design. Where geophysical equipment
is fitted, it is critical that the certifying authority undertakes the modifications in
Page 144
 accordance with approved engineering data; either an STC or through compliance with a
specific Engineering Order (EO).

The aircraft operator and/or approved maintenance organization must be able to provide
a copy of the applicable STC or EO for review. Inspection of the aircraft should confirm
that any modifications have been completed in accordance with the applicable STC/EO.

33.5: Radar Altimeter

Equip the aircraft with either a dual output radar altimeter or two independent radar FLT 7.04.03
altimeters, fitted with visual and aural height warnings, and with a variable height alert
that can be set by the crew.

All geophysical survey aircraft must be equipped with at least one radio altimeter
(single-pilot operation) or with two independent radio altimeters or dual displays
(two-pilot operation), with audio and visual alert both of which must be serviceable
for any flight. This requirement supersedes what may be outlined in the regulatory
approved MEL.

The aural alerting function of the radio altimeters provides an additional awareness
capability and should be used as a last line of defence to prevent a Controlled Flight Into
Terrain/Water (CFIT/W) accident.

The aircraft operator must document in the Operations Manual or MEL, a requirement
for the radio altimeter systems to be serviceable at the time of dispatch for any survey.
Aircraft operator procedures should include the requirement for setting any aural alerting
systems on the radar altimeter and the procedures to be followed in the event of an
unexpected alert.

Aircraft records and Maintenance Release documentation can confirm compliance with
these documented requirements.

33.6: Securing Cockpit Equipment

Any additional cockpit instrumentation (such as course deviation indication and/or
heads-up instrumentation) must be properly secured and not obstruct the crew
field-of-view. Instrumentation that requires input from a crew member must be within
easy reach and within the normal operating field of vision.

Inspection of the aircraft is more likely to occur as part of the Operational Review
process, but may be undertaken during the BARS audit if a representative aircraft
is available.

33.7: Aircraft Heater

The use of an aircraft heater must not be restricted for crew use in the interest of FLT 7.05.02
‘clean’ data.

The aircraft operator must document in the Operations Manual that use of the heater is
unrestricted throughout the flight envelope associated with survey operations.

Page 145
 34.0: Survey Towed Device

Lifting equipment fails and the survey load drops to the ground causing
an accident

34.1: Helicopter External Load Requirements

Helicopter external load equipment such as towed arrays must follow all requirements
contained within Appendix 4.

Complying with the requirements applicable to External Load Operations will ensure that
all equivalent Controls and Defences are in place for this type of survey work.

34.2: Weak Links

MNT 7.04.04 Where a survey device is towed, install an approved weak link in the line that is
certified for the purpose by the applicable regulatory authority and/or approved design/
manufacturer facility.

For helicopters the weak link must be positioned at the hook end of the cable near the
helicopter. For aeroplanes it must be located near the device since it is winched in and
out of the aircraft.

The device’s data cable must be fitted in a similar manner with a suitably frangible link
that releases from the aircraft when subjected to half the total mass of the towed device.

The weak link is a critical component of the towed array. In the event of the array
snagging, the weak link should fail, separating the array from the aircraft and permitting
safe flight away from the impact zone.

Inspection of the array is more likely to occur as part of the Operational Review process,
but may be undertaken during the BARS audit if a representative sample is available.

34.3: Inspection Program

MNT 7.03.01 A documented inspection program approved by the Original Equipment Manufacturer
MNT 7.04.05 (OEM) and/or design authorities must incorporate the following requirements:
•A
 ll certification and design approval authorities (basis for design) of the equipment
and devices;
•P
 re and post flight inspections documenting serviceability of all cables, shackles,
survey devices, attachment points and associated hardware;
•M
 aintenance procedures for part damage and/or wear including all relevant part
numbers and critical design specifications of the device;
• E mergency actions in the event of device load-bearing failure or ground vegetation
contact; and
• F ailure modes of the load-bearing device and any associated aerodynamic effects.

All survey equipment (cables, lines, straps, swivels, etc.) must be inspected by qualified
personnel daily prior to the flight. Any signs of wear, fraying, corrosion, kinks or
deterioration must result in the equipment being withdrawn from use.

Page 146
 To supplement the certification process, a daily inspection by qualified and trained
personnel such as the Pilot or Load Master, conducted in accordance with all OEM
requirements will assist in mitigating the risk of equipment failure. Qualified personnel
can include personnel trained by the aircraft operator, external load specialists or
through accepted industry training programs. Early detection of impending equipment
failure will ensure that defective equipment is removed from service and returned for
repair or discarded.

All survey activities, schedules and plans must allow adequate time for the aircraft
operator’s personnel to perform all necessary checks on survey equipment prior to the
day’s tasking.

The aircraft operator must document in their Operations Manual and SOPs that all survey
equipment is subject to a daily serviceability inspection by qualified personnel prior
to use. Such procedures must clearly state requirements for the removal of equipment
from service if found to not be in a fully serviceable condition. Associated records
must confirm that requirements for daily inspections of lifting equipment are being
appropriately carried out.

34.4: Sling Equipment

All slings must be made up of serviceable cables that are inspected in accordance with
MNT 7.04.05
a servicing schedule. Current and traceable load test certifications for each cable must
be documented. Each cable or cable assembly must have a swaging collar or other
appropriate permanent marking to indicate length, diameter and rated strength of
the item.

(See Control 34.3 for additional explanation.)

34.5: Synthetic Cables

Synthetic cables may be used if the operator can demonstrate that the cables do not
exhibit excessive stretch when under load and are sufficiently weighted to ensure they
do not interfere with the aircraft control surfaces or main/tail rotor at any time.

Page 147
 35.0: Survey Flight Operations

Flight operations outside a safe envelope places the operation at

increased risk of Loss of Control In-Flight (LOC-I) or Controlled Flight
into Terrain (CFIT)

35.1: Minimum Survey Heights

The survey height is defined as the height above obstacle level, such as the top of a
FLT 7.05.03
jungle canopy in a tropical environment or ground level in desert conditions. Where the
ORG 3.04.06
survey height is nominated below 100 meters for aeroplanes, 60 meters for helicopters or
50 meters for a towed object, approval must be based on a risk assessment and agreed
by all parties.

The accompanying risk assessment should document the survey height and the
mitigating factors taken into consideration. The risk assessment should be available for
review by the Competent Aviation Specialist as part of the pre-survey review process.

35.2: Transit Altitude

Transit altitude must be above 500 feet above ground level.
FLT 7.05.04
ORG 3.04.06 The accompanying risk assessment should document the survey transit altitude and the
mitigating factors taken into consideration. The risk assessment should be available for
review by the Competent Aviation Specialist as part of the pre-survey review process.

35.3: Survey Speed – Fixed Wing

For all fixed wing aircraft the minimum safe survey speed must be calculated using the
FLT 7.05.05
greater of:
ORG 3.04.06
• 130% of clean stall speed (VS);
• 110% of best single-engine rate of climb speed (VYSE) if applicable; or
• Minimum safe single-engine speed (VSSE) if published.

Minimum speeds must be adhered to regardless of turbulence, gusts or when trading

speed for altitude.

Aircraft performance and the ability to out climb obstacles and terrain is directly related
to the excess power available to the aircraft. When airspeed is reduced, so is the
available lift. Providing a suitable safe margin above the minimum control speeds stated
above ensures that sufficient performance margin is available to clear obstacles or
terrain under both normal and OEI conditions.

The aircraft operator must document in the Operations Manual the minimum speeds
applicable to the varying aircraft in the fleet with the appropriate survey equipment
installed. The Operations Manual should be checked during the BARS audit to ensure
that the required speeds have been nominated.

Page 148
35.4: Survey Speed – Rotary Wing
With the exception of take-off and landings, helicopters must minimize flight inside
FLT 7.05.06
the avoid curve of the published height velocity diagram, or below single-engine
ORG 3.04.06
fly-away speed for multi-engine helicopters. Where operations in this flight regime
are unavoidable due to the type of survey and equipment, conduct a risk assessment
including an assessment of the terrain.

Operations inside the avoid curve provide no guarantee of a safe outcome in the event
of an engine failure. Time in this region should be minimized to provide minimum
exposure time to an adverse outcome. Where the drag coefficient provided by the survey
equipment means that extended operations in the avoid area are necessary, conduct
a risk assessment to determine if the risk is acceptable to both the company and the
aircraft operator.

The accompanying risk assessment should document the avoid area and the mitigating
factors taken into consideration. The risk assessment should be available for review by
the Competent Aviation Specialist as part of the pre-survey review process.

35.5: Turning Radius

Limit turns at low-level to a maximum angle of bank of 30 degrees and conduct them at FLT 7.05.07
a constant altitude. If the aircraft must climb due to the surrounding terrain, it should
climb to the required height prior to commencing the turn. Descent back to survey height
must only occur after wings level attitude is established.

Surveys are typically flown as a series of parallel lines with a 180-degree turn to
reposition the aircraft in preparation for commencement of the next line. To avoid
excessive bank angles and subsequent loss of lift at low level, bank should be limited to
30 degrees. If the terrain requires an increase in height, the aircraft should be climbed to
the required height prior to commencement of the turn.

The aircraft operator must document in the Operations Manual the maximum
30 degree bank angle applicable during survey operations. The Operations Manual
must also specify the need to climb to a constant height above terrain/obstacles before
commencing the turn to the new line.

35.6: Night Instrument Flight Rules (IFR)

All night surveys must be conducted in accordance with all night, IFR requirements
detailed in this Standard.

Night surveys by their very nature are a higher risk proposition that day surveys. They
must always be flow at or above the applicable safety altitude and follow full IFR
requirements.

The aircraft operator must document in the Operations Manual the minimum altitudes
applicable to night survey operations and that the conduct of such flights must be in
accordance with full IFR procedures.

Page 149
 35.7: Minimum Temperature
FLT 7.05.08 The minimum ground temperature for operations must be -35 Degrees Celsius.

Long term exposure to extreme cold conditions produces an equivalent response to

fatigue in the human being. In order to prevent the onset of fatigue like symptoms,
ground temperature limits of -35 degrees C must be applied.

The aircraft operator must document in the Operations Manual a minimum ground
temperature of -35 degrees C.

35.8: Monitoring Radios

FLT 7.05.09 Turn on radios during survey flights and select the appropriate ATC or area frequencies.

Monitoring of the correct ATC or area frequency will permit the flight crew to gain early
awareness of other traffic in the area as well as keeping track of SAR requirements.

The aircraft operator must document in the Operations Manual a requirement that radios
must be turned on and selected to the applicable ATC or area frequency during the
conduct of survey operations.

35.9: Offshore Surveys

FLT 7.02.03 Offshore surveys require additional controls. Include the following:
FLT 7.05.10 • HUET training for all crew in the preceding four years;
• T en hours of initial offshore survey training with a Pilot who has at least 100 hours
offshore survey experience;
• Five hours offshore survey time in the last 90 days, or flight check in lieu;
• Basic Instrument Flight techniques including Unusual Attitude recovery training;
• Minimum weather conditions of 5nm visibility and 1,000ft ceiling;
• Additional risk assessment (See BIG Vol 2 for details); and
• Satellite flight following with a minimum two minute reporting interval.

Offshore surveys are a higher risk proposition in a number of areas than over land
surveys. Surface glare, the lack of depth perception and lack of visual features can make
height control particularly challenging and the lack of change to the visual field can be
monotonous, particularly on long legs. These factors make a combination of VFR flight
and IFR techniques a probable outcome in many offshore surveys.

The aircraft operator must document in the Operations Manual the minimum
requirements stated above to ensure that the risk to safe operations is minimized.
A review of Pilot qualifications prior to the commencement of the survey should confirm
that the selected crew meet the minimum requirements.

Page 150
35.10: Performance Monitoring
Performance parameters including aircraft speed, height above terrain and drape must FLT 7.05.13
be periodically reviewed using data collected during the survey. Inspect deviations below ORG 3.04.06
minimum survey speed and minimum height. Take corrective actions to ensure deviations
cease and the minimum safety margins are maintained. Determine the frequency of
performance parameter reviews during the pre-start risk assessment.

A post flight review of flight performance will quickly and clearly identify whether the
minimum survey parameters are being complied with. Specifically, minimum heights and
speeds should be examined. The Performance Monitoring is a similar philosophy to the
Flight Data Monitoring programs run on airline fleets and it should be seen as a safety
improvement opportunity, not a reason to criticize a Pilot or their flying skills.

Post flight review reports should be available for inspection to confirm that minimum
survey parameters are being complied with.

Page 151
 36.0: Fatigue

Fatigued flight crew make a poor decision in the high workload

environment of low-level survey operations and this results in an
aircraft accident

36.1: Single-pilot Flight Time

In addition to BARS Control 1.8 and 1.9 (Flight and Duty Limits), limit single-pilot
FLT 1.04.05
operations to five hours per day on actual survey (transit time excluded).

Survey flight operations are more fatiguing than normal flight operations due to the high
levels of concentration required at all stages of flight. The higher levels of concentration
are necessary due to the low heights being flown, the presence of obstacles and the very
precise tracking requirements.

Compliance with the survey flight and duty times will minimize the possibility of
fatigue onset.

Resource sector aviation operations may result in flight crew conducting tours of
duty rotational in nature and extended in duration. In such circumstances, any flying
undertaken during the break time away from the touring location must be recorded and
the aircraft operator must be notified.

Details of the aircraft operator’s fatigue management program should be published in

the Operations Manual and be either specifically approved by the responsible regulatory
authority, or be in compliance with that authority’s fatigue management regulations. The
documented program should cover daily, weekly, monthly and annual flight time limits.

The aircraft operator should include details in their Operations Manual of the system to
be used for recording and tracking flight and duty times as well as rest periods. While
manual, paper based systems are acceptable, computer programs that comprehensively
track the varying limits and predict exceedances are the preferred option.

Flight and duty time records must confirm compliance with all requirements of the
flight time limits that are applicable the aircraft operator’s flight time management
program. The flight and duty time records that are maintained should be consistent with
information provided in other documents such as aircraft flight records.

36.2: Single-pilot Duties

The duties of the single-pilot must not be increased because of the absence of an
on‑board operator.

All survey operations are high-workload events. In order to share the workload, two
crew operations should be the norm. Where single-pilot operations are necessary for
payload/performance or due to system design, the risk assessment must consider all
facets of the operation that affect crew performance to ensure that the additional
workload for single-pilot duties does not increase the risk to an unacceptable level.

The aircraft operator should document the risk assessment and the factors taken into
consideration.

Page 152
36.3: Two-pilot Flight Time
In addition to BARS Control 1.8 and 1.9 (Flight and Duty Limits), limit two-pilot FLT 1.04.05
operations to eight hours per day on actual survey (transit time excluded).

Survey flight operations are more fatiguing than normal flight operations due to the high
levels of concentration required at all stages of flight. The higher levels of concentration
are necessary due to the low heights being flown, the presence of obstacles and the very
precise tracking requirements.

Compliance with the survey flight and duty times will minimize the possibility of
fatigue onset.

Resource sector aviation operations may result in flight crew conducting tours of
duty rotational in nature and extended in duration. In such circumstances, any flying
undertaken during the break time away from the touring location must be recorded and
the aircraft operator must be notified.

Details of the aircraft operator’s fatigue management program should be published in

the Operations Manual and be either specifically approved by the responsible regulatory
authority, or be in compliance with that authority’s fatigue management regulations. The
documented program should cover daily, weekly, monthly and annual flight time limits.

The aircraft operator should include details in their Operations Manual of the system to
be used for recording and tracking flight and duty times as well as rest periods. While
manual, paper based systems are acceptable, computer programs that comprehensively
track the varying limits and predict exceedances are the preferred option.

Flight and duty time records must confirm compliance with all requirements of the
flight time limits that are applicable the aircraft operator’s flight time management
program. The flight and duty time records that are maintained should be consistent with
information provided in other documents such as aircraft flight records.

36.4: Fatigue Management Considerations

Include fatigue management in the pre-start risk assessment to ensure appropriate
ORG 3.04.06
mitigation has been planned for. Consider the following localized influences:
• Crew rotation;
• Time zone changes during rotation travel;
• Extreme climate;
• Effect of altitude;
• Camp conditions; and
• Rest facilities.

The pre-start risk assessment must consider all of the above elements in order to fully
understand the factors that affect crew fatigue.

A copy of the risk assessment should be made available for review prior to
commencement of the survey operation.

Page 153
 36.5: Accommodation
ORG 3.04.06 Appropriate accommodation, including non-share single rooms when possible, must
be included during the pre-start risk assessment that covers fatigue management. The
risk assessment must cover the ability of flight crew to gain uninterrupted rest when
temperature, noise, darkness and any other applicable local conditions are considered.

The standard of accommodation has a direct bearing on the ability to rest well. Poor
accommodation standards, including twin share and non-temperature controlled, noisy
or poorly curtained rooms are a direct influence on the ability to achieve suitable rest.

The accommodation standard should be considered during the pre-start risk assessment
and if deemed necessary, subject to inspection. Where the selected accommodation does
not provide the necessary rest facilities, alternative accommodation should be sourced.

Page 154
37.0: Defences

Mitigating defences in the event of an accident during survey operations

37.1 Satellite Flight Following

All survey aircraft must be tracked during survey using a satellite-based tracking system FLT 1.12.05
set at two minute reporting intervals and which is continuously monitored on the
ground. Voice communications equipment must be available as back-up. If the satellite
tracking system fails, an alternate means of flight following must be established that is
acceptable to the aircraft operator and the company.

Satellite flight following equipment provides three dimensional coordinates of

appropriately equipped aircraft to authorized ground stations via an associated satellite
network. Aircraft GPS position information is transmitted to the satellite network
and relayed to ground stations where this information is represented real-time on
an internet-based graphical map showing the speed, altitude, direction and position
of aircraft.

Satellite flight following significantly reduces the time required to locate an aircraft and
respond to an emergency situation, in turn maximizing the chances of survival where
aircraft operations are conducted in hostile environments.

Where an aircraft operator has aircraft fitted with a satellite flight following system,
the operator should provide documented procedures for the system to be monitored by
designated flight following personnel, with no secondary duties, who if required, are
authorized and able to initiate the Emergency Response Plan.

The aircraft operator’s Operations Manual (or equivalent document) should contain
job descriptions that include the roles and responsibilities for these positions and the
training requirements for persons appointed to these positions. It should also contain
the process by which their ongoing competencies are assured. The documented
training requirements should adequately address management of the flight following
function in both normal and emergency operations. Where personnel associated with
flight following are to utilize radio communications equipment that transmits over the
aeronautical radio communication network, documented requirements must detail the
training and licensing that applies.

37.2: Local Flight Following

The aircraft operator must implement a flight following system for all survey flights that FLT 1.12.06
includes scheduled position reports, position logs maintained on the ground, operational
flight plans and overdue/emergency response procedures.

Flight following is normally a service provided by national air traffic control services
which focuses on providing information about passing and surrounding traffic. An added
benefit of the services provided is the monitoring of an aircraft’s normal operations and
the ability to initiate response actions in emergencies.

In situations where flights are authorized to be conducted without flight following being
provided by ATC, the aircraft operator must ensure that a system is in place for all such
flights. The system must closely monitor the safety and progress of flights and initiate
the ERP in the event of an emergency situation developing or communications being lost. Page 155
 Where an aircraft operator conducts flights outside of controlled airspace or in locations
where they are not subject to any form of position reporting, the operator should provide
documented procedures that allow for such flights to be monitored by designated flight
following personnel. Persons who are responsible for flight following will be tasked with
no secondary duties and must be authorized, if required, to initiate the ERP and notify
relevant SAR authorities.

The aircraft operator’s OM (or equivalent document) should contain job descriptions
that detail the roles and responsibilities for these positions along and the training
requirements for persons appointed to these positions. It should also contain the process
by which their ongoing competencies are assured. Where personnel associated with
flight following are to utilize radio communications equipment that transmits over the
aeronautical radio communication network, documented requirements must detail the
training and licensing that applies.

The aircraft operator’s documented SOPs provides for equipment requirements and
procedures that will ensure that constant radio contact can be maintained and that
routine position and altitude reporting occurs at intervals of 15 minutes, but not
exceeding 30 minutes.

37.3: Emergency Response Procedures

Emergency Response Procedures must be developed for each survey and be included as
ORG 3.04.06
part of the pre-start operational risk assessment.

Aviation accidents/significant incidents are rare events and despite the importance
of implementing immediate and positive action, evidence shows that very few
organizations are prepared when such an event occurs. Initiation of timely and
appropriate action is extremely critical in situations where delays or the implementation
of incorrect actions may affect the chances of someone’s survival.

People who have been involved in the immediate response to an aircraft accident
will readily agree that during the first few minutes (and maybe hours) events can be
confusing and chaotic. How an organization performs in the aftermath of an accident or
other emergency can depend on how well it handles the immediate response during that
time immediately following a major safety event.

Successful response to an emergency begins with effective planning. Both the company
and aircraft operator should develop documented ERP detailing what should be done
after an accident and who is responsible for completion of each action. The ERP provides
the basis for adopting a systematic approach to managing the organization’s affairs and
operations following a significant and unplanned event and should be practiced and
reviewed regularly.

The aircraft operator must document an ERP to provide instructions and guidance on the
duties and obligations of personnel following an accident or significant incident.

The company must document an ERP for each airfield they operate. An airfield ERP must
be appropriate to the aircraft operations and other activities conducted at that location
and should provide for the coordination of actions to be taken in an emergency at the
airfield or in its vicinity.

An ERP appropriate to the size, nature and complexity of the operations being
undertaken should be documented and available.
Page 156
 The ERP should adequately detail and provide for:
• A responsible and qualified person to lead the emergency response;
• The duties and responsibilities of key personnel in an emergency;
• Contact details for all relevant organizations and individuals including local search
and rescue (SAR) capabilities;
• Effective communication between the aircraft operator, company and SAR resources;
• A process for periodically checking and updating emergency contact lists; and
• Conducting periodic, scheduled emergency response drills, exercises and/or tests
(if the aircraft operator conducts offshore operations, it should ensure emergency
response drills include worst-case scenarios involving considerations such as last-
light, significant weather and the time taken to search for missing aircraft).

The documented ERPs for both the company and aircraft operator should provide
guidance to both organizations in pre-planning for emergencies, as well as detailing the
protocols that will ensure appropriate coordination between the company and aircraft
operator and other affected agencies.

37.4: Flight Crew Clothing

All crew must wear appropriate clothing for survey operations including:
• Non-synthetic long trousers and long sleeved shirt or appropriate flying suit;
• Cotton undergarments;
• Robust, enclosed shoes; and
• Access to felt lined parka, hood and mittens (for cold weather operations).

Appropriate clothing will minimize the risk of injury from fire and maximize survival
opportunities.

While the level of comfort is a consideration for flight crew during survey operations,
what is being worn on a flight can significantly affect the chances of surviving an
emergency where the aircraft may be required to make an emergency landing.

To maximize the chances of surviving an emergency landing, survey crew must be

required to wear clothing and footwear appropriate to the environment being flown over,
based on a risk assessment. At a minimum, the above items must be worn.

The aircraft operator’s Operations Manual should specify the minimum clothing standard
and the start-up Operational Review should verify that the appropriate clothing standard
is in place.

37.5: Crew Helmets

When routinely operating below 500 feet above ground level flying helmets
ORG 3.04.06
manufactured to appropriate industry standards must be worn by all crew members
FLT 7.05.11
(unless a risk assessment states otherwise).

Helmets provide protection to the head and assist in combatting two different types of
emergency; protection from a penetrating birdstrike and protection during a crash event.
Helmets should be industry standard, equipped with a visor(s) and provide support for
radio telecommunications equipment.

The aircraft operator’s Operations Manual should specify the minimum helmet standard
and the start-up Operational Review should verify that the flight crew are wearing as
appropriate standard of helmet. Page 157
 37.6: Survival Pack
Carry a survival pack for all survey flights which is suited to the operating environment
MNT 7.01.01
and includes a means to start a fire, a knife and a signaling mirror.

The ability for a search and rescue response will vary, and will always be affected by
variables such as weather, availability of resources and time of day. Because of this every
flight should be considered as a potential survival situation requiring survival equipment
appropriate to the location and climate.

The aircraft operator will have a documented procedure specifying what requirements
are to be contained in a survival kit if requested by the BMO or when required by the
responsible regulatory authority. Where a survival kit is not routinely carried on an
aircraft, the aircraft operator should have a documented procedure to be followed in
circumstances where the fitment of survival kits is required. The condition and content
of a survival kit should either form part of the System of Maintenance or be tracked and
inspected using an equivalent process.

The content of the survival kit should be described in the aircraft operator’s
documentation and must be applicable to both the seating capacity of the aircraft to
which it is fitted and the geographic and/or hostile environment where operations are to
be undertaken.

37.7: Life Jackets

Life jackets must be worn by all crew members if the survey is being conducted beyond
FLT 7.05.12
autorotative or gliding distance from land.

Life jackets are an essential survival tool in any ditching scenario. Life jackets come in
many sizes, shapes and standards and it is important that life jackets of an appropriate
standard, manufactured to meet strict TSO requirements are in use.

Crotch straps prevent the life jacket from riding up over the survivors in the water,
thereby reducing the risks of fatigue and/or drowning and are therefore a minimum
requirement.

Spray hoods are a requirement as they provide an effective method of preventing

progressive drowning from wind induced spray and waves relentlessly pounding a
survivor’s face.

Other items that should be carried on life jackets include:

• A life line to enable survivors to tie themselves together;
• A light to attract attention, preferably a strobe light;
• A whistle to enable survivors to locate each other;
•A
 grab handle to enable rescuers to more easily bring survivors into a rescue craft; and
• Reflective tape to improve visibility to rescuers at night.

Crew members’ life jackets should also include a PLB with a voice capability and day/
night flares.

Aircraft operators must provide an appropriate standard of life jacket. Crew training,
operating procedures and the System of Maintenance should all reflect employment of
this capability.

Aircraft operator reviews should confirm that the life jackets are provided and that they
Page 158 are well identified and included on the passenger briefing video/brief and the passenger
safety cards.
37.8: Liferafts
Provide dual chamber, reversible, liferafts for all crew members if the survey is being
MNT 7.04.07
conducted beyond autorotative or gliding distance from land. Liferafts with a canopy and
inflatable floor are preferred.

A ditching scenario ideally allows the occupants to be able to enter liferafts whilst the
aircraft is still afloat. Once all occupants are aboard, the tethers should be cut with the
special knives provided in the raft kits and the liferafts moved away from the aircraft in
case it sinks. The tether should incorporate a “weak link” so that if the aircraft does sink
before the tethers are cut, the liferafts can disengage and not be dragged down with it.

Acceptable liferafts should be self-righting (always floating correct side up) or reversible
(either side is acceptable when first entering). Either liferaft type will avoid the problems
of survivors unsuccessfully attempting to flip a liferaft in high sea states or high
wind conditions.

Offshore survival kits including signaling devices should be carried in the liferafts and are
typically tethered to the liferaft by a lanyard.

Each aircraft used offshore should have a clearly marked location for storage of the
liferafts that complies with standard restraint criteria.

Liferafts will have raft equipment and survival kits, with contents approved by an
aviation specialist.

37.9: Underwater Escape Training

All flight crew must complete a HUET course that includes the use of a Modular Egress FLT 7.02.02
Training Simulator (METS) at least every four years, unless local regulation requires
greater frequency or an established internal variance process has been approved.

Having the knowledge and skills necessary to assist with survival in a ditching scenario,
significantly increases the chances of surviving such an emergency situation. HUET
courses will increase an individual’s knowledge of safety procedures and ability to
successfully exit an actual ditching involving a submerged aircraft or helicopter.

The ability of a METS trainer to submerge, and then roll inverted, provides a very
realistic training environment and is the minimum standard considered acceptable for
offshore operations.

HUET training should be representative of the escape paths and exit types for the aircraft
or helicopter model being flown. HUET training facilities that can replicate spray/wave
and day/night conditions are preferred.

The company and aircraft operator must have documented policies that require all flight
crew involved in offshore operations to undertake an accepted HUET course. This must
be an element of their initial training for offshore surveys and be repeated every four
years (or more frequently if required by the responsible regulatory authority).

Associated training records must confirm that the documented requirements, processes
and procedures associated with the company’s and aircraft operator’s HUET program are
being complied with consistently in initial training and on a routine basis. Personnel files
and rostering records confirm appropriate implementation of training programs.

The aircraft operator should have a process to confirm current HUET credentials prior to
Page 159
assignment to an offshore survey role.
 37.10: Flight Crew PLB

FLT 7.05.14 Flight crew conducting surveys in hostile environments must carry a voice-capable
GPS Personal Locator Beacon (PLB) and any other necessary survival equipment on
their person.

The requirement for survey flight crew to carry a voice-capable PLB as mitigation
addresses several lessons learned from resource sector accidents:
• Back-up source of location in the event the ELT does not activate;
• T he ability to communicate to searching aircraft to assist in locating survivors.
This is particularly important in a jungle environment where the overhead canopy
may prevent the searching aircraft from visually identifying the survivors below; and
• T he ability to communicate the condition of the survivors to the searching aircraft,
and whether there is a requirement to winch the critically injured out prior to last
light before a ground party can reach the accident scene.

The requirement to have the PLB carried on the person is to maximize the opportunity of
its use in any accident scenario. Where the aircraft operator elects to carry voice-capable
PLBs in the cockpit, but not as part of a flight crew survival vest, a risk-based discussion
demonstrating an equivalent level of capability should be documented and available to
the company.

Where an aircraft operator undertakes helicopter operations in hostile environments, the

Operations Manual should contain requirements for flight crew to carry a voice-capable,
GPS PLB on their person.

Maintenance records should detail the completion of serviceability testing and

maintenance procedures of beacons fitted to survival vests.

The aircraft operator should maintain registration documents for each beacon that show
that appropriate identification and contact details are up to date and correct.

Page 160
4 SHORT-TERM OR EMERGENCY-USE AIRSTRIP
OPERATIONS

Aerodrome requirements outlined in the BAR Standard are considered

appropriate for long-term (greater than six months) facilities
owned and/or operated by companies and are associated with
production operations
This section is aimed at addressing short-term and emergency-use only airstrip
requirements, where it is not generally practical or possible to impose the higher level
of requirements that exists for regular use aerodromes. This guidance is aimed at those
owned and operated airstrips supporting exploration and construction operations, or
airstrips whose sole purpose is for emergency medical evacuation (medevac).

This section is provided as a minimum standard for such airstrip operations that have the
following characteristics:
• Owned and/or operated by the company, supports exploration and/or short-term
construction and/or emergency use;
• For use during day, visual operations for passenger, freight or aerial work;
• Night, visual operations for emergency medevac only (See Section 5.6 for
lighting requirements);
• Instrument approach procedures to a landing minima for the airstrip are
not available; and
• Aircraft used are limited to those less than 5,700kg maximum take-off weight, unless
reviewed as being suitable for the dimensions presented (for example King Air 350,
Twin Otter, Beech 1900).

The six critical controls associated with remote airstrip operations are:
1. Design
2. Obstacle clearance
3. Siting
4. Construction
5. Operations
6. Maintenance

Where the company is utilizing a government or third-party owned strip for short-term
purposes, this section is intended to provide a baseline for risk assessment purposes by
the company and aircraft operator.

Companies should conduct a thorough risk assessment dedicated to the design,

use and expectations of a remote airstrip supporting any resource sector activity.
The assessment must involve representatives from the aircraft operator likely to
use the airstrip, in addition to company and aviation specialist involvement.

The assessment should be conducted with sufficient time remaining for any actions
to be incorporated prior to operational start-up and first use.

Page 161
 4.1: Design of the Short-term Airstrip
Minimum airstrip design comprises six main elements to create a safe area for aircraft to
land, take-off, park and taxi (ground maneuver).
•R
 unway: the only part of the aerodrome on which aircraft can land and take-off. It
consists of a rectangle of land constructed or cleared to be a smooth, firm surface
of sufficient size to accommodate an operating aircraft;
•R
 unway Strip: this is the area surrounding the runway that acts as a buffer zone for
aircraft that may veer off the centerline, either while on the ground or in the air.
The surface of the runway strip needs to be smooth and free from objects sticking
into the air. The portion of the runway strip beyond the end of the runway is also
commonly known as the clearway;
• T axiway: this area provides a link between the runway and the apron. It is typically
constructed or cleared in the same manner as the runway;
•A
 pron: this is where aircraft park to board and de-board passengers, handle
baggage and freight, and for refueling. The apron is generally the same construction
as the runway and taxiway, although consideration may be given to increasing
the strength of parking pads due to the increased static standing loads of parked
aircraft. It also needs to be big enough for the number and type of aircraft which use
the airstrip;
•W
 ind Indicator: the wind indicator or windsock consists of a sleeve of conspicuous
color attached to a pole in a manner that enables it to indicate the wind direction;
and
• S ignal Circle: this is a small circular area near the wind indicator that is black and
marked with cones. In this area, signals to aircraft are positioned when airstrip
serviceability is compromised.

Airstrip Dimensions

Page 162 Figure 1: Geometric layout of short-term or emergency use airstrip.

 The above facilities should meet standards relative to the size of the aircraft which use
the airstrip. While standards vary according to different systems of categorizing aircraft
(for example the ICAO code reference system), the following dimensions are offered as
a guideline for aircraft operating in the ICAO Aerodrome Reference Code 2 classification
(e.g. Beechcraft King Air 200, DHC-6 Twin Otter, Cessna 441 Conquest, etc).

Airstrip Facility Dimension

Runway
Length (m) 1,200(m)
Width (m) 23(m)
Turning Node (mxm) 25x25(mxm)
Runway Strip
Length (m) 1,320(m)
Additional Length at each end (m) 60(m)
Width (m) 80(m)
Taxiway
Width (m) 10.5(m)
Apron
Size (mxm) 30x50(mxm)

Aircraft of ICAO Aerodrome Reference Code 3 (e.g. Metro 23, Jetstream 31/32, etc.) may
require a larger runway to support their operations.

Companies should consult with the aircraft operator and/or aviation specialists
prior to contracting a specific aircraft type or proceeding with airfield construction.
This will ensure all relevant factors are considered.

4.2: Obstacle Clearance

In addition to physical aspects of the airstrip, obstacle clearance requirements from the
end and the sides of the airstrip should be considered during airstrip siting and be met
during construction and maintenance. The prescribed areas should aim to be clear of
objects that project higher than the clearance surfaces.

These clearance areas project out from each end and from the sides of the runway strip.
The take-off/approach areas (TOAA) protect the aircraft during climb-out and approach.
The transitional areas protect aircraft that deviate off the runway centerline.

Page 163
 Take-off/Approach Area Dimensions

Figure 2: Take-off/approach area (TOAA) schematic.

Transitional Area Dimensions

Figure 3: Transitional area schematic.

Page 164
 Much like the physical design standards, obstacle clearance requirements vary depending
on aircraft size and performance capability. The following table sets out minimum
clearance standards for the typical aircraft used:

Clearance Area Schematic Requirement

Take-off/Approach Areas
Inner Edge (m) A 80m
Divergence (%) B 10%
Length (m) D 2,500m
Gradient (%) E 4%
Transitional Areas
Gradient (%) F 20%
Final Height (m) G 45m

Objects above 45m outside of these areas and within 2.5km of the airstrip also need to
be identified for marking and/or lighting.

4.3: Airstrip Siting

Using the above dimensions as a template, siting an airstrip must consider the following:
• Prevailing wind direction: the runway should be aligned, as much as possible, to the
dominant wind direction;
• Surrounding terrain and other potential obstacles:
– obstacle clearance requirements must be met according to the standards set out
above;
– power line and radio antenna location require special consideration;
• Surface characteristics:
– natural surface qualities such as strength, smoothness and slope should be
considered prior to construction;
– areas with effective drainage, gentle and consistent slopes and surfaces that are
capable of withstanding regular traffic should be assessed;
– sandy and rocky surfaces as well as those surfaces that becomes slippery when wet
should be avoided;
• Proximity to mining operations:
– the airstrip should be located in a position where mining operations will not impact
on aircraft safety and vice versa;
– the take-off and approach tracks must be clear of mining activity, with particular
consideration given to any blasting activity that may produce fly rock; and
• Site access: safe and efficient access to the airstrip is critical, especially in an
emergency situation.

Page 165
 4.4: Airstrip Construction
Construction of the airstrip will involve clearing, shaping land and installing markers as
a minimum standard. Optional work may include constructing a pavement and installing
lights if the airstrip must be used for night medevac flights.

The construction of each area should meet the following requirements.

Runway

The runway should be cleared, made smooth and sloped to promote drainage of surface
water. The objective of the runway is to consistently support aircraft movements.

A central crown is preferred although a cross-fall within the limits detailed in the table
presented at the end of the section is also permitted. A cross-fall is when the slope of
the runway (or road) surface falls from one side to the other rather than falling away
from the center. Longitudinal slopes should also remain within these limits and abrupt
changes must be minimized.

While natural surfaces can accommodate smaller aircraft, a constructed surface can
improve operating condition and resistance to weather.

For dry-land-based runways, gravel pavements provide good support and should consist of a
mixture of stone sizes no larger than 25mm with fines/dust such that a tightly bound surface
results. Sealing the runway surface is also an option to provide wet weather capability.

For other types of runway surfaces (for example, ice or lake-bed), a suitably qualified
airport engineer should be engaged to assess the natural surface and provide advice on
constructed pavements.

Regardless of the final surface, the runway should be free of defects that may impact
aircraft ride and controllability. Surface smoothness can be tested with a stiffly-sprung
vehicle traveling at speed (approximately 70-80km/h), if the ride is comfortable, the
surface is smooth enough for aircraft.

Page 166 Short-term airstrip operated by resource company

Runway Strip

The runway strip should also be cleared, made smooth and sloped to provide drainage.
The objective of this surface is to support aircraft in the event of it departing the runway.
The aircraft should come through such an event undamaged.

The transition from the runway to the runway strip should be near seamless with a
minimum drop-off from sealed runways to the runway strip. Wind-rows and subsidence
should be eliminated.

The shape of the runway strip should fall away from the runway within the limits outlined
below. Open drains should not be established within the runway strip and abrupt
changes in slope minimized.

Taxiway

Like the runway, the taxiway is a cleared, smooth and shaped area which is clear of
obstacles and capable of supporting the aircraft during taxi. Slopes should be within the
limits set for runways and special consideration should be made of runway strip slopes in
the vicinity of the taxiway.

Apron

Aprons are also cleared, smoothed and graded for drainage. Consider constructing an
apron of a suitable size, able to support the static loads of a parked aircraft and protect
propeller blades from stone damage when aircraft are stationary.

Airstrip Facility Requirement

Runway, Taxiway and Apron
Maximum Longitudinal Slope (%) 2%
Maximum Transverse Slope (%) 2%
Minimum Transverse Slope (%) 1%
Runway Strip
Maximum Transverse Slope (%) 3%
Wind Indicator
Height (m) 6.5(m)
Sleeve Length (m) 3.65(m)
Ground Circle Diameter (m) 15(m)
Signal Circle
Ground Circle Diameter (m) 9(m)

Wind Indicator

The wind indicator consists of a conspicuous color PVC sleeve attached via hinge to a
vertical pole according to the requirements below. The ground surface surrounding the
pole is blackened and marked. The wind indicator must be positioned such that it is
visible from the apron and runway ends.

Page 167
 Signal Circle
The signal circle is simply a blackened circle of the required diameter that is positioned
near (and typically on the runway side of) the wind indicator.

Obstacle Clearance Areas

Trees in the designated Obstacle Clearance Areas should be cleared such that obstacle
clearance requirements are maintained. The distance out from the runway strip that
clearing must extend will depend on the height of the trees and whether the ground rises
or falls from the runway.

Markers
All aircraft facilities must be marked in accordance with the following requirements:
If markers cannot be positioned flush with the surrounding surface, they must be
constructed of frangible material and are normally cone shaped. Markers will be either
white or yellow in color. Smaller cones are used on the runway and taxiway edges and
larger cones on the runway strip, apron, wind indicator and signal circle. The specific
dimensions are:
• Small Cones: 400mm base diameter and 300mm height; and
• Large Cones: 750mm base diameter and 500mm height.

These cones are laid out on the corners and along the edges of the airstrip’s facilities
as follows:
• Corners consist of an “L” pattern of five cones;
• E dges with markers spaced at 90m for runway/runway strip edges and 10m for
taxiway/apron edges;
• White cones are used on the runway and strip; and
• Yellow cones are used on the taxiway and apron.
Large white cones are also placed around the wind indicator and signal circle with
15 and six cones used respectively.

Remote Airstrip Marker and Signal Specifications

Page 168
Figure 4: Marker and signal specifications.
Remote Airstrip Marker Layout

Figure 5: Marker Layout.

Lighting

Lighting should only be used where night medevac operations are planned. The lighting
system should consist of a set of quality lights which are suited to the environment,
durable and colored as per below.

A network of discrete lights appropriately secured in place provides a good mix of output
quality and flexibility in design and maintenance. A fixed system with a ground wire fed
by mains or on-site generator should be designed and constructed to international or
local standards appropriate for larger aerodromes.

The basic guidelines for airstrip lighting are:

• Runway Ends: thresholds are identified by a pattern of six lights spread about the
runway centerline. The pattern consists of six bi-directional red/green lights with the
red lights facing the runway;
• Runway Edge: edge lights consist of white lights spaced 30m laterally and
approximately 90m longitudinally, although they must be evenly spaced from runway
end to end;
• Taxiway and Apron Edge Lights: these are blue lights spaced at 14m laterally and
approximately 10m longitudinally;
• Wind Indicator Lighting: The windsock must be lit by appropriate floodlighting; and
• Obstacle Lights: All obstacles above 45m within 4,000m of the airstrip should be lit
by steady red lights.

All light fittings in the runway environment must be frangible to avoid damage to the
aircraft in the event of runway/taxiway excursion.

Page 169
 Remote Airstrip Lighting Layout

Figure 6: Lighting Layout.

Fencing
Due to the risk to aircraft posed by wildlife, some form of airport fencing should be
installed unless a formal risk assessment dictates otherwise. The specifics of the fencing
will vary depending on the hazards present, but care must be taken to ensure the fence
does not infringe the obstacle clearance areas.

4.5: Airstrip Operations

Successful short-term airstrip operation depends on pre-flight airstrip inspections and
documented reporting of its serviceability. Flight monitoring, passenger control, weather
reporting and emergency response in varying forms will also need to be considered.

Pre-Flight Inspections
Prior to each aircraft movement, the airstrip should be inspected and confirmed serviceable.
The inspection should be conducted by a suitably trained person driving a vehicle to
assess the condition of the airstrip. The results of all inspections must be recorded in a
logbook or appropriate file. The airstrip inspection should review:
• T he runway surface to confirm that it is smooth and firm with minimal loose
material, no vegetation and no standing water;
• T he runway strip should be relatively smooth and firm with limited loose material,
vegetation and standing water;
• T he taxiway and apron surfaces should be in a similar condition to the runway and
surface transitions observed to be within limits;
• Airstrip markers to ensure they are in position, visible and secure;
• Lights serviceability and availability (if applicable);
• The wind indicator to confirm serviceability;
• That the signal circle shows the airport’s current status;
• Obstacle clearances to ensure that they have not been compromised; and
Page 170 • T he presence of bird and/or animals and confirm that they do not pose a risk to
aircraft operations.
The following table outlines specific standards for surface serviceability:

Airstrip Facility – Inspection Item Required Standard

Runway, Taxiway and Apron
Surface Softness Vehicle ruts no greater than 25mm
Debris/Loose Material No greater than 25mm in diameter
Surface Defects No greater than 50mm wide and 25mm deep
Vegetation Nil
Standing Water Nil
Surface Roughness Comfortable @ 70–80km/h whilst driving
a vehicle (preferably 3-tonne)
Runway Strip
Debris/Loose Material No greater than 50mm in diameter
Surface Defects No greater than 80mm wide
Vegetation – should be no obstruction to If Lush – no more than 100mm high
markers or lights If Thin – no more than 250mm high
If Sparse – no more than 450mm high
Runway Surface Transition to runway strip No greater than 25mm drop

Surface Test
If conditions at the airstrip (recent rain etc.) indicate a strong likelihood that the runway
surface is unserviceable, the surface test exercise should not be attempted as it may lead
to long-term surface damage.
In marginal conditions, surface strength can be tested using a test vehicle (ideally, a
3-tonne truck) along a portion of the runway surface and checking the ruts left in the
runway. The areas selected for testing should be those most likely to degrade first.
The typical maximum rut depth is outlined in the table. However, care should be taken
when dealing with aircraft with small, high-pressure tires as the maximum rut depth may
be lower.
Other methods, such as dry-to-depth and Clegg Hammers/penetrometers may also be
used, and specialist advice should be sought to investigate use if required.
Unserviceability
When serviceability issues are encountered, the individual designated as accountable
for the airstrip should attempt to rectify the problem immediately. If rectification is not
possible and the issue is significant enough to warrant closure of the airstrip, the airstrip
must be marked as unavailable with a white cross in the signal circle and at each end of
the runway. The aircraft operator contracted to support the activity must be notified.
The white cross consists of two rectangles 6m x 0.9m secured to the ground.

Reporting
The condition of the airstrip should be reported (whether serviceable or not) to
the aircraft operator prior to any operation. This reporting should involve direct
communication, which can include phone calls prior to departure, or via air-band
radio to the Pilot prior to arrival. If fax or email is used for communication purposes,
a positive reply acknowledging receipt must be obtained by the individual sending the
serviceability report.

Page 171
 Annual Checks
Longer term airstrips (for example, emergency use airstrips supporting production
operations) should be inspected by a qualified person annually. This inspection should
involve:
• Checking the accuracy of aerodrome information provided to Pilots;
• L ooking into matters of a volatile nature, e.g. new obstacles or tree growth, changes
in the movement area or the marking and lighting of the movement area, as a result
of new aerodrome development;
• Inspecting matters that are subject to damage or deterioration;
•C
 hecking the competency of aerodrome personnel involved in safety functions, and
whether they are clear of their duties and responsibilities;
• Reviewing any concerns raised by the aircraft operator and Pilots; and
•R
 eviewing whether there is any deficiency in the day to day operation of
the aerodrome.

The output of this inspection should be a formalized documented report that: (1)
provides a clear status of the airstrip; (2) details any rectification works; (3) provides
succinct recommendations for improvement.
Flight Monitoring
Responsible personnel should be in attendance for all flights 30 minutes before the
scheduled arrival through to 15 minutes following departure.
Passenger Control
The airport officer, while in attendance, should monitor the activity of passengers and
intervene where safety is compromised. Access on the “airside” apron area should be
strictly managed and passengers escorted at all times.
Weather Reporting
Using appropriate weather equipment, the responsible personnel may be requested to
provide a weather report to incoming aircraft over the radio. It must be made clear what
the basis of this information is prior to the flight.
Emergency Response
The responsible personnel may be required to assist in and coordinate an emergency
response. The airport officer should be provided with appropriate tools, relevant
information and necessary training to carry out this task. They should also be supported
with appropriate procedures.
Responsible personnel located at the airstrip may be required to assist in and coordinate
an emergency response. Support must be provided in the form of:
• An up-to-date and current Emergency Response Plan;
• Crash Box (BAR Standard 12.13);
• Rescue Firefighting (BAR Standard 12.14);
• Communication (satellite phone or other); and
• Aircraft operator contact details (or ERP Bridging Document).

Page 172
4.6: Maintenance
Maintenance works should be carried out according to schedule and as the result of a
pre-flight inspection or annual check. These tasks will vary but may involve:
• Dragging unsealed surfaces to repair minor defects;
• Grading unsealed surface to repair larger defects (such as scouring);
• Slashing/mowing vegetation to ensure surface smoothness and marker/light
visibility;
• Cleaning markers and lights;
• Replacing broken markers, lights and worn windsocks;
• Repairing fences; and
• Clearing and trimming trees.

These works should be planned and conducted in a manner that does not impact on
aircraft operations. Works should be conducted outside of flight periods with the airstrip
marked as closed.

Page 173
 5 HELIPAD GUIDANCE

The helicopter operating area used for take-off and landing is a

critical control in the conduct of safe helicopter operations. Resource
companies will often become involved in preparing helicopter operating
areas for contracted service providers and it must be understood
that poorly designed and/or located helipads will contribute towards
the likelihood of a significant event occurring or the imposition of
operating restrictions.

Purpose

The purpose of providing helipad guidance is to assist both the aircraft operator and
the resource company in addressing the key threats that this control addresses in a
risk-based fashion.

Helipad Types

To assist in the risk-based approach, two types of helipads will be considered:

1. Manned helipads. Helipads typically in support of exploration fly-camps, fixed

facilities, production plants, fixed-base drill sites and static operational bases. Aircraft
operator and/or resource company personnel are based at this location and able to
receive and dispatch helicopter movements.

2. Normally Unmanned Helipads. These helipads are typically used in support of seismic,
exploration, stream sampling, community support, wildlife support and other ad-hoc
requirements. Personnel are not normally based at these helipads and they are used
for short-term and ad-hoc requirements.

The delineation of manned and unmanned helipads assists when distinguishing the
differing equipment requirements supporting the helipad.

While the guidance contained within this section refers to onshore helipads, all offshore
helicopter landing areas should continue to refer to the relevant documents of ICAO
Annex 14 Vol 2 Heliports, UK CAP 437 Helideck Standards and ICS Guide to Helicopter/
Ship Operations.

Helicopter Performance Class

The Performance Class of a helicopter provides a definition around the performance

capability of the helicopter and in general provides a quick understanding whether:

1. The helicopter can fly away on one engine after the other engine has failed, or;

2. Whether it will have to land because the single-engine performance (or lack of two-
engines) means the aircraft cannot stay airborne under the Weight, Altitude and
Temperature combinations.

Page 174
The definitions are as follows:
• Performance Class 1. Operations with performance such that, in the event of
a critical engine failure, a helicopter is able to safely continue the flight to an
appropriate landing area, unless the failure occurs prior to reaching the Take-off
Decision Point (TDP) or after passing the Landing Decision Point (LDP), in which case
the helicopter must be able to land within the rejected take-off or landing area;
• Performance Class 2. Operations with performance such that, in the event of
a critical engine failure, a helicopter is able to safely continue the flight to an
appropriate landing area, unless the failure occurs early during the take-off
maneuvers or late in the landing maneuvers, in which case a forced landing may
be required; and
• Performance Class 3. Operations with performance such that, in the event of an
engine failure at any time during the flight, a forced landing will be required.
(JAR-OPS 3.480a)

Helicopter Dimensions

Key dimensions of the helicopter (including weights) are as follows:

• D Value – The largest overall dimension of the helicopter when rotors are turning. This
dimension will normally be measured from the most forward position of the main rotor
tip path plane to the most rearward position of the tail rotor tip path plane (or the
most rearward extension of the fuselage in the case of Fenestron or Notar tails);

• RD – The Diameter of the Main Rotor; and

• MTOW – The Maximum Take-Off Weight of the helicopter.

Rotor Diameter

‘D’ Value

Page 175
 A table of common resource sector helicopter weights and dimensions is presented
below:

Helicopter Type Rotor Diameter (m) D Value (m) MTOW (kg)

MD 500 8.10 9.40 1,361
Bell 206 series 10.16 12.11 1,451
Bell 206L series 11.28 12.91 1,882
AS 350 series 10.70 10.93 2,250
Bolkow Bo105 9.84 11.86 2,400
Agusta 109 11.00 13.04 2,600
MBB BK117 11.00 13.00 3,200
Bell 212 14.63 17.46 5,080
Bell 412 14.02 17.13 5,397
Mil Mi8/17 21.29 25.24 13,000

Figures provided as a guide only. Individual models may vary. Check with Aircraft
Operator for specific aircraft details.

Helipad Design

The purpose of the helipad is to provide an area suitable for the helicopter in use to
take-off or land. In addition to having suitable clearance, the area must be capable of
supporting the weight of the helicopter when on the ground and supporting the air-loads
encountered during hovering. The basic design will be influenced by the size and weight
of the helicopter, as well as the Performance Class. The key components of helipad
design and construction are presented in Table One and discussed in this section:

1. Helipad size 5. Rejected Area

2. Surface 6. Taxiways
3. Buffer Area 7. Parking Area
4. Approach and departure paths 8. Obstacle marking

Table 1: Helipad Design Requirements

1. Take-Off and Landing Area Size:

• Performance Class 1 helicopters – the take-off and landing area dimensions will
be defined in the Flight Manual. If not defined, the area should have a minimum
diameter of 1D; and
• Performance Class 2 and 3 helicopters – the take-off and landing area dimensions
should be a minimum of 1D for helicopters greater than 3,175kg MTOW and 0.83D
for helicopters of less than 3,175 kg.
(ICAO Annex 14 Vol 2)

Page 176
 Where space permits, a width of 2D should be considered. Helipads sited at high-
density altitudes may need a larger area to allow for the increased momentum and
reduced handling qualities in the event of engine malfunction.

Hint: If the approach and landing dimensions are based on the largest helicopter
type that is every likely to use the helipad, then all smaller helicopter types will
automatically be capable of utilizing the helipad.

Surface

The take-off and landing area surface must be:

• Level as possible, but not exceed 3% slope in any direction;
• Free from irregularities that affect operations;
• Strong enough to support the dynamic load of the helicopter; and
• Able to withstand rotor downwash and provide some ground effect.
(ICAO Annex 14 Vol 2)

In practice, dynamic load calculations should be based on 2.5 x the MTOW of the
helicopter to account for an emergency landing.

(CAP 437)

2. Buffer Area
A safety buffer area is also normally provided outside the take-off and landing area that
is clear of obstacles in accordance with the following:

• At least 3m or 0.5D from the edge of the take-off and landing area (0.25D is
acceptable for PC1 operations);
• Each external side of the buffer should be 2D where the take-off and landing area is
quadrilateral or be 3D diameter for circular take-off and landing areas;
• The edge of the buffer should be clear of obstacles to a distance of 10m rising at a
slope of 45 degrees from the edge of the buffer area; and
• If obstacles are required on the buffer area to manage risk (e.g. lights for night
operation), they should be less than 250mm high at the edge of the take-off and
landing area and not penetrate a plane that extends outwards rising at 5% slope.
(ICAO Annex 14 Vol 2)

Page 177
 Figure 1: Helipad Safety Buffer

Where practicable, an obstacle in the buffer area should not exceed 50mm.

(FAA AC 150/5390-2C)

3. Approach and Departure Paths

From a general design perspective, the helipad and the approach/departure paths should
be clear of persons, objects, animals and debris. In particular special attention should be
taken to ensure camp facilities, fuel caches and areas where personnel are working are
avoided. Normally two paths should be provided, not less than 150° apart. This will allow
for changes in wind direction to allow selection of the most appropriate landing and
take-off direction and additionally provide egress alternatives to the Flight Crew in the
event a landing needs to be aborted.

The Approach and Departure segments begin at the edge of the take-off and landing
area and should extend outwards from the take-off and landing area with a slope of 7.5°
(1:8 ratio) to 500ft elevation above the helipad.

Page 178
Figure 2: Vertical Approach and Departure Paths

The edges of the Approach and Departure segment should diverge at an angle of 10°
to a width of 4xRD for the largest helicopter in use.

(FAA AC 150/5390-2C)

Figure 3: Horizontal Approach and Departure Paths

Page 179
 In high Density Altitude areas, the approach and departure paths take on a more
critical role and should be a major consideration during the siting of the helipad.

Unless required to directly support the operation, personnel should remain a minimum of
30m away from the helipad in the course of operations.

4. Rejected Take-Off Area (or ’Flyway’)

For Performance Class 1 and 2 operations supporting manned helipads, a Rejected
Take-Off area (or ‘Flyway’) should be provided to provide an area where a departure can
be aborted in the event of an engine failure prior to safe single-engine fly-away speed.
The distance required for the flyway will vary depending on the ambient conditions and
the aircraft type. In those cases where the helipad forms part of the flyway, it will be of
a rectangular design.

In all cases the approach and departure paths should be aligned with the prevailing
winds as much as possible and should form a key part of the initial siting and design.
Correct design and construction of the flyaway areas will also limit the time where a
helicopter is exposed to the ‘Avoid Area’ of the Height/Velocity diagram.

5. Taxiways
If the final parking position of the helicopter is not co-located with the take-off and
landing area (e.g. where a flyway is used for take-off and landing, but parking is on a
separate designated helipad), then helicopter taxiways need to be provided. Taxiways
dimensions used should be based on the following:

Ground Taxi (using wheeled helicopters):

• Width not less than 1.5 times the wheel track; and
• Clearance from obstacles - 1.5 times rotor diameter.

Air Taxi (skid/wheeled helicopters):

• Width not less than 2 times wheel track; and
• Clearance from Obstacles 2 times rotor diameter.
(ICAO Annex 14 Vol 2)

Page 180
 Figure 4: Helicopter taxiways

6. Parking Area
The parking area should be a flat, level area of less than 2% slope and of sufficient
strength to support the static and dynamic weight of the helicopter. The area should
have a minimum of 1.2D of obstacle clearance and preferable 2D if turning is required
over the parking position.

(ICAO Annex 14 Vol 2)

Separation of passengers and cargo is also a necessary consideration.

Page 181
 Figure 5: Helicopter Parking Area

7. Obstacle Marking
For manned helipads, any obstacles in the area close to either the approach/departure
paths or the helipad itself should be painted in a high contrast paint scheme. The
preferred paint schemes are black and white, black and yellow or red and white, chosen
as necessary to provide the best contrast with the surrounding environment. Paint stripes
should be not less than 500mm thick and no more than 6m in length.

For night operations, a steady red obstruction light should be attached to obstacles
greater than 15m in height.

(CAP 437)

Siting Considerations

The site of the helipad should be selected in order to minimize the amount of obstacle
clearance required for the helipad and flyaway. It must take into consideration all
maneuvering requirements of the helicopter(s) being used.

Engaging the contracted aircraft operator and/or an aviation specialist is always

recommended at the siting stage for helipads.

Wind Indicator

A windsock should be provided for all manned helipads. Where the windsock is in place
it should be of sufficient diameter and length to indicate wind strength and direction. It
must be sited clear of the approach and departure paths, but be readily visible to Pilots
on approach and departure.

Page 182
Marking
For permanent helipads, see ICAO Annex 14 Volume 2 for the dimensions of required
markings including the perimeter and ‘H’.

Where regular passenger movements occur, a passenger walkway should be marked to

the take-off and landing area.

Unmanned helipads will normally not be painted, but should be easily identifiable.
Solutions include the cutting of grass to ground level, the placement of planks or logs in
the appropriate locations and the placement of appropriate sized flat stones/rocks.

Lighting

Lighting should be provided for night operations, with the following lighting standard
recommended:

• Take-off and landing area – on permanent helipads, green perimeter lights or

floodlights, adjusted so as not to dazzle the Pilots. If either of these light systems
is not practicable, either luminescent panels or segmented lights may be used. If
perimeter lights are in place, they should not be more than 1.5m from the edge of
the take-off and landing area and be spaced not more than 5m apart. For circular
take-off and landing area, there should be a minimum of 14 lights. For temporary
helipads, it would be normal to use portable battery powered lights to define the
take-off and landing area;
• Additional lighting should be provided unless the departure/approach and take-
off/landing areas are practically coincident. For quadrilateral shaped departure/
approach areas, there should be a minimum of four equally spaced white lights,
including one at each corner. For circular departure/approach areas, a minimum
of 10 white lights at a maximum of 5m spacing. Portable lighting is the norm for
temporary operations;
• Lead in lights (2 x green or 1 x white) should be provided along the axis of the
approach path if obstacles are likely to pose a collision risk on final approach; and
• If ambient lights make the heliport difficult to identify, a procedure should be in
place to extinguish these lights for night operations.
(ICAO Annex 14 Vol 2)

Construction

The construction of the helipad should be sufficient to support 2.5 x the maximum
weight of the helicopter to account for emergency landings.

Permanent helipads should be constructed of concrete or asphalt and be marked

with paint.

Temporary helipads may be sited on the natural surface, where this provides adequate
separation from obstacles and suitable access to the area.

Where either of the above issues is present, a platform helipad should be considered,
elevating the helipad above the local area. Platform helipads are normally constructed of
wood where the resource is available and would not normally exceed 0.5RD height above
the local surface, otherwise a loss of Ground Effect will occur. Timbers used in this type
of construction should be positioned with minimum gap to reduce the possibility of a
skid or wheel being caught in the gap.
Page 183
 Wooden helipads need to be closely monitored, particularly in tropical environments.
Both loss of surface friction and loss of structural integrity are major risks to safe
operations. Wood fungus and wood rot can be insidious and lead to helicopters sliding
off or breaking through affected helipads. Operators should thoroughly inspect and
consider these types of pads during their Operational Risk Assessment process and apply
operational restrictions as necessary.

The helipad surface should be as firm as possible and natural surface may need
reinforcing (timber, Marsden Matting, crushed rock, etc.) to support the skids or
wheels of the helicopter. The touchdown surface should be cleared for a minimum of
2 x the footprint of the helicopter.

Operations

If multiple helicopter operating areas are provided, the safety buffer areas must not
overlap if simultaneous operations are planned.

(ICAO Annex 14 Vol 2)

Fuel

Fuel equipment and storage should be protected from any flying shrapnel that may
be ejected during a helicopter roll over. Suggested separation distances are 50ft for
equipment and 100ft for fuel storage.

Hot refuel operations will trigger additional considerations (see BARS Control 3.6).

Sling Load Operations

Where the helipad is also to be used for sling load operations, additional clearances and
appropriate laydown areas will also need to be considered during the design phase. It is
critical that the Operator or aviation specialist is consulted to determine the minimum
design criteria they will accept for sling load operations.

Rescue Fire Fighting

Rescue Fire Fighting capability should be subject to a risk assessment.

(See BARS Defence 12.14).

There are a number of reference documents related to applicable fire fighting standards.
While the ICAO recommended Rescue and Fire Fighting (RFF) capability is based on the
length of the helicopter (see table below), this capability would only be expected for
consideration when supporting a manned helipad with continuous ongoing operations.
For short term operations (e.g. seismic campaigns) into unmanned helipads the same
solution is not practical.

The following guidance should be considered for manned helipads.

Page 184
Fire retardant should consider water and foam, plus one of the complementary agents
(Dry Chemical, Halon or CO2). An example of ICAO requirements is as follows:

Category Overall Water and Dry Halon (kg) CO2 (kg)

length of Foam (lt) Chemical
helicopter (kg)
H1 15m or less 500/250 23 23 45
H2 15-24m 1,000/500 45 45 90
H3 >24m 1,600/800 90 90 180

(ICAO Annex 14 Vol 2)

A crash box meeting the requirements of BARS Defence 12.13 should also be provided at
all manned helipads, as well as ready access for Emergency Response crews.

Maintenance and Management

All helipads should be effectively managed with an inspection and maintenance program
to ensure ongoing suitability for operations. Permanent concrete and asphalt helipads
require little upkeep, other than to ensure that markings and obstacles remain clear and
readable to support operations.

In tropical environments wooden helipads should be inspected more frequently to take

into account wood fungus and rot. A life limit may be appropriate and in some cases
have been known to be as little as three months. It is recommended that engineering
advice and the input from the helicopter operator be sought regarding construction and
ongoing structural integrity inspection requirements. Natural surface helipads should be
monitored weekly to confirm they are still suitable for ongoing operations.

Every helipad should have a single point of accountability appointed to oversee the
operation and serviceability of the helipad. This can be the resource company or the
helicopter operator. This single point of accountability should be responsible for the
conduct and upkeep of risk assessments, confirmation that the above requirements are
in place, and that an inspection schedule and associated record keeping is undertaken.

Medevac Helipads

The establishment of either permanent unmanned or the creation of an emergency

Medevac helipad is normally a consideration under the Emergency Response Plan.
Permanent unmanned Medevac helipads should conform where practicable to the
provided guidance. Emergency Medevac helipads should provide clear approach and
departure paths and a take-off and landing area that is of sufficient size to permit the
helicopter to come to a low hover or land. In such cases, obstacles need to be cleared
below the level of the rotor system and around the fuselage area.

Page 185
 6 BARS MEMBER Organization (BMO) –
RELEVANT CONTROLS

6.1: Company Awareness

Accident and Incident Notification

As part of their SMS, the aircraft operator must advise the company of any incident,
accident or non-standard occurrence related to the services provided to the company
that has, or potentially has, disrupted operations or jeopardized safety.

Operational Risk Assessment

Aircraft operators must conduct a risk assessment, including mitigation controls, before
commencing operations for any new or existing aviation activity. Contact the Flight
Safety Foundation for information on how to conduct a risk assessment.

Night Medical Evacuation (Medevac) Policy

When required for the operation, the company must consult with the aircraft operator
to develop a night Medevac policy. Flights should only be conducted in life threatening
situations and where stabilization until first light is not an option. The final decision must
be made by the Offshore Installation Manager (OIM) in consultation with medical staff
and the aircraft operator.

6.2: Airfield and Helipad Requirements

Airfield and Helipad Design

Where local guidance is unacceptable to the company, use ICAO Annex 14 Aerodromes,
Volume I (‘Aerodrome Design and Operation’) and ICAO Annex 14, Volume II (‘Heliports’)
for design considerations when constructing, or performing major rework, to permanent
long-term company owned and operated airfields and helipads supporting operations.

Consider prevailing winds and the location of mining/facility infrastructure in relation to

the proposed airfield or helipad departure and approach splays.

BARS Implementation Guidelines (BIG) Section 4 provides additional guidance for

short-term or emergency use airfields whilst Section 5 provides additional guidance for
helipad standards.

Airfield Inspections

In addition to reviews required by regulators, all company owned and/or operated

airfields must have an annual operational control and safety review conducted by a
company approved Competent Aviation Specialist.

Airfield Control

All company owned and operated airfields must have personnel who are responsible for
overseeing and managing the airfield and operating standards. Responsibilities include
having a basic understanding of the local aviation regulatory system, certification
requirements of the airfield and daily airfield reporting officer duties.
Page 186
Destination Weather Reporting

For company owned and operated airfields and helidecks, communicate the following
data to arriving aircraft by either an Automatic Weather Observation System (AWOS)
and/or trained weather observer:
• Wind direction and speed;
• Temperature;
• Barometric pressure; and
• Cloud ceiling height and visibility.

Maintain all equipment on a current calibration register.

Passenger Terminal Area

Company owned and operated airfields must have a waiting area for passengers offering
security, basic amenities, protection from the elements and a barrier from the aircraft
movement area. Incoming and outgoing passenger routes must be designated.

Designated Freight Area

Company owned and operated airfields, helipads and helidecks must have a designated
and secure freight area that provides a controlled environment clear of the aircraft
movement area and public thoroughfare.

Passenger Control

A designated Passenger Control Officer (PCO) or Helideck Landing Officer (HLO) who
is in a position to communicate with the crew at all times must control all passenger
movements to and from the designated aircraft movement area. The PCO can be
provided by the company or aircraft operator, and may be a crew member in a multi-crew
operation.

The PCO and HLO must be identified using a distinguishing vest if they are not a crew
member of the aircraft.

Parking Apron

For all company owned and operated airfields, the parking apron area must be assessed
by the aircraft operator as being suitable for their type of aircraft. Consider other
transient aircraft traffic, helicopter operations, refueling, and the Pavement Classification
Number (PCN). For long-term operations where practical, taxi lines specific to the
contracted aircraft type must be painted in the apron area for obstacle-clearance
maneuvering purposes.

Perimeter Fence

Construct a perimeter fence around all company owned and operated airfields to prevent
access by livestock, other animals and traveling pedestrians.

Page 187
 Airfield Bird Control

Conduct active bird control at all company owned and operated airfields when required
and record the presence of birds periodically. Where possible, birds are must be
dispersed or removed in accordance with local wildlife regulations. Seeding grass, open
waste disposal and water ponds must be restricted to remove attractions for birds.

Where bird activity exists, aircraft operators must minimize the risk of bird strike during
all operations.

Emergency Response Plan

All aircraft operations (including company owned or operated airports) must have an
Emergency Response Plan (ERP) commensurate with the activity undertaken that covers:
documented land-before-last-light limitations, exposure considerations, local Search and
Rescue (SAR) capabilities, and hazards associated with the surrounding environment.

The ERP must be exercised annually for all long-term operations and include a bridging
document detailing lines of communications between the company and aircraft operator.

Crash Boxes

Company owned and operated landing sites supporting long-term operations must have
a crash box accessible to personnel at the airfield or primary helipad.

Rescue Firefighting

All company owned or operated helipads or airfields must have a means of providing a
fire response capability commensurate with the potential risk. Personnel must receive
training on the equipment provided.

6.3: Definitions
Term Definition
Above Ground Level (AGL) The height above ground at any point over the Earth.
Above Mean Sea Level The height above a datum based on the average sea level
(AMSL) around the Earth.
Accountability The obligation or willingness to accept responsibility
for the execution or performance of an assigned
function, duty, task or action; implies being answerable
(i.e. accountable) to a higher authority for ensuring
such responsibility is executed or performed. May also
be a performance requirement (e.g. Single-engine
Accountability).
ACMI Aircraft Crew Maintenance and Insurance.
ADF Automatic Direction Finder.
Aerial work A commercial aircraft operation by aeroplanes or
helicopters where they are used for specialized services
and does not carry passengers.
Aeronautical Decision ADM is a structured process to assist a Pilot with the
Making (ADM) recognition and management of threats as they may arise
during flight.
AFM Aircraft Flight Manual.

Page 188
Term Definition
Air Operator Certificate A certificate issued by a responsible regulatory authority
(AOC) to permit the aircraft operator to conduct certain
commercial air service activities.
Air Transport Pilot Licence An ATPL is the highest category of Pilot licence. It is issued
(ATPL) by a responsible regulatory authority and authorizes the
user to act as Pilot in command of scheduled passenger
carrying services.
Airborne Collision Also known as TCAS
Avoidance System (ACAS) A system utilizing interrogations of, and replies from,
airborne radar beacon transponders and provides
information to the Pilot:
• TCAS I will provide traffic advisories to the Pilot; and
• TCAS II will provide traffic advisories and resolution
advisories in the vertical plane to the Pilot.
Aircraft movement area That part of an aerodrome to be used for the take-off,
landing and taxiing of aircraft, consisting of the runways,
taxiways and the apron(s).
Aircraft operator Refers to an aircraft operating company used to provide
aviation services.
AMO Approved Maintenance Organization.
Approach and Landing A toolkit developed by the Flight Safety Foundation
Accident Reduction in conjunction with industry to assist with flight crew
(ALAR) training for the prevention of accidents in this category.
Automatic Flight Control The AFCS is a system that integrates the flight director
System (AFCS) with the autopilot systems.
Automatic Weather An AWOS is a set of systems designed to autonomously
Observation System collect meteorological information and transmit this
(AWOS) information on a local frequency and/or transmit this data
to another location for collection and collation.
Autopilot (AP) A system designed to allow the aircraft to be flown
without the continuous intervention of the Pilot.
Auxiliary Power Unit A small gas turbine engine which is normally used to
(APU) provide air conditioning, electrical and hydraulic pressure.
The APU also provides high pressure air or electrical power
to start the engines. Most APUs can also be used in flight
to provide back-up electrical power in the event of an
engine failure.
Baggage Personal property of a passenger or crew member loaded
on an aircraft.
Basic Aviation Risk The Program managed by the Flight Safety Foundation on
Standard (BARS) behalf of subscriber BARS Member Organizations.
BIG BARS Implementation Guidelines.
BMO BARS Member Organization.
Bow mounted helidecks Helidecks mounted at the bow (forward) end of a vessel
such as a pipe layer, FPSO or seismic vessel.
Subject to larger PRH movement than helidecks mounted
at other locations on a vessel.
BPO BARS Program Office.
Bridging document A document agreed to between the contracting company
and the aircraft operator listing key personnel and contact
details of both parties.

Page 189
 Term Definition
Cargo Revenue and non-revenue movement of goods or property
not including accompanied baggage or mail.
Company material (COMAT) is considered to be cargo.
Center of Gravity (CofG) An imaginary point where the total weight of the aircraft
appears to be concentrated. The center of gravity changes
according to fuel, passenger and cargo load within various
locations of the aircraft.
Certified safe working The manufacturer's recommended maximum weight
load load for a line, rope, crane or any other lifting device or
component of a lifting device. The SWL is determined
by dividing the minimum breaking strength (MBS) of a
component by a safety factor assigned to that type and
use of equipment.
Clearway An area beyond the take-off area clear of fixed obstacles.
Cockpit Voice Recorder A device designed to capture and record voice and other
(CVR) sounds heard within the cockpit of an aircraft.
Cold weather environment Operations on the ground in freezing conditions where
surface snow, ice, standing water or slush may be ingested
by the engines or freeze on engines, nacelles, airframe or
engine sensor probes.
Commercial Pilot Licence A licence issued by the responsible regulatory authority of
(CPL) a country to permit the Pilot to undertake flying activities
for hire or reward.
Company Refers to the individual company using the BARS to
support their aviation operations.
Competent Aviation A company designated aviation advisor or Flight Safety
Specialist Foundation BARS accredited auditor.
Control Within the context of risk management: one or more
activities within a system designed to reduce the
likelihood or impact of a threat or error.
Controlled Flight Into An accident where an airworthy aircraft is flown into the
Terrain/Water (CFIT/W) ground or water.
Crew Resource A training course undertaken by flight crew, often
Management (CRM) involving cabin crew, focusing on crew coordination,
human factors and leadership training.
Crotch strap designs One or more straps incorporated into the lifejacket design
to prevent the lifejacket from riding up the body and over
the head of the wearer upon entry to the water.
Dangerous goods Articles or substances which are capable of posing a
risk to health, safety, property or the environment and
which are shown in the list of dangerous goods in the
Technical Instructions, or which are classified according
to those instructions.
Defence Within the context of risk management: one or more
activities within a system designed to mitigate the
consequences of a threat or error.
Deferred Defects Operation of the aircraft with specified unserviceable
systems or equipment under certain flight conditions or
operating limitations for a defined period.
Distance Measuring A navigation aid that provides information relating to
Equipment (DME) slant range distance from the aircraft to the DME aid.
Drilling Support Vessel A sea-going vessel (often with a large flat aft deck)
(DSV) which is used to support the activities of a drilling ship
or drilling rig.
Page 190
Term Definition
Duty time A period which starts when a flight crew member or cabin
crew member is required by an operator to report for or
commence a duty and ends when the person is free from
all duties.
Emergency Locator A generic term describing equipment which broadcast
Transmitter (ELT) distinctive signals on designated frequencies and,
depending on application, may be automatically activated
on impact or be manually activated.
Emergency Position Similar to an ELT but designed primarily for the maritime
Indicating Radio Beacon environment.
(EPIRB)
Emergency Response Plan A documented plan for systematic activities following an
(ERP) accident outlining the actions and responsible persons.
External loads A load that is carried or extends outside the aircraft
fuselage. Normally related to helicopters carrying
loads on flexible sling equipment from an external
hook arrangement.
Externally mounted For helicopter operations, external liferafts are those
liferafts which are mounted, attached or incorporated on the
external surface or fixtures of the aircraft.
Fatigue Management A data driven means of continuously monitoring
Program and managing fatigue-related safety risks, based on
scientific principles and knowledge as well as operational
experience, that aims to ensure relevant personnel are
performing at adequate levels of alertness.
Fixed reserve The amount of fuel calculated using the estimated landing
weight at the destination or destination alternate, to hold
for a specified time (normally 30 or 45 minutes) at 1,500 ft
above airfield elevation in standard conditions.
Flight Data Monitoring Also known as FOQA.
(FDM) A means of capturing and analyzing data obtained during
a flight, or series of flights, to aid in the identification of
undesirable operational trends.
Flight following A system of monitoring the movement of, and providing
communication to, an aircraft for the full duration of
the flight.
Flight Data Recorder (FDR) A device that records specific aircraft performance
parameters. Also known as a Digital Flight Data Recorder
(DFDR) or ‘black box’ the unit is painted bright orange in
color to aid in identification.
Flight Operations Quality Also known as FDM.
Assurance (FOQA) A means of capturing and analyzing data obtained during
a flight, or series of flights, to aid in the identification of
undesirable trends to prevent accidents.
Flight time The total time from the moment the airplane first moves
for the purpose of taking off until the moment it finally
comes to rest at the end of a flight.
For a helicopter this is from the moment the rotor blades
start turning until the moment the helicopter comes
to rest at the end of the flight and the rotor blades
are stopped.
Floating vessels A ship, rig or vessel either moored or unmoored on
the surface of the sea subject to pitch, rolling and
heaving movement.
Ships, drilling rigs, platforms and barges are included.
Page 191
 Term Definition
FPSO Floating Production Storage and Offloading units.
Geophysical Operations Aerial survey operations using either fixed wing or rotary
wing aircraft with fixed or towed array sensor equipment.
Global Positioning System A space-based satellite navigation system providing time
(GPS) and location information on or near the Earth.
Go-around A missed or baulked approach whereby the approach
to land is discontinued and the aircraft climbs to a safe
height in order to re-attempt the approach and landing.
Health and Usage A system designed to perform a diagnostic and prognostic
Monitoring System role of critical components through the gathering of data
(HUMS) using a variety of sensors.
Helicopter Emergency Exit Independent battery operated lighting system that
Lighting System (HEELS) illuminates the crew or passenger exits when water
immersion is detected.
Also called Helicopter Emergency Egress System.
Helideck A heliport located on a floating or fixed offshore structure.
Helideck Landing Officer A suitably trained and competent person appointed to be
(HLO) in control of helideck operations on the installation.
Helipad A landing site for a helicopter not associated with a vessel
or airport.
High Frequency Radio (HF) A radio communication system utilizing frequencies within
the HF radio band.
Hoist operations Winching or lifting of personnel or equipment to or from a
helicopter in the hover.
Hostile environment An environment in which a successful emergency landing
cannot be assured, or the occupants of the aircraft cannot
be adequately protected from the elements, or search and
rescue response/capability cannot be provided consistent
with the anticipated exposure.
Hot refueling The conduct of refueling the aircraft (or helicopter) with
one or more main engines running.
HUET Helicopter Underwater Escape Training.
Human factors Principles which apply to aeronautical design,
certification, training, operations and maintenance
which seek safe interface between the human and other
system components by proper consideration to human
performance.
Instrument Flight Rules A set of regulations under which a Pilot operates an
(IFR) aircraft in weather conditions unfavorable to flight by
reference to terrain or water. En route navigation aids are
used in lieu of visual references.
Instrument Landing An electronic system providing precise slope and
System (ILS) directional guidance to an aircraft conducting an approach
to an aerodrome in IMC conditions.
Instrument Meteorological A set of weather conditions that require an aircraft to
Conditions (IMC) be flown solely by reference to the aircraft instruments
navigated by reference to electronic navigation aids.
International Airborne An organization primarily representing aircraft operators
Geophysics Safety who perform airborne geophysical activities.
Association (IAGSA)
International Air Transport An international association representing the interests of
Association (IATA) commercial air carriers.

Page 192
Term Definition
International Civil An international body that is a part of the United Nations
Aviation Organization which establishes Standards and Recommended Practices
(ICAO) (SARPS). These SARPS are the basis of the aviation
regulations adopted by Member States.
Last light The end of civil twilight. See night flying definition.
LDP Landing Decision Point.
Lifting devices The line, swivel, shackles, D-rings, straps, nets, baskets,
welded lifting lugs, bags and anything used to secure or
support an external load.
Line check A regular check flight where the Pilot demonstrates
knowledge and experience in normal line operations.
Long line External Load operations utilizing a cable greater than
50ft (15.2m).
Long-term contract Any contract using dedicated aircraft for a planned
duration of greater than six months.
Lowest Safe Altitude An altitude that is at least 1,000 feet above the highest
(LSALT) terrain or obstacle within a defined area or region.
Marine Pilot Transfer Helicopter transfer of marine Pilots to or from a ship/
(MPT) vessel. Can involve either landing on the vessel or
winching of the Pilot to or from the vessel.
Medevac Medical Evacuation (Medevac) is a specific flight for the
purpose of retrieving a patient in medical distress from
injury or illness.
METS Modular Egress Training Simulator.
Minimum Equipment List A list which provides for the operation of aircraft (subject
(MEL) to specified conditions, with particular equipment
inoperative) prepared by an operator in compliance with,
or more restrictive than, the Master MEL established for
the aircraft type.
Missed Approach Point During the conduct of an instrument approach, the MAP
(MAP) is the latest point at which a Pilot must conduct a missed
approach if they do not become visual with reference to
the aerodrome.
NDB Non-Directional Beacon.
Night flying Flight operations during the hours between the end of
evening civil twilight and the beginning of morning civil
twilight or such other period between sunset and sunrise,
as may be prescribed by the appropriate regulatory
authority.
Night Vision Goggles A binocular appliance that amplifies ambient light and is
worn by flight crew. The NVGs enhance the flight crew’s
ability to maintain visual reference to the surface at night.
Night Vision Imaging A system that integrates all elements necessary to
System successfully and safely operate a helicopter with NVGs.
The system includes NVGs, NVIS compatible lighting and
other helicopter components.
Night Visual Flight Rules A set of regulations under which a Pilot operates an
(NVFR) aircraft in weather conditions favorable to flight by
reference to terrain or water at night.
Non-hostile environment An environment in which a successful emergency landing
can be reasonably assured, the occupants of the aircraft
can be adequately protected from the elements, and search
and rescue response/capability can be provided consistent
with the anticipated exposure.
Page 193
 Term Definition
OEM Original Equipment Manufacturer.
Official sunset The time that the surface of the sun disappears below
the horizon.
Offshore Flight operations to a floating rig, platform or vessel by
a helicopter.
Offshore only alternate An operational practice of declaring as an alternate, a
diversion helideck which is in an offshore location and not within
range of an onshore helideck.
One Engine Inoperative In relation to a multi-engine aircraft, the failure of an
(OEI) engine results in a thrust imbalance with performance
degradation.
Operations Manual (OM) A manual containing procedures, instructions and
guidance for use by operational personnel in the execution
of their duties.
PAPI Precision Approach Path Indicator.
Passenger Control Officer A trained and designated person responsible for the safe
(PCO) movement of passengers between the aircraft/helicopter
and terminal/safe area.
Pavement Classification A number expressing the bearing strength of a pavement
Number (PCN) for unrestricted operations.
Performance Class 1 Operations with performance such that, in the event of a
critical engine failure, a helicopter is able to safely continue
the flight to an appropriate landing area, unless the failure
occurs prior to reaching the take-off decision point (TDP) or
after passing the landing decision point (LDP), in which case
the helicopter must be able to land within the rejected
take-off or landing area.
Performance Class 2 Operations with performance such that, in the event
of a critical engine failure, a helicopter is able to safely
continue the flight to an appropriate landing area, unless
the failure occurs early during the take-off maneuvers
or late in the landing maneuvers, in which case a forced
landing may be required.
Performance Class 3 Operations with performance such that, in the event of
an engine failure at any time during the flight, a forced
landing will be required.
Personal Locator Beacon Similar in role and function to the ELT and EPIRB, the PLB
(PLB) is a small, hand-held emergency beacon normally carried
in either a flight crew vest or otherwise on the person.
Personal Protective Equipment worn or carried by the person to provide
Equipment (PPE) protection from natural or man-made environmental or
other factors.
Pilot-in-Command (PIC) The Pilot designated by the aircraft operator as being in
command and charged with the safe conduct of the flight.
POH Pilot Operating Handbook.
Proficiency check A regular check flight where the Pilot demonstrates
competence in normal, non-normal and emergency
procedures.
Pulse Lights A modification for existing landing light/taxi light systems
for aircraft which varies the intensity of the lights in a
predetermined sequence to improve collision and bird
avoidance.
Quality assurance A set of activities that are carried out to set standards to
monitor and improve performance so that the service or
Page 194 product provided will satisfy stated or implied needs.
Term Definition
Responsible regulatory The authority of a country designated to manage and
authority oversee compliance and safety of civil aviation.
Risk assessment A systematic and documented process of identifying
risks and mitigating actions associated with a
particular activity.
Rotor Running Load/ Loading or unloading of passengers or cargo/baggage
Unload with the helicopter main engines operating.
Route check A regular check flight where the Pilot demonstrates
knowledge and experience in an area or route and
its airports.
Safety Management A systematic approach to managing safety, including the
System (SMS) necessary organizational structures, accountabilities,
policies and procedures.
Search and Rescue (SAR) The search for and provision of aid to people who are in
distress or imminent danger.
Seat belt extensions Any method of extending the physical length of the
seat belt.
Shackles A ring or device used to connect the load (line) to the
hook (helicopter).
Short line External Load operations utilizing a cable less than 50ft
(15.2m) and shorter than the distance from the hook to
tail rotor.
Special VFR Procedures Meteorological conditions that are less than those
required for basic VFR flight in controlled airspace and
in which some aircraft are permitted flight under visual
flight rules.
Standard Standard means the Basic Aviation Risk Standard as issued
by the Flight Safety Foundation.
Stop way An area beyond the take-off runway able to support
the airplane during a rejected take-off without causing
structural damage to the airplane, and designated by
the airport authority for use in decelerating the airplane
during a rejected take-off.
Stretcher carrying The installation of a permanent or temporary stretcher
operations to the aircraft by an approved means to facilitate the
carriage of a non-ambulatory passenger.
Strobe Lights One or more flashing lights in aviation red or aviation
white fitted to the aircraft as part of the aircraft
navigation light system.
Sub Chartering The temporary use by the aircraft operator, of aircraft and/
(Cross Hiring) or crew from a different AOC holder to that which holds a
contract for the provision of aviation services.
Other terms such as Wet Leasing, ACMI are included in
this definition.
Supplementary Type A certificate issue approving the modification to
Certificate (STC) an aircraft.
TDP Take-off Decision Point.
Terrain Awareness A system designed to warn a flight crew when their flight
Warning System (TAWS) path may take them into proximity with terrain. Air traffic
control systems may be equipped with TAWS to warn the
controller when an aircraft’s flight path may take it into
proximity with terrain.

Page 195
 Term Definition
Traffic Collision Avoidance Also known as ACAS.
System (TCAS) A system utilizing interrogations of, and replies from,
airborne radar beacon transponders and provides
information to the Pilot:
• TCAS I will provide traffic advisories to the Pilot; and
• TCAS II will provide traffic advisories and resolution
advisories in the vertical plane to the Pilot.
Threat Source of risk that must be managed to maintain the
margin of safety.
Threat and Error A training program designed to educate students on
Management (TEM) aviation related threats and errors and associated risk
mitigation strategies.
Technical Standards Order A minimum prescribed standard for the performance and
(TSO) manufacture of parts and materials used in aircraft.
Ultra High Frequency A radio band used for two-way communications. Limited
(UHF) to line-or-sight communications.
Upper Torso restraint Aircraft seatbelts incorporating shoulder straps. Can be
either a three point, four point or five point harnesses.
Variable reserve An amount of fuel carried to account for unforeseen
factors that could have an influence on the fuel
consumption to the destination aerodrome.
Variations Any variation to this Standard is at the discretion of
each company.
It is recommended that each variation be assessed to
demonstrate that the risks associated with the variation
are tolerable and justify safe continuation of operations.
Vertical Speed Indicator A device that measures the rate of climb or descent of
(VSI) an aircraft.
Very High Frequency (VHF) A radio band used for two-way communications. Limited
to line-of-sight communications.
VHF Omni-directional A navigation system utilized by aircraft. Limited to
Range (VOR) line-of-sight reception.
Vibration Health A system designed to monitor and identify vibration
Monitoring System (VHM) trends that could assist in predicting the onset of
mechanical failure.
Visual Flight Rules (VFR) A set of regulations under which a Pilot operates an
aircraft in weather conditions favorable to flight by
reference to terrain or water.
Visual Meteorological A set of conditions where a minimum visual range,
Conditions (VMC) distance from cloud and height above ground can
be maintained.
VMCA Minimum Control Speed in the take-off configuration.
VNE Never exceed speed.
VS Stall speed or minimum steady flight speed for which the
aircraft is still controllable.
VSSE Safe single engine speed.
VY Best rate of climb speed.
VYSE Best rate of climb speed with a single operating engine
and a twin engined aeroplane.
V1 Decision speed on take-off.

Page 196
Copyright, Copying and Updates
BARS Implementation Guidelines Copyright 2014 by Flight Safety Foundation Limited (ABN 41 135 771 345) (“FSF Ltd”) a wholly owned
subsidiary of Flight Safety Foundation Inc. (“FSF Inc”), incorporated in the State of New York, USA.
A copy of the BARS Implementation Guidelines may be accessed on the BARS website: [Link]/bars
The BARS Implementation Guidelines may be copied freely, in its entirety or in part, provided all such copies include this copyright notice and
disclaimer in their entirety.
From time to time this BARS Implementation Guidelines may be updated. The website [Link] should be consulted to obtain the
latest updates.

Disclaimer
This BARS Implementation Guidelines is made generally available, with a view to raising awareness of safety and risk issues in respect of
aviation and associated operations in the resource sector and other sectors which use air operators. Any person involved in these operations
or sectors should not rely solely on this BARS Implementation Guidelines to manage risk, and must exercise their own skill, care and judgement
with respect to the management of risk and the use of this guide.
FSF Ltd and FSF Inc expressly disclaim any and all liability and responsibility to any person in respect of the consequences of anything done or
not done in reliance, whether wholly or in part on the Standard. In no circumstances will either FSF Ltd or FSF Inc be liable for any incidental or
consequential damages resulting from use of the Standard.
Use, distribution or reproduction of this Standard in any way constitutes acceptance of the above terms.
 Contact:
BARS Program Office
Flight Safety Foundation
Regional Office
GPO Box 3026
Melbourne, Victoria 3001, Australia

Telephone: +61 1300 557 162

Fax: +61 1300 557 182

Email: BARS@[Link]
Web: [Link]/bars

Flight Safety Foundation

Head Office
801 N. Fairfax Street, Suite 400
Alexandria, Virginia US 22314-1774

Telephone: +1 703 739 6700

Fax: +1 703 739 6708

 Version 5, May 2014